l^HISBOOK^

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2007 with funding from

Microsoft Corporation

http://www.archive.org/details/britishanglersleOOniverich

££*-• &Ce.nfi.y £4,

WJ£

t-*yZfr

■a

THE

BRITISH ANGLER'S

LEXICON.

BY

EICHAED ^IVEZlST

ILLUSTRATED.

PUBLISHED BY W. J. CUMMINS,
NORTH OF ENGLAND WORKS, BISHOP AUCKLAND.

Ion Don;

SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON, SEARLE, & R1VINGTON (Limited),

st. dunstan's house, fetter lane, fleet street, e.c.

[All Rights Reserved.}

/ViT

PREFACE.

A PREFACE to such a work as I now venture to offer to
the Angling, World is unnecessary, and only that I consider
it incumbent upon me to return thanks to my many kind
angling friends for the interest shown and the assistance
they have given me, I would launch the boat without the
christening ceremony.

As a lover of the " gentle art" from the time that I first
caught a stickleback with the point of a rush and a crooked
pin, I have ever felt a great interest in all relating to it,
and an all absorbing desire to assist and teach the " young
idea." There are many well written books on " angling,"
treating elaborately on every branch of it, and well worthy
of perusal. I have drawn particular attention to several of
them in the various articles of the " Lexicon." But this
effort of mine. I do not class as a book at all, it is merely a
condensed reference to all that relates to fish and fishing,
so that the tyro, for whose especial benefit it is mainly
designed, may easily gain practical information on any
subject. It is not intended to supersede in any way the
various works already before the Angling World, but, on
the contrary, to encourage a perusal of them. I have
endeavoured to make the articles as concise as possible,
and, I believe, all that has been noted down is reliable.

245

To Messrs. S. ALLCOCK & Co., of Redditch, the noted
wholesale tackle makers, I return my best thanks for the
trouble they have taken in furnishing me with descriptions
and samples of the various tackle employed ; to Mr. W. J.
CUMMINS, North of England Works, Bishop Auckland, for
the practical help given in all that relates to fly tying and
flies for the English and Scotch rivers ; and last, not least,
to my old friend THOMAS GERRARD, Esq., for his kindly
assistance in the tying of Irish trout flies, than whom few
can fabricate a better lure in fur and feather— aye, and
catch a trout with the same. I commend his motto to all
my friends : " Never pass a spring." To one and all of my
other friends, who shall be nameless, solely on account of
taking up too much of what was, at the start, to be " No
Preface," I return my thanks, and so, in the words bor-
rowed from the great Master of the Gentle Art, " I think
" fit to tell thee these following truths, and much less own
11 this discourse to please myself, and having been too easily
" drawn to do all to please others, as I propose not to the
il gaining of credit by this undertaking, so I would not
" willingly lose any part of that to which I had a just title
"before I began it, and do therefore desire and hope if I
" deserve not commendations yet I may obtain pardon."

Richard Niven.

Chrome Hill, Lis burn.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Air Bladder or Swimming Bladder is intended
to aid fish in ascending deep water, and for the accommo-
dation of their specific gravity. It diminishes or increases
according to the pressure exercised upon it by the ribs.
It is of various sizes and forms, and is situated under
the spine, in the abdomen. The air contained in it consists
of nitrogen, and is formed by secretion. In some fish,
such as soles and other flat fish, and eels, it is entirely
wanting, as they exist chiefly at the bottom of the water.
Isinglass of the finest kind is made from the air bladder.

Alevin is the name given to the newly hatched-out trout
during the period of it having the yolk sac attached to it,
and which amounts to about two-thirds of the length of time
of incubation ; if the water is cold and falling in temperature
this period is lengthened.

Alexandra Fly. — This is really no imitation of any
living insect. The body is composed of silver tinsel, and

the wings of the bright strands of
the greenest peacock herl ; some-
times red ibis strands are inserted,
and often jungle cock feathers.
They are made all sizes, and are
principally used in the South of
England rivers, fished well sunk in
the water and worked more like a minnow ; they kill
well on many lochs, and for Norway fishing they are

6 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

invaluable, if made on No. 4 and 5 hooks, Kendal scale —
the trout there on some rivers are very partial to this
green-winged fly ; they are also made with a spinning
attachment.

Aluminium Reels.— These reels are entirely made
of aluminium, in trout, sea trout, and salmon sizes. They
are exceedingly light and strong, but rather expensive,
and therefore not extensively in demand. '1 he weight of a
salmon reel, 4 inches in diameter, is only 9 ounces, and a
trout reel 2\ inches weighs 3 ounces. They are very
serviceable, and will last a lifetime.

Angling" is the art of catching fish with rod, line, and
hook — to the latter is attached a lure of some sort — and
is a sport so ancient, that its origin has been lost in the
mists of antiquity. It has afforded amusement of the highest
degree to multitudes of great and learned men in all ages,
and continues still to do so. It has been looked upon by
many as a stupid and a selfish pastime. It certainly cannot
with truth be called stupid, as the pursuit of it necessitates
the exercise of all the skill a man possesses. It is not selfish,
as no body of men take greater delight in each other's
society than anglers ; and although for the necessity of
success, it is better to be alone in the actual pursuit of it,
yet that does not hinder " sweet conferences " now and
then with each other on meeting on the banks of a river,
exchanging ideas upon the sport, flies, &c. Angling has a
tendency to produce in the mind of him who pursues the
art a real love of nature, as there is spread out before him
all the wondrous treasures of her storehouse. He must
be a man " devoid of soul" who cannot enjoy and learn.
The beauty of the scenery through which he wends his way,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 7

amidst the balmy breaths of spring or the genial warmth
of summer, combines to create in his breast a real interest in
the varied forms of the animal and vegetable life that he
sees around him, and to elevate his mind by dwelling on the
bounties that the Giver of all Good has thus lavishly placed at
his disposal. It is a healthy pursuit, too, bringing into active
exercise all the muscles of the body, and clearing the mind
that has become fogged by the cares of business. It
becomes a passion all-enthralling, and when once it takes
hold of a man, he prefers it to all other amusements. Other
sports may be more exciting, but there are none requiring
more intelligence, vigilance, and skill. His quarry is ever
on the alert, and, with all man's superior knowledge, he
often fails to convince the fish that he is not a fraud. An
angler — a good one — is so by instinct, the love of and the
proficiency in it grows from his youth, and, unknown to him-
self, he develops into an expert in the art. No education
will make a good angler if his inclination be against it.
The appliances used in angling look very puny for the work
that has to be done — a line like gossamer, a fragile rod, and
a liliputian hook, with a barb so small that it is almost
invisible to the naked eye — with these he essays to capture
the monsters of the deep, which, if they only knew how little
they had to contend against, would soon settle the matter
with a judicious flop of their tail, and leave the angler " on
the shore lamenting/' A light hand, a quick eye, a good
temper, and the patience of Job, are all essential requi-
sites to make a successful angler. 'Tis said that a man
who is fond of chess always turns out a professor of the
gentle art ; this is because he owns all the above quali-
fications, with the addition of thought and intelligence.
Various are the lures adopted in angling — first, the natural

8 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

living insect and the artificial imitation of the same ; then
with worms of sorts ; maggots, gentles, and paste ; live
and dead minnows ; artificial representations of these, and
spoons. Angling is divided into three branches — the
surface angling, in which the natural and artificial fly
come into play ; that of the mid-water, where the various
spinning and trolling baits are used ; and, lastly, the bottom
fishing, with worms or bait. All of these modes are adopted
as occasion or the state of the river requires, and it is well
when going on a fishing excursion to be provided with the
necessary adjuncts to carry out any or all of these methods.
Approach to the Water.— This term applies to
the manner in which the angler gets safely and success-
fully to the scene of his labours. Should the stream or river
be a deep, heavy, dark-coloured one, it is not of so much
importance how the angler " approaches " and works
it. Still it is a safe and good practice to keep as well out
of sight of the fish as possible. Should the water be low
and clear, greater precaution must be observed if the angler
desires to be successful in his sport. Before reaching the
edge of water that is to be fished, the angler should cast
his eye around him, and note particularly all the bearings
of the spot, see if a friendly tree will offer a sure hiding
place, or if a bunch of rushes, or tall grass or weeds, will
serve as a cover, and decide how best to get close to the
water, without showing his person to the quick-sighted fish.
When you are going to fish a pool, get to the lower end of it at
first ; if this be too deep to wade, crouch below the bank if
there be a footing. If the banks are high and afford no cover,
the only chance is to lie down on the top of the bank,
showing but the arm and head, and as little of these as
possible, and thus a few of the finny tribe may be captured.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 9

If you are provided with waders, and the river is not too
deep, get into the water at once, wading as quietly as
possible so as not to disturb the stretch, as the closer the
angler is to it, the less his figure shows ; he will very often
see small trout rise within a yard of him, if he stands
perfectly still. If the bank shelves at one side, and there is
a deep run at the other, creep down until the feet touch the
water, and, if possible, cast with a side switch into the
heavy stream ; this is usually a sure place for a trout. If a
fish is seen rising either above or below you, don't approach
it fair from either side ; leave the stream, right back into
the field, well out of sight ; walk parallel, at this distance,
with the river to the spot where the fish was, and creep or
crawl quietly back to the river side, a few yards behind the
spot marked. The fish may rise again, and you will have a
very good chance, if no awkward casting be made, of hooking
him any way. If bushes hang over the water, and prevent
the ordinary way of casting, shorten the line, coil it round
the top of rod, and protrude through any available opening
in the bushes ; uncoil the line and cast with low side switches,
when success may crown your efforts, as a difficult place
like this is seldom fished, and may hold a good trout that
considers his fortress impregnable. The difficulty, however,
is not over when the fish is hooked ; it really only begins
then, as there is no proper way of landing him, and many a
good fish has been lost at this part of the performance.
The best chance is to lie down and force the body through
the bushes, keeping rod and arm well out, and allow the fish
to exhaust itself completely, when the line should be
shortened to its utmost limit, and try to get the landing net
under the fish ; here the assistance of a friend comes in
handy. As a rule, don't touch the line with the hand, or a

10 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

break is almost sure to occur. Approach the water, facing;
the sun or that part of the sky where the sun should be,
lest your shadow or that of the rod may be thrown on
the water. Nothing frightens a fish so much as a shadow
being thrown across the water above him. Sometimes it is
nearly impossible to approach the water without becoming
visible to the fish. In this case lie down flat on the bank, so
tar back that you are not able to see the water, even on the
far side ; then drop the fly over the near bank on the chance
of a fish taking it, which — if there be one — it will do con-
fidingly, providing it is the proper fly. You will not see the
rise, but only feel the touch, when you may play him.
There is the danger in this case of dropping your fly on
weeds or grass growing at the edge, when, of course, you
must come into view to release it ; but it is well to risk all this*
especially as you cannot " approach" any other way. Never
walk close to a stream you are going to fish ; keep a stone's
throw from it, unless when angling, or you are walking for
pleasure alone. Still, in doing this you often spoil another
angler's sport, who may be ensconced in a hidden spot
invisible to you. The human figure on a high bank, when
backed by a clear sky, must look to the fish a veritable
giant, quite formidable enough to scare him to his den
among the stones, and keep him there for an hour at least.

Archer Spinner is used for natural bait fishing,,
and made in three sizes, for trout, salmon, and pike.

To bait this spinner, open out the fins which act on an
eyeletted joint to a right angle with the needle. The needle

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. II

is then passed through the bait, the fins that are open are
then pressed into the gills of the fish, and this completes
the baiting.

Artificial Dry Fly Fishing1 is practised by those
who fish the clear chalky streams of the Midland and
Southern counties of England, and is now coming into
fashion very much elsewhere when the water is clear and
calm and altogether useless for trying the ordinary wet fly.
The flies used are special, and made so as to float upon
the surface of the water, and thus present to the rising fish
the closest resemblance possible to the natural living fly
upon which they are feeding. These dry flies sit lightly on

the water with the wings upright or cocked, and as they
are deftly cast over the spot where the rising fish is, in the
rings made by the last rise, they are almost certain to be
sucked in ; they are usually fished singly. After the fly
has been on the water, before returning it again, it is
dried by a cast or two in the air. All the tackle used in
this style of angling is of the very finest — the rod single-
handed and well balanced. It requires some practice before
the dry fly fisher is capable of dropping the fly perfectly —
and this at a long distance too — without a splash, in the exact
spot required, and it requires some dexterity to keep it nicely
floating towards the angler over the fish, without having any
slack line in the water. The horizontal or undercast throw
is the best style, where it is practicable, as one of the

12 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

essential features of 'this mode of fishing is to drop the fly
on the water with the right side up and the wings cocked.
No written description will make a good dry fly fisher ;
seeing an expert at the work and practising keenly is the
only plan. For full particulars of this fascinating mode of
angling, the reader is referred to the admirable works by Mr.
Halford ; they are most interesting, instructive, and well
written, and the illustrations are exceedingly good.

Artificial Flies are imitations of the natural living
fly or insect used by the angler to deceive and capture the
wary fish. They are divided into two classes — winged flies
and hackle or spider flies. The materials entering into
their composition are the hook, the link of gut or hair to

SPIDERS. WINGED FLIES.

which the hook is fastened, and the materials which
surround and cover the hook to form the deceptive imita-
tion. The varieties of these are very numerous, of various
sizes, shapes, and colours, and they are now so cleverly
made by the professional fly-dresser that it is hardly
necessary for a man to tie his own flies, except indeed to
give him an increased interest in his sport, as he will have,
if he captures a fish w7ith a fly of his own creation in
preference to those he has purchased. The artificial fly is
a combination of feathers of sorts to form the wings ;
dubbings of hair, wool, fur, silk, and gold or silver tinsel
to compose the body ; hackles taken from the neck of

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 13

a bird, or feathers from the tail, for legs ; and hair or fibres
of feathers for tails. How these are put together is found
in a separate article. There are divided opinions as to the
relative merits of colour, shape, and size in dressing an
artificial fly. Some authorities pay more attention to one
of these objects and some to the others. It seems a sensible
plan to copy in every particular the natural fly, and it is
obvious that if one article is to be produced which is to
represent another, the closer the imitation is carried out the
better chance of it succeeding in its object whatever that
may be, as in this case to capture fish, by offering them an
artificial article which they are to mistake for the real one.
Now it is difficult to know what colour a fly presents to a fish
looking up through the medium of a body of water of varying
density and colour ; it may be very different to what the
angler thinks it is, and consequently all that can be done is
to study carefully both by reflected and transmitted light
the colours of a living fly, and mix with care the various
coloured materials that will go to make the same colour in
the artificial, or as near it as possible. There is no question
whatever that some practical anglers who have studied
carefully the flies they see, are often able to suggest either
an addition or the withdrawal of a colour from the body or
the wing of an artificial fly, which will cause it to deceive
better than it originally did. Instances have been given
over and over again of fish taking a fly so often that it has
become a mere shred of wool and feather, and although a
new fly, seemingly exact the same, has been put up to
replace the worn one, yet the fish refused to take it, and
stopped until the worn-out veteran was restored to its place
upon the cast. Now this must have been caused by colour
alone, as both size and shape were gradually changing.

14 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Some anglers have a great eye for colour, and will choose a
shade that will be successful from a shade that looks to an
ordinary observer to be identically the same. This remark
applies very forcibly to orange and claret colours. Winged
flies are perhaps greater favourites than hackle flies. The
latter are supposed to represent spiders or those insects
which shoot along the surface of the water and do not fly,
being destitute of wings. Hackle flies are seldom used in
the Irish rivers — more in the North of England and Scotch
streams. They don't stand as much hard work as the
winged flies, and are generally composed of softer materials.
Different localities have special flies suitable, and it is a wise
proceeding for the angler when going to a strange place,
for the first time, to get acquainted with some local angler,
and procure from him patterns or consult him as to the sort
of flies that are used in the locality. He will be a gainer by
doing so. Some anglers — and men of authority, too — assert
that if the angler has three flies on his cast of the distinctive
colours of red, green, and yellow, or combinations of these,
that he will have all that is necessary for sport on any river
all the year round. This assertion is contradicted in a most
emphatic manner by well-known angling authors and by
nearly every tackle maker or fly tyer, else they would never
keep and offer such a tremendous variety as they do ; still it
is true that there are too many useless patterns to be found
in most angler's books. There are about a dozen standard
flies, which can be counted upon to give successful sport on
any British river at any season of the year. Many of these
are dressed differently by various fly tyers, and localities
nave some influence on this difference. Take for instance
the blue dun fly. One man will only use this fly when
dressed with a silk body of the olive-greyish colour required;

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 15

another must have it dressed with the fur taken from the
flank of the water rat. Now they both may be right — in
English rivers the silk body obtains ; in the Irish rivers the
water rat fur has the preference. Instances of this kind
might be given about all the flies ; it is a distinction without
a difference. The flies that are now being tied for the
modern dry fly fishing come nearer the living insect in
appearance than what has hitherto been used for the wet
fly fishing, and are perfect works of art. Recently a new
style of artificial trout fly has been introduced. It is
patented, and is called the "Inimitable Fly." The natural
fly is copied to the life, even to the veining of the tiny
transparent wings. Its manufacture is an unquestionable
stride in the right direction, and, to judge from its
appearance, it will be a most successful lure, and, taking
into consideration the skill displayed in its creation, the
price is very reasonable. Artificial flies (at any rate
those used for dry fly fishing) should be kept in a box
in preference to a book, as the latter presses the feather
and fur into awrkward shapes, destroying the light, airy
appearance which all flies should possess. The flies used
in salmon fishing are different from trout flies in this, that
they do not resemble any natural insect that exists. They
are composed of gorgeous coloured feathers, wool, and silk,
with tinsel lavishly disposed about them ; are tied on larger
hooks, of course, as they have much heavier work to contend
with. They have a loop of twisted gut tied in the head of
the fly, which serves in place of an eyed hook or the link of
gut that is fastened to the trout fly. The size of salmon
artificial flies depends very much on the weight of water. In
heavy rolling rivers, sometimes the fly is a veritable monster
in size. This is the case in many of the large rivers in

1 6 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Scotland, Norway, and Canada, which run heavy and with
great swiftness. In tidal streams in this country, the usual
size is about four or five times larger than that of the brown
trout size when the water is in its normal condition. In the
early spring, when the rivers are pretty full, the fly is used
larger, and again when autumn rains swell the water. In
summer the flies are reduced in size, principally owing to the
clearness of the water. There are a dozen or more of the
standard flies, which are all that are required to be carried in
the salmon angler's book — a list of these is given under
"Salmon Flies." There is another class of flies which
comes in between the salmon and the ordinary trout fly ;
these are the sea trout and lake trout flies. They are
generally tied on hooks about three times larger than the
brown trout flies. The sea trout patterns are composed
of bright coloured materials, while the lake trout flies
are made up of more sombre colours. Sea trout are so
ravenous on ascending a fresh water stream from the sea
that they are not fastidious in their choice, and are so
bold and determined in their dart at the lure that they have
barely time to notice what colour the fly is made of; still
occasionally it is necessary to cater somewhat for their
taste, and many a change of fly occurs before they can be
persuaded to shift the scene of their labours, especially
if they have been a few days in the river after their sea
voyage, or the water is low and clear.

Artificial Fly Books are the handy receptacles
generally carried by the angler, which contain the stock
of flies suitable for his sport. They are usually got up in
the same style, wTith leaves of parchment divided by w7hite
felt, specially prepared for the purpose. The parchment
leaves are made up into small pockets, each side stitched.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

and in these pockets the coil of gut to which the
flies are attached is inserted, leaving the flies exposed
to view so that the angler may readily choose what he
requires. It is usual also in these fly books to have
leather receptacles for scissors, needles, disgorger, a file or
tweezers, and baiting needles. It is a mistake to have the

TROUT FLY AND TACKLE BOOK.

book too small ; it should measure at least six inches by
four inches, so that the flies may lie neatly, and not stray
out — at least that the gut should not stray outside the leaves,
as it is very apt to do from getting hard in the process
ot time. The binding of the book should be of good strong
leather that will not suffer from a little rain or from lying
in the damp grass, although it is advisable to keep it as dry
as possible to preserve the hooks from rusting. The corners
of each parchment leaf should have a shaving of cork or
thick leather glued on, so as to prevent the leaves pressing
together and spoiling the appearance of the flies. This is
a great objection to fly books in general, and many good
anglers have given up the use of them and taken to carrying
their flies in boxes. It would be a decided improvement if
a book could be brought before the angling public more in
the character of a box ; this can be managed by having
the edges flapped with a stiff binding, so that when the

l8 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

book is closed the edge of this flap rests against the opposite
edge of the back, and takes the pressure entirely off the
contents. Nothing spoils a fly more than pressing it
tightly, doing away with the light, airy appearance ot the
body, and crushing the wings so that they will not sit right
when thrown on the water. In all cases procure at first a
good book, one that will last many years, as a cheaply got
up one only turns out to be a nuisance. Trout flies should
be kept in a book by themselves ; salmon flies also require
a separate book. All the flies should be arranged neatly in
their colours or names, with the links of gut upon which
they are tied looped in coils, so that when wishing to pick
out a fly on the banks of a river, when a change is
necessary, the angler can put his hand on it at once without

METHODICAL FLY BOOK.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 19

having to turn over page after page, and very likely lose
some by having them blown out by the wind. A very good
book has lately been brought out called the " Methodical
Fly Book." It is made to contain sixty pockets, opposite to
each of which is the name, description of fly, and the proper
time to use it. The illustration on preceding page will
give a good idea of its usefulness. A few minutes' time, after
a day's fishing, will sort the book up, and it is quite a comfort
to the angler when his flies are nicely arranged. The book
should have the name and address of the owner legibly written
or printed on the leather front page, as in this case he has a
better chance of it being restored should he inadvertently
leave it on the river bank or at the place he was changing
his fly. It is advisable to carry the book in the basket
receptacle, as if carried in the pocket the heat and per-
spiration of the body not only harden the parchment leaves
but rust the hooks. Keep the book, when not in use,
somewhere that that foe to feathers, the moth, doth not
corrupt. Since going to press, a box fly book has been
brought out, and looks practical and handy in every respect.
Artificial Fly Fishing? is the summum bonum of
the angler's art. It is the most popular of all the means of
catching fish ; it is both clean, pleasant, and captivating ;
it brings into play all the faculties of the angler's brain, as
he has a wary, watchful foe to circumvent, and, with all
man's superiority, the fish very often has the best of it.
Besides the possession of a keen eye, and a steady gentle
hand, the angler must own a good deal of judgment, and
although he may get many useful hints from books, yet by
practice alone can he carve out tor himself his future career.
It is necessary that he should have a nice even temper, and
lots of patience. Armed with his rod duly set up, to which has

20 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

been attached his reel line and cast of flies, he " approaches
the water " to take his maiden cast, and accompanied by a
good natured friend — an adept in the gentle art — he makes
his first essay in what most probably will be the leading
hobby of his future life. He grasps the handle of the well-
balanced rod above the reel, with the thumb resting upwards
•on the rod, and the line drawn off for two or three
yards ; he takes the tail fly between the finger and thumb of
the left hand, and swings the rod round and back, letting
the line go at the same time until it has reached its utmost
length behind the back, when the rod should be brought
forward in a circular manner, so as to alight the flies on the
spot upon which the eye is fixed. Just as the line is about
touching the water, check the downward sweep of the rod, and
raise it slightly, which serves to pitch the cast of flies
straight and lightly on the surface. It takes some care-
ful and observant practice to carry out these instructions
properly — some anglers cannot do it in a life-time, others
can do it in a day. It soon becomes apparent to the tyro
what he has to do, and he must find out for himself the best
way to succeed in his object — which is to alight on the
water the artificial flies in the most natural manner, so as to
deceive the fish into the belief that these flies are natural
ones, coming down as usual to furnish him with a dainty
morsel. It is essential in the backward cast that the line
should go out to its full length before the return stroke is
made, else there is the danger of whipping the flies or a fly
off the casting line. A notice of this is given by a sound
like the crack of a whip ; this sound always makes an
angler wTince, as he judges he is minus a fly when he hears
it — the line should make rather a whistling sound. A
fly fisher will find it of service to fix his eye a yard

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 21

beyond the spot he wishes the tail-fly to drop on ; he also
should practice casting with his left hand, and from both
left to right, and vice versa ; also underhand casting and
switching side-ways, which is done by lowering the back of
the hand holding the rod, and bringing it up again sharply,
the line circling in front of the angler from side to side.
This stroke or style of casting is of great use when fishing a
stream where branches overhang low on the water. All of
these modes come into play some time or other during a
day's fly fishing, and the sooner they are learnt the better.
Now, having practised throwing the line for a short time
until the awkwardness wears off, the fly fisher should seek
the haunt of the nimble trout, and having " approached the
water," begin casting up the stream on his own side, and
allow the flies to be carried down gently with the current,
until they get a little below where the angler stands. Then
make a fresh cast a little further out, and so on, until the
whole breadth of the stream has been fished over — that is
provided the water is not wider than the line will cover ; if
it is so, he must wade, or leave that portion out of reach for
some brother angler who may come up on the opposite side.
A movement up or down the stream may now be made ; if
it is a good fishing stream, not a yard of it should be missed.
The main line should not be permitted to sweep the water,
or as little of it as possible. The flies should be kept lively
but not pulled ; watch the manner of the natural fly
touching the water and try to imitate it. However, this
remark applies more to dry fly than to wet fly fishing,
as it is only with the latter first going on the water that they
can be kept on the surface, but it is not necessary that they
should be maintained there ; in fact, it is impossible to keep
them floating, and an inch or two under the surface is just

22 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

as enticing to the trout. Perhaps on the first cast a trout
rises ; if so, do not get excited and give the rod a great
upward jerk, as so many do, but calmly and deliberately
make a slight upward twisting motion of the wrist, which, if
done at the right time, is quite sufficient to send home the
sharp barbed hook into the fish's jaw, and you have him
on. And now comes the play — if he be a small fish, reel the
line up slowly and steadily until you can place the landing
net under and lift him out ; but if he is a fish, of three
quarters of a pound or even half a pound, you must humour
him a bit, and give some little time to exhaust his energy,
bearing in mind to be firm, to keep a tight line, and
allow the rod to play the fish, which its pliancy will or
ought to do. Keep the point of the rod well up. If he is a
strong fish, let him have a little line, but recover what he
takes out the moment he slackens speed ; increase the
upward movement of the rod, which is technically called
" giving the butt," and sail him steadily into the net,
which you have already sunk in the wrater with the left
hand. If the fish " splutters " on the surface of the water,
he is trying to get rid of the hook by breaking it with
his tail — allow the fish to sink for a moment, keeping a
tight line at same time. Remember the tackle is light, and
although in careful hands it might play and capture a good-
sized salmon, in careless hands it will give way with a trout
of four ounces ; no jerking, but gentle humouring with eye
and hand, and let the rod do the work. Watch its motions,
and it will give pleasure as well as instruction. Having
landed the fish and given him a knock on the head, carefully
release the hook ; if it is caught in the tongue or deeply
buried in the gullet or the jaw, cut it out with the point of a
sharp knife or a pair of scissors — do not force it out with the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 23

finger or the barb may be broken off, and the fly rendered
useless. If a fish is seen to be rising steadily, he is on the
feed ; so note carefully all the surroundings, bring the best
judgment into play how the flies can be got nicely over him.
If he is below, the angler should go back from the river, and
approach him cautiously from behind. It may be necessary
to wade up towards him, to cross the stream, or crouch
abreast of him, under the shade of an overhanging bank.
Mark the place he rose at last, and, having judged the
distance, take off as much line as will cover, and cast a
little beyond his " haunt"; then allow the fly to float naturally
over the spot. Should he make no movement, rest a little,
when he may rise again ; then try him once more — he may
take it, but oftener he will not. If he seems to be a good
fish, worth spending time upon, leave the river bank for a
little ; examine the flies that are hovering over or sailing
down the water, catch one, if possible, and endeavour to find
a good copy or imitation of it in the fly book, put it on as
the tail fly, and creep back to the same place and try your
fortune again. This time the right colour may have been
presented to him, and he will be enticed to his ruin. As a
rule, the single rising fish are good ones, so use every pre-
caution to get him to terms, and be careful not to allow the
fish to get a glimpse of you, if possible, until he is in the
landing net. Trout have very sharp sight, and, although they
are the gamest fish that swim, yet they fly at the first sight
of an encroachment on their demesne. In playing a fish,
always endeavour to prevent him from ascending the water,
so as not to disturb that part of it over which you have not
fished. Aim at keeping on the shallow side of a stream, as
the best fish lie in the deep. There is a great diversity of
opinion amongst anglers as to the comparative merits of up

24 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON,

or down stream fishing. In Scotland, up stream fishing
prevails most ; in Ireland, down stream fishing is practised.
There should not be a hard and fast rule in the matter.
Sometimes it is best and necessary to fish down, and again
it is right to fish up. If the wind is blowing directly down
stream, it is almost impossible to get the line out straight by
fishing or casting against it, at least the tyro will find it so ;
the flies are blown back in regular wisps, occasioning loss
of time and temper. (A word in season here — never lose
temper or no fish will come to the creel. Try to look at all
mishaps — and many a one occurs in a day's fly fishing — in a
philosophic light, and you will be the gainer.) If the river
is slightly coloured and enlarged by recent rains, down
stream fishing can be successfully practised, that is, if the
wind be favourable for downward casting ; but all this
must be decided by weather, wind, and condition of water.
Again, if the stream is strong and you are casting
against it, the flies are carried down very rapidly, causing
the line to " belly," and if a fish rose now ten chances
to one you could not strike him on account of so much
slackness of the reel line. Against these drawbacks
there is the advantage of working with a shorter line, and
the more certain chance of hooking a fish by pulling the
hook into his mouth, instead of pulling it from him, as it is
a well known fact that all trout lie in the water with their
heads up stream, keeping a look out for the food that comes
down the current, and as the angler must approach the fish
from behind, it is natural that he should throw or cast his
flies up ; and there is less ground to go over by walking up
and fishing up, than in walking up and fishing down. In
fishing down the line keeps taut, and along line can be used
with comparative ease. Across and up is a safe style of

25

casting a fly, and as this is a partial mixture of both modes,
it is very successful, provided the angler is able to keep well
out of sight of the fish. On a bright day, with clouds
moving about, keep a good look out for one to cross the sun,
and then is a good time to throw a fly — it is worth waiting
upon. It is not necessary that more than three casts should
be made at one spot, unless, indeed, there is a certainty that
a good fish is lurking about, when more attention should be
paid to him, resting a little between the casts. Keep
moving a yard or two up stream, but do not hurry over the
water. Many an angler thinks that because another is
moving ahead of him he is going to be left behind with an
empty creel, and hurries up to get past him. Ten chances
to one he is leaving better sport than he will get in front.
Never mind what your neighbour is doing — in fact, it is
better not to know until the day is over. If he has got a fish
soon after he starts and you none, and you are aware of this,
.it will put you out badly and spoil your enjoyment. There
is no sport in which there is more healthy emulation than
that of fishing, and to top the score at the end of a day
makes an angler as proud— although he will pretend he is
not — as if he had been left a small fortune. Never fish with
a longer line than can be delivered straight out on the water.
Some anglers err in using a long line, thinking thereby
that they are covering more water, whereas they are not,
but leaving a lot of the line in rings, which not only frightens
the fish, but prevents striking successfully when they see
the rise ; a long line, too, is apt to get caught on bushes,
grass, or weeds, when making the backward stroke. Fish
carefully all quiet water between streams, and if there is a
trout about, he will be where the stream merges into the
deep. Trout feed all over, and by noting particularly the

26 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

spots where the first one or two fish have been caught you
are nearly safe to assume that those are the favourite
positions all over the stream for that particular day, or the
greater portion of it. The best works to study on ordinary
fly fishing for trout are "The Practical Angler," by W. C.
Stewart, and " Angling," by Francis Francis. Both are
excellent, and should certainly be in the library of every fly
fisher.

Artificial Fly Making is difficult to explain by
writing ; it requires to have a lesson or two from a pro-
fessional to show the manipulation necessary to make a
proper fly, and it takes a good deal of practice, after all the
lessons have been learnt, before a tyro can fabricate one
which will entice a wary trout to take it. Still, if an angler
loves his sport, anything relating to it has such especial
interest for him, that it is wonderful how soon a seemingly
difficult task is overcome. The fly dresser must have a good
deal of patience, and a thorough desire of overcoming
difficulties. The first fly or two that a man ties he bungles
over, sometimes for an hour or two, and is almost
frightened at what he has produced, but very soon his eye,
his fingers, and his imagination work so thoroughly in
unison that in a short time he may be able to tie a fly in a
few minutes. This much is certain — the quicker the fly
can be fabricated, entailing less handling of the materials,
the more natural the finished imitation will appear. Some
must have a host of implements at hand before they can
start to their work — a vice (which for trout fly tying is
perfectly unnecessary), one or two pairs of scissors, a pair of
pliers, a dubbing needle, &c. Many of the best fly dressers
that can be produced, whose flies are eagerly sought after,
never use any instrument but their fingers and a pair of

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 27

scissors. With ordinary fingers a good fly can be con-
structed. The first operation in tying a trout fly is to
"arm" it; that is. fasten the hook to a length of gut or
hair, this is done as follows : Take the hook 'by the bend
in the finger and thumb of left hand, coil the gut up into a
ring of about one inch in diameter, leaving two inches of
the gut standing out at right angles to the ring ; moisten
this end of the gut in water or the mouth, and flatten about
three-eighths of an inch of it by means of the teeth. Have
ready a length of silk thread of whatever colour is desired,
as fine as possible, consistent with some strength to stand a
fair pull. The length of silk thread should be at least
twelve inches. Now take a small piece of shoemaker's wax
about the size of a pea, hold one end of the silk thread in
the teeth, and wax it well. Some keep their wax in a
bit of leather, so as not to soil the fingers, but this is not
necessary as slightly moistening the finger and thumb will
prevent the wax adhering to them, and the heat of the
fingers helps the wax to run easier over the silk. Take two
or three turns of the end of silk thread round the shank of
hook, about a quarter of an inch off the extreme end of
shank ; now place the flattened piece of gut underneath the
shank of hook against the silk, hold it there by the finger
and thumb of left hand and begin lapping it evenly and
closely with the thread from about one eighth off the point
of shank, until it comes opposite the point of barb,
when the thread is fastened by the half hitch (q. v.). Now
lay this hook and gut down and prepare the materials for
the body, wings, and legs, as this is a winged fly that we are
describing. Take a pinion feather of the bird from which you
wish to form the wings, it may be that of a starling, a grouse,
a woodcock, &c, but the easiest wing to begin with is the

28 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

starling, as it keeps its web so well ; separate with the point
of a knife or a pin about half an inch of the long fibres on one
piece. Take this web of fibres in the right finger and
thumb and straighten the points of it by a little manipula-
tion, until all the fibres stand up as nearly level on the
points as can be. Hold firmly in this shape and tear
them off the quill ; lay this wing down and prepare another
web same way, the dark side of the feather lowermost.
This is the inside of the pinion not exposed when on the
bird. These are to form the two wings. Now for the
body : This may be made either of floss silk, of a desired
colour, or of wool, mohair, or fur. If it is silk, a piece
sufficient to cover the body of fly is cut off and laid down ;
if it is a mixture of hair or wool, this is sorted together,
mixed according to known proportions, to get desired
colour. It may be a third of hare's ear, a third of olive
mohair, a few hairs of claret, fiery red, or brown. These
are teased up, and a sufficient quantity is made up in the
hollow of the hand into a little roll, pear shaped, about one
inch long, or less if the hook is small ; lay this down also.
Now cut off a piece of gold or silver tinsel, flat, about one-
and-a-half inches, then take two fibres, either of wild duck
feathers or two rat's or rabbit's whiskers or any of the fibres
used to make the tails ; lay these down and then prepare the
hackle for legs. This is generally the small spear-shaped
feather taken from the back of the head of a barn door fowl,
a game cock, or it may be the tail feather of a wren or a
partridge back feather. The hackle feather is taken by the
extreme point with the right finger and thumb, and the fibres
are stroked the wrong way by the left finger and thumb,
so as to make them stare, and to stand out when coiled
round the fly. Now all being ready — and enough materials

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 20,

can be prepared at once to make several flies of same
pattern — the armed hook is taken up in the left hand,
and the tinsel is caught with a couple of whips of the
silk, and is then coiled twice round the shank of hook,
just clear of the arming, and fastened with a turn or
half hitch and the surplus cut away. The two fibres
for the tails are caught in just over the tinsel, allowing
them to extend about three-quarters of an inch beyond
and inclining upwards. A whip of the silk fastens them
and the butts may be trimmed off with the point of
scissors. The tying silk should now get a fresh waxing,
and the dubbing spun upon it by twirling it in the fingers
and winding it round at same time, beginning with a slight
quantity of the dubbing and getting it heavier as it goes up
to the shoulder. This all can be managed by forefinger and
thumb of right hand, pushing the dubbing up or drawing it
thinner as the taper of the body of fly requires. When the
dubbing is about three-quarters wound, tie in the point of the
hackle feather on the top of hook and give one or two turns
of the dubbing over it ; then two or three turns of the
bare silk from which you have stripped off the dubbing —
this confines the hackle which you now wind with two or
three turns either to you or from you as you find the most
suitable to make the fibres of hackle stand out nicely, and
with an inclination to point away from the head. The quill
portion of the hackle is held either by a pair of pliers or with
the finger and thumb of the right hand, the forefinger of left
hand being all the time occupied in pressing the turns of the
hackle against the body of fly as they are made, so as to
prevent them getting slack, or out of their place. When
you have made three or four turns of the hackle, grip the
quill end with a turn of the waxed silk, which has been

30 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

carried out of the way of the hackle by throwing it over the
gut to the right hand, so as not to get mixed with it, but
easily to be brought back to make the turn and half hitch
which fastens the hackle firmly. Now the wings are to be
put in their places and a little care and judgment are
required to have them sitting naturally — as the wings of a
living fly. The wing fibres are taken up by the finger and
thumb of left hand, having the tops level, and with finger
and thumb of right hand double the sides together so
as to take a concave form, into which the hackle and
dubbing of fly is pressed. The butt end of the fibres is now
whipped down on the bare end of the shank — about one-
sixteenth of an inch — with a few turns of the well-waxed silk,
and fastened off by two, or at most three half hitches ; see
that the wings when tied incline at an angle of forty-five
degrees to the shank of hook. Some flies have flatter wings,
and some are made more upright, according to the sort of fly
the imitation is intended to represent. Some dressers
separate the wings, by taking the tying silk between equal
portions of them, carrying it round the hook underneath
and bringing it up again once or twice so as to form a
distinct partition. Others put the wings on first of all, by
tying the butts in, leaving the fibres away from the bend,
and when the body is completed these wings are bent back
into proper direction and confined by whipping over the
bent fibres. Be sure and have the silk well waxed ) so as to
finish off the tying firm, which is done by a couple of half
hitches or slip knots. If the fly has to be ribbed with either
tinsel or silk, these are tied in when the arming is done,
leaving them depending until the body is finished, when they
are wound spirally in coils up to the hackle or shoulder and
secured by the tying silk. When making the head, that is

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 31

lapping on the wings, be sure and have the shank of hook
clear for a sixteenth of an inch ; this can be managed if the
dubbing or hackle encroaches upon it by pushing them well
back with the thumb nail. After the fly is finished cut
off the butts of the wing feather, close to point of shank,
also the tying silk, and put a touch of varnish on the head,
which will make it firm. In Halford's book on dry fly
fishing, a very full description is given of modern fly tying,
and the illustrations are numerous and perfect. He recom-
mends a vice, which leaves both hands free to manipulate
the fly. But it can be done without. The making of the
dry flies is more particular than the wet ones, as they are
floating, and must closely imitate the dry living fly. But
there is no reason why as much attention should not be
paid to wet fly making, and the more perfect the imitation is
the better success will attend it. Most artificial flies have too
much fur and feather about them ; the finer the shape the
better, but the colour is the most essential element, as
large and coarsely made flies are often seen in the hands of
the rural angler, doing good work, when the most perfect
specimens of the fly dresser's art in the hands ot a stranger
may be barren of results, and that stranger a good angler
too, but there will be something wrong with the colour of
the fly he is using. Hackle flies are made in a similar
manner, but without wings, and the hackle is tied in
at the tail and wound right up the whole body — with
some flies which have no hackle, the dubbing is pulled
out at the head with the dubbing needle, leaving the
fibres loose, and these form the legs. Spider flies are made
by taking the hook in the left finger and thumb ; lay the gut
along the shank, and with a well-waxed silk thread,
commence in centre of hook and whip it and gut together

32 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

until the end of shank is reached, where the head is formed
by several turns of the lapping silk, which should be of the
colour the spider is to be made. Now take the feather and
lay the butt end of quill on the shank towards the bend of
hook, lay the well waxed thread along the quill on the
inside of feather and spin or twirl both round, and in this
state begin winding on the feather, carrying it down to
where you commenced. Take care to have most of the
fibres free to stand out, if they do not, they can be picked
out with the dubbing needle — finish off with a few hitch
knots. The hackle or feather can also be put on, perhaps
more neatly by not twisting the silk with it, but after
fastening the root end firmly to the shank of hook, take
the other end in the spring nippers and roll it evenly round
until it is finished, when it is fastened with the thread
which has been laid along the shank to make the finishing
hitch. Salmon flies are not more difficult to make than
trout flies, although they are more elaborate, but being
much larger they are easier tied, and there is more room to
work up the materials. There are additions also to these,
such as toppings and tags ; they are also made in divisions,
very often three, and even four different coloured materials
forming the body, divided by the herl of ostrich or peacock,
sometimes with floss silk, gold or silver tinsel — this style is
called a jointed body. The wings are mixed by using bright
feathers fiom different birds. A good deal of license is left
in the fly dresser's hands in forming salmon flies, as they
really are not representatives of any living insect. How-
ever, there are several standard flies which are greatly used
owing to their established success as lures, and these of
•course should be most carefully imitated.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 33

Artificial Minnows are deceptive imitations of the
living fish, to be used by spinning or trolling in the capture
of the larger varieties— salmon, lake trout, trout, and pike.
These are made of different materials — glass, horn, metal,
bone, wood, silk, indiarubber, quill, and soleskin. An im-
mense number of patterns have come into existence since
"Old Isaac Walton's " time ; many of them have disappeared
as useless, but there still remain about half-a-dozen which
hold their own against all comers. Among these may
be mentioned the " Phantoms," the " Devon," and the
"Quill" Minnows. The great desideratum in artificial min-
nows is not only good spinning qualities, but a proper
appearance, approaching that of the real fish. Walton had a
very good idea of what was wanted, and out of the materials
which the times he lived in afforded, he no doubt made a
very successful lure. His description of it is worth noting,
written as it is in the quaint and beautiful language of which
he was such a master. The minnow "was made by a
handsome woman that had a fine hand (and a live minnow
lying by her), the body of cloth, the back of it of very sad
French green silk and a paler green silk towards the belly,
shadowed as perfectly as you can imagine, just as you see a
minnow ; the belly was wrought also with a needle, and it
was a part of it white silk, and another part of it of silver
thread ; the tail and the fins were made of a quill, which
was shaven thin ; the eyes were of two little black beads,
and the head was so shadowed, and all of it so curiously
wrought, and so exactly dissembled, that it would beguile
any sharp-sighted trout in a swift stream." There is a very
good artificial minnow made from a quill, the invention of a
clever angler, the late Mr. Garnett, of Kendal, but it
has been much improved, and for trout fishing in either

C

34 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

clear or discoloured water is invaluable to the angler.
This class of minnow is very light, swims well, and the leads
are inside the quill and shine through. It requires a little

QUILL MINNOW.

practice to work the artificial minnow nicely in mid-water,
so as not to have it too deep nor yet too shallow — about
two feet underneath the surface is about the right depth.
The soleskin phantoms are most extensively used in India
for mahseer fishing, also for pike trolling, and being ex-
ceedingly strong and tough, they stand " wear and tear."

SOLESKIN PHANTOM.

The ordinary silk phantoms are largely used in Scotland and
Norway for salmon, lake trout, and trout ; these also have
been greatly improved by the introduction ot a swivel

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 35

inside the mouth, but bear in mind there should also be two
or three swivels attached to the trace to facilitate the
spinning motion ; this remark applies to all artificial
minnows. The pearl phantom is a great favourite on

ORDINARY SILK PHANTOM.

such lochs as Leven, Earn, &c, and also on the lakes
of Norway. It is the invention of Mr. Townsend, a
gentleman well known as a successful angler on Loch
Leven. The pearl is carefully shaped and painted, and
made of material that will last a long time. The archi-
medean spinners at the head cause it to revolve rapidly.

PEARL PHANTOM.

The minnow known as the Devon is well worthy of notice,
and ranks as high, if not higher, than any of its rivals. It
is made of metal, from one and one-eighth of an inch to three
inches, and painted in various colours ; the body is hollow,

36 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

and sits on a set of special hooks. When struck, the
minnow generally flies up the trace, while the hooks remain
in the mouth of the fish. Minnow fishing, at least for trout,
comes into play when waters are clearing after a flood,
before they are in a fit state to wTork the artificial fly.
When a fish is hooked on an artificial minnow, it is generally

DEVON MINNOW.

hooked well, and unless some accident takes place, such as
fouling in weeds, the fish is almost sure to be landed. The
hooks of the minnow should be well tempered, with clean-
cut barbs, and not too large.

Ash. — At one time a very favourite wood for the butts of
rods ; when well seasoned and straight in the grain is still
useful in medium class trout and salmon rods, and is also
suitable for the butts of stiff rods, especially those used for
trolling, pike fishing, or for angling for coarse fish. It is
not very elastic, nor "lifey" enough for either trout or
salmon rods, and is apt to take a set. It makes a very
good handle for a gaff or landing net. The best part
of the wood is that nearest the bark, and taken from a small
tree not more than eight or nine inches in diameter. Ash
also makes a good ring for landing net, if it is chosen
straight in the grain, and well seasoned; it steams nicely,
and so it can he bent to any shape required.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

37

Backhouse's Fly Book.

This book is on a novel prin-
ciple, made of interchangeable
framed leaves covered with felt,
and was patented by Mr. S.
Backhouse, of Leeds. It is most
useful for carrying flies and casts,
and the angler can arrange his
leaves to suit the various streams
he fishes.

Bag'gits are the female salmon already about to shed
their spawn. They are then " foul fish" and considered
unfit for the table, and the taking of them is prohibited by
British law. They are also called " shedders." These
names, originally local, have now become universal from
being introduced into Acts of Parliament. Care should
be taken to avoid using fish in a foul state, as it is
believed among scientists that the dread disease leprosy
has been occasioned by doing so. Proofs of this fact are
now being collected by eminent physicians.

Bag's, Fishing*, are made from moleskin, canvas, and
indiarubber, are handy for carrying fish, and being pliable
are not much in the way when fishing along rough banks
of streams, as they do not catch on the briars, thorns, &c.
They are made in several shapes, some with expanding
sides to allow large fish to be carried with the heads and
tails out, but fish are never so fresh and firm as when
carried in a basket. All bags should be turned inside
out and wiped dry before putting away ; exposing them
for a night on a tree or hedge keeps them free from
smell.

EXPANDING SALMON BAG.

TROUT FAGS.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 39

Baiting" Needle is a long thin piece of steel wire
with a spear shaped point at one end and a spring loop at
the other. It is used for threading or drawing the gut
or gimp attached to the hooks through the bait, and is
made in several sizes to suit minnow, dace, or gudgeon.

Bait Kettles are for carrying live fish to be used as
bait. They are made usually of zinc, with perforated lids, a
handle, and hasp. Some are round, some square, wider at
the bottom than at the top. They are also made double,
which allows the water to be poured out and renewed with-
out taking off the lid. If the water is kept cool and
agitated, fish will keep lively in them for a considerable
time. In carrying fish by these kett es, say for a long
railway journey, and fresh water is difficult to be had, if a
portion of the water is lifted out by a glass or cup, and
allowed to fall, say from a foot high, back into kettle again,
it will be thus aerated, and the fish will not suffer — as they
otherwise would do— failing a fresh supply.

Balance Of Rod is found by gripping it by the
handle in the usual place, and feeling no top-heaviness, nor
a want of compensating weight in the top. The balance
should always be judged with the reel and line fixed to the
rod. A single-handed fly rod should balance on the back of
a knife about two feet above the reel ; a double-handed
salmon rod about four feet above the reel. A well-balanced
rod is a comfort to work with ; it may be heavy, and
yet tire the angler less than one many ounces lighter but
badly balanced. Some anglers prefer a top-heavy rod ; it
is more powerful, but very wearying to cast with.

Bank Runners are adopted in pike fishing, thus
dispensing with the use of the rod. The bait employed
may be a small fish or frog, attached by a hook in various

40

ways to a long, strong, well-twisted hemp line wound on a
reel fastened to the top of a stout pointed peg or stake,
which is driven firmly into the bank. The line is suspended
over the water by a. forked stick; a float is used, and the
bait swims about. Careful watch must be kept on the
apparatus, so as to prevent all the line being drawn off the
reel and a break occurring. The tackle may be either single
or double hooks or snap hooks. These should be attached
to the reel line by gimp traces with a couple of swivels, as
the sharp leeth of a pike are apt to sever the plain cord.

Barbel, The [Cyprinus barbus). — A fish of the carp
order, and found in many of the large rivers of Britain. It
is a gregarious fish, and frequents streams with muddy
bottoms, which it ploughs up with its barbed snout, and
feeds on the insects and worms that it meets with. The
head of the barbel is smooth, the nostrils close to the eyes :
it is leather mouthed, from each corner of which depends a

THE BARBEL.

soft barbule (whence the name), two near the point of the
snout, and one depending from each angle of the mouth.
The shape is long and handsome ; the dorsal fin is strong
and spiny ; the scales are golden, edged with black ; the
tail forked and of a purplish colour. It attains a very

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 41

considerable weight. Some have been caught in the
Thames and Trent weighing over eighteen pounds and fully
a yard long. Barbel spawn in May and June.

Barbel Fishing".— As these fish are gross feeding,
they are only angled for with bait of some sort, and the
modes of doing so are varied. They can be fished for
wTith the ledger line ; with a float, in the Nottingham
mode ; also with the clay ball, and with paste made of
cheese, as in roach fishing. This latter is the most
sportsmanlike, and with the fine tackle used, a good
deal of sport is obtained, as playing and killing a fish
of say seven or eight pounds weight, with light roach
tackle, requires some skill and patience on the part of
the angler. Generally, the places where the barbel is
to be found, contain some deep quiet holes, and although
this fish is sufficiently powerful to swim against a heavy
stream, yet it prefers to ensconce itself in a quiet spot, and
watch for its prey from there. In consequence of the
stationary habit of the fish, it is almost a necessity to ground
bait the u swim," and this is generally done some hours
before the angler proceeds to fish ; the ground bait may be
maggots or red worms cut up into little pieces. These are
either thrown in above the swim, and allowed to be carried
down to it by the current, or they are enclosed in balls of
soft clay, which gradually washes away in the water, and
permits the worms enclosed therein to float out in the
spot where the fish are supposed to be. This is done to
entice the fish to leave their quiet quarters and to forage
about in search of the bait, and once they get accustomed
to meet with food so easily, it is only a matter of a little
arrangement to give them cold steel, encased by a worm.
Sometimes the hook is concealed in the clay ball, properly

42 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

baited with the tail of a worm or a gentle. Of course the
line is hidden in the ball and attached to the main line and
rod. When the swim is baited, the angler proceeds to the
spot with his rod and tackle. He baits a worm hook, No. 6,
and attaches a light quill float, which just allows the bait to
touch the bottom. This can be humoured by means of a
few large shot put on the line about a foot above the hook.
This baited line is allowed to travel slowly along the
bottom, throwing it in above the swim, and allowing it to
traverse it until the end is reached. This is the floating
style. The angler must keep as quiet and as much out
of sight as possible. Any. unusual disturbance drives
the fish back to their lairs, and the sport at once ceases.
Ledger line fishing is the same as for other fish. At the first
nibble the angler should not strike, but allow the barbel to
suck in the bait, which will be denoted by two or three
sharp plucks on the rod point, when the strike should
be quick and firm, the line held taut for a moment,
and then allowed to run if the fish is big and giving
play. The hold is generally good, as the mouth is very
tough, and the hook, in the ledger tackle is of pretty
fair size, say No. 6, 7, or 8. It requires a little practice
at the work to know when the fish is actually taking a good
hold, as barbel are very apt to keep nibbling at the tail of
the bait and withdrawing, something like a kitten at a
mouse. Barbel occasionally take the spinning bait when
the angler is fishing for trout in the streams, but it is an
exception, as they mostly feed at the bottom of the water.
When fishing with light tackle, the barbel must be
allowed to play for some time, and if possible keep the
fish away from its usual haunt, which may be where some
sunken roots or posts are, for if it gets in amongst these

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 43

there is every chance of a clean smash. It is apt to
try and throw itself over the line, and if the latter comes
in contact with the sharp fin, the partnership is dissolved.
When fishing from the bank with a leaded line let it drop
in very quietly ; there is no necessity for throwing it far
into the stream, as the fish usually feed close to the bank.
For an elaborate account of barbel fishing, the angler
cannot do better than consult " Francis Francis/' who was
a very successful angler for this fish, and understood all the
methods practised by the Thames fishermen, who no doubt
are the most proficient barbel fishers in the kingdom.

Baskets, called by some, "creels" and others " pan-
niers," are the usual receptacles carried by the angler to
contain what fish he may catch during his excursions. These
are mostly made from French willows or split cane, and are
shaped so that they may fit nicely against the side of the

FRENCH SPLTT WILLOW BASKET.

body, as they are slung from the shoulder by a broad girth
web strap furnished with buckle and tongue. Some have
false bottoms of zinc, or false interiors, which can be
removed for cleaning ; others have receptacles for holding

44 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

the fly book, sandwich case, &c, and have holes either
in the top lid or side to drop the fish through. All baskets
after use should be washed out or wriped dry, and hung in the
air to prevent them from getting tainted with a fishy smell.
The lid should be provided with a padlock to keep the
contents safe. It is useful to have a strap attached to the
basket to go round the waist. This helps to ease the
shoulder when the basket gets weighty, and supports the
back of the angler as well. A basket should be chosen of a
size that will suit the general run of the fish the angler will
mostly be in pursuit of. A large basket with a few small
fish in the bottom of it looks out of place ; as a rule, the
medium-sized baskets are best, and are more easily
carried. If an extra big fish is caught, the angler will

NEW BASKET, WITH LIFTING TRAY.

make some shift to have it conveyed home in safety.
One of the latest baskets introduced and patented contains
a tray on the top about three inches deep, to hold the fly

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 45

book, lunch, flask, &c. The hole to insert the fish is at the
side ; it has brass hinges, a hasp for padlock, and is furnished
with straps to carry waterproof coat and stockings. The
newest strap for slinging the basket is called the "Facile,"
and is very comfortable. It can be easily attached or
detached, and prevents the basket from sliding under the
arm when stooping or getting over a fence. It is slung on
the left shoulder, the basket being kept in position by a
waist strap. Both waist and shoulder straps are adjustable
to any figure. It also gives greater freedom to the right
arm, and can be taken off instantly by unfastening the
waist strap in front.

Beetles are used occasionally as bait for trout. The
two best sorts for this purpose are the red or copper
coloured variety, and the black one. They have two pairs of
wings each. The upper hard wings are clipped off before
putting on the beetle ; the hook should be inserted in
the thorax and brought out until the point is visible between
the shoulders ; the feet of the beetle must hang down when
dropped on the water. The copper coloured beetle is the
more enticing of the two, and may be found under the
old droppings of the horse or cow. The best place to angle
with these is under overhanging banks, just as if they had
dropped off on to the water.

Black Bass, The.— Under this heading is included
but two varieties of the species, which are those that will be
of interest to the British angler, and as there is evidently a
determination to introduce this sporting fish into our
waters, a notice of it may not be out of place. Both
varieties resemble each other in colour — a black back,
golden olive sides, alternating to a light amber, and white
belly, with a spinous dorsal fin, not so deep but longer than

46 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

in the perch ; the shape of the fish something like the
bream, or between bream and perch, and tail slightly
forked. The large -mouthed black bass {micropterus
salmoides) differs principally from the other small-mouthed
variety in having the snout more elongated, not so shapely,
gill covers extending further back, under jaw rather pro-
truding, the mouth considerably larger, and a heavier fish
altogether. It is a well-known and widely-distributed fish
over the lakes and rivers of North America and Canada, and
has received a varied assortment of names, amongst them
being the following : — Green bass, moss bass, Oswego bass,
Huron bass, river bass, &c. It prefers sluggish wraters, and
is frequently found in the brackish water of river mouths.
It does not succeed so well in mountain pond^ or streams.
It attains a weight of over twenty pounds, but averages
about five pounds ; is very active, delights in pure water,
and avoids pollution, even to the extent of migration, should
this become necessary. It spawns up as late as July, although
in some States the fishing opens as early as May ist. The
young fry of this variety seek animal food at a very early
period of their existence. They have the reputation of
being more destructive to one another and to the young of
their own species than the small-mouthed bass. They feed
on minnows of all kinds, cray fish, frogs, insects, and their
larvae ; in fact, nothing comes amiss to them. Their
habit is to feed both at the surface and the bottom, and they
pursue their prey with wonderful activity. When sur-
rounded by nets or caught by the hook, they will leap five
or six feet out of the water several times. At the approach
of cold weather they seek deep water, and hibernate in the
mud. They particularly delight in the shelter of stumps, logs,
•or overhanging banks, and are very fond of concealing them-

48 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

selves under aquatic plants, where they feed on the small
fry that these give shelter to. The spawning season of both
varieties is about the same — May till end of July. The eggs
are adhesive, attach themselves to stones until hatched, and
are deposited in shallow water on a gravelly bottom in flat-
shaped nests, which are formed by the female fish, at least
it is assumed to be so. The males fight for the possession
of the female, and the successful suitor helps her to eject
the eggs by biting or pressing her abdomen. The male
then deposits the milt and departs, leaving the female to
guard the eggs from numerous enemies — frogs, birds, and
fishes. The period of incubation lasts from seven to
fourteen days, and the young bass remain in the nest for
about a week. The male returns and assists the female to
defend the young fry until they are able to fight for them-
selves. At the age of ten weeks the young bass measure
three-quarters of- an inch in length, and at three years of
age, in suitable waters, the average weight will be three
pounds. The flesh is white, firm, and well flavoured, ranking
as one of the best of the fresh water species — resembling in
taste that of the whiting. It is asserted that the game habits
of this fish are superior to the small-mouthed variety; but this
is a vexed question, both being possessed of high sporting
qualities. The small-mouthed black bass {niicropterus dolo-
mi'eu), called yellow bass, gold bass, brown bass, dark bass,
minny bass, little bass, and hog bass, is pretty widely dis-
tributed in that portion of America north of the Mississippi,
extending into Canada; but it has been introduced lately, and
with success, into various sections of the vast continent of the
United States. It seldom exceeds the weight of eight pounds,
and usually averages two and a half pounds ; a fish of this
latter weight will measure fifteen inches. The small-mouthed

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 49

bass loves clear, rapid-flowing streams and greater elevations
than those in which the large-mouthed thrives. It detests
pollutions, hibernates in the winter, and comes to the
shallows in the spawning season. There is no difference in
the close season from the other variety. The food is the
same. It is not so cannibalistic in its tendencies, and its
smaller size limits its power of overcoming larger fish.
Being fond of clear, rapid water, it is very active in its
movements, rivalling a white trout in jumping properties.
It swims in shoals, and feeds wherever food is to be
obtained. The reproduction is similar in every way to that
already described under the heading of the large-mouthed
variety. It can be bred artificially, and the fry may be
transported with perfect safety; this will tend in a great
measure to insure its distribution. The game qualities of
this variety are very well known and highly appreciated by
our sporting cousins across "the pond." As a fighter and
tactician it is probably not excelled by any fish of equal size,
except the trout. Its resistance when hooked is violent and
determined, and with light tackle great skill is essential
for its capture. It takes minnows, cray fish, frogs, artificial
minnows, spoons, and the artificial fly. A Devon bait is
irresistible, one with a green back and silver belly being the
best. The tackle requires to be sound. The rod may be one
from eight to twelve feet long, light and well balanced, plain
reel, silk line. The flies maybe those in use in Sutherland-
shire — lake trout flies. A favourite one is black wing and
silver body. The spinning Alexandra fly has also been
used with great success. The following extract is taken
from " Forest and Stream ": — " I have listened with a great
deal of interest to the remarks of Dr. Henshall, whom I
deem to be the best authority on the black bass and whom

D

50 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

I have sincerely thanked since reading the book by which
he brought into prominence this gamest of the fishes in any
water. I was raised in a trout country, but since my
experience with the black bass I have yielded to him the
palm for being the gamest fish that I have ever encountered.
The interest and intense excitement never ceases from the
moment he is hooked till he is brought to grass or shakes
the hook out of his mouth, which with me frequently
happens. Other anglers may boast of never losing a fish,
but I think he who never loses one must be entirely devoid
of sensibility. There is something more than mechanical
manipulations in handling this fish. It is impossible to
avoid some anxiety in the operation, which tends to unman
a very nervous angler, while the phlegmatic one may be
able to carry a steadier hand ; you never know what a black
bass is going to do after he is hooked. He sulks, he runs,
he tries to extricate the hook by rubbing against any
substance near at hand ; he rushes toward you to see what
a slack line will do ; failing in this he leaps two or three
feet out of the water, opens his mouth, shakes his head and
then, if he gains any slack, is the point of danger against
which it is difficult to guard, and there is where I have lost
many a fish. I tell you, Mr. President, a five or six pounds
small-mouth bass, well fed upon crayfish in the cold waters
of Lake Superior, is an ugly customer to encounter. After
employing all his tactics to disengage the hook from his jaws
he seems to yield (only playing possum) and may be quietly
led to the boat, and when you think it safe to apply the
landing net he gives a spring, frequently landing in the
boat, but quite as frequently going clear over it and
escaping. I often in trout fishing, on the north shore of
Lake Superior, have hooked a black bass, though they are

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 51

not abundant there, and when I did I knew I had half an
hour's job on my hands, if not more, as they will fight twice
as long as the trout, and with twice the tact and vigor. I
feel like the boy who flung back into the water a nice trout,
saying he was fishing for eels and not for trout. With an
eight ounce rod and a small gnat or midge fly, the chances
are in favor of the bass. I have noticed an account some-
where, that black bass have been caught in the winter,
but I have never seen them caught at that season of the
year in this section. ( Where do the black bass go in
summer?' asks my fr end, Dr. Henshall. They don't go
anywhere. They stay about the reefs and the recesses of
the broken and rocky coasts of the lake. The old Hen in
the Hen and Chicken group, lying north-westerly from
Put-in- Bay, is a favorite resort for them in the months
of July and August and early September. I have visited
these islands, and, finally, all the rocky shores in these
clusters of islands at the head of Lake Erie, where in the
waters surrounding them, on a calm day, although I could see
most enticing bait or lures placed near their noses, not one
would open his mouth ; they would turn up an eye, wag a
ventral fin, as if in scorn of the tempting morsel. Any one
who has seen a black bass or a speckled trout and observed
the gravity of his countenance when declining to take a fish
hook in his mouth, the facial expression of disgust and
scorn will unrival that of Meg Merrilies, and he will feel as
if he was in the presence of more than animal intelligence."
There is some doubt about the desirability of introducing
these fish into British waters. Unquestionably it would be
unwise to put them in good trout or grayling streams, but
there are numberless rivers and lakes, dams and ponds
where the trout are non est, and which at present yield no

52 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

sport of any kind to the angler. Therefore, into these
waters this fish might be introduced with great advantage.
They are about to be introduced into New Zealand, and the
following extract from Mr. R. A. A. Sherrin's (( Handbook of
the Rivers of New Zealand" speaks for itself: — "The fish
that would appear desirable to introduce into New Zealand
is the black bass of America, although the cultivators of
salmon give it an evil reputation, Professor Goode going as
far as to say that the fish with which public fish cultivators
should deal, the black bass had no claim whatever, unless
he was put into the same stream with the pike, and let them
fight it out together. But at the same conference, the
chairman (the Marquis of Exeter) put in the plea that the
black bass would, in certain waters, be a useful addition —
he would rise to a fly ; he would take any kind of bait ; he
would live with the pike ; and he was exceedingly good
eating. He thought the flesh was decidedly more like fresh
whiting than any other fish." A writer in the " Fisheries
Literature" says: — " The black bass is a fish esteemed by
North American anglers — even above the trout. It is a fish
of prey, like the perch, and should, of course, not be placed
in trout or grayling streams ; indeed, it thrives best in
ponds and lakes. In sport and food qualities it is
undoubtedly superior to any English coarse fish. The
successful importations of it made by the Marquis of Exeter
and some other gentlemen, prove conclusively that it will
do well in this country {i.e., England) ; indeed, it is
doubtful if there exists a more hardy fish, or one which can
be more easily cultivated. This will be made evident by a
short description of the wonderful manner in which the
black bass provides for the safety of its young — in striking
contrast to the habits of nearly all other fish. The black

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 53

bass spawns in May and June, according as the season is
early or late. The parent fish go in pairs, and select some
place where the bed of the water they inhabit rises nearly
to the surface, where the sun's rays may reach the eggs.
If they can find no convenient shallow, they will head up
stones on the bottom and make one. Before the eggs are
deposited, the parent fish most carefully clear the space
they have selected, by brushing it with their fins, and
carrying away from it with their mouths all debris, such as
twigs, stones, &c. These cleaned spaces are readily
distinguished by their contrast to the dark wood-covered
ground around them ; and many of them may be seen in the
lake (White Water) in Burleigh Park, in which the Marquis
of Exeter placed hundreds of black bass a few years ago.
American observers of the black bass have placed things on
these cleared spaces, and have seen them carried away and
deposited outside by the black bass. The nest prepared,
the female deposits her eggs in it, and the male impregnates
them. Then both fish keep jealous guard over them for
some ten days, when the young hatch out. Every intruder
is fiercely driven away. Nor does their care cease here ;
for keeping their young together, as a hen does her chickens,
they convey them to some shallow place amongst reeds and
weeds, where they will be safest from the attacks of other
fish. This care is continued for some days, until the fry are
strong enough to scatter and look after themselves. A few
parent fish will stock a water without aid of any kind. To
place a very limited number of fish in a large sheet of water
might result in their becoming too much scattered to get
together again in the breeding season ; therefore it is
advisable to place them in very small ponds, or else enclose
with wire-netting a portion of a large sheet of water, and

54 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

keep them there until they have spawned." Of the black
,bass, in an economic aspect, a gentleman, writing to the
Philadelphia Board, says : — "An approximate estimate of the
numbers of these fish that are annually taken will show
their value to the State. It is given on reliable authority
that each boat on the Susquehanna will make a daily
average catch of ten pounds ; and from close observation it
has been ascertained that there are not less than ten boats to
the mile engaged in fishing. This for a stretch of twenty
miles would make the daily catch in that distance two
thousand pounds, which at ten cents a pound would amount
to two hundred dollars. This is a very low estimate, and
taking in all the water of the river — from the mouth to
Wilkes-Barre on the North Branch, and the West Branch —
there is no doubt that the average catch of these fish will
not be less than from five thousand to ten thousand pounds,
and of money value to the amount of nearly one hundred
thousand dollars annually. Frequently, from ten to twenty
boats can be seen in water that will not cover a space of ten
acres. In its native waters it attains to a weight of six or
eight pounds, and is much esteemed for the table." There
are several works written upon bass, published in America.
The principal one is "The Book of the Bass," by Dr.
Henshall ; it is very readable, well written, and contains a
fund of practical information suitable to anglers of all
classes. A very full account of the bass tribe is given by
"Forest and Stream," in their Bass Supplement, which the
Editor of this interesting paper very courteously furnished
me with.

Bleak, The (Cyprinus alburnus). — A small fish found
in many of the English streams. It seldom attains a greater
length than six inches, and swims in shoals ; is very nimble

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 55

in catching flies, but not of much account as sport for the
angler. It is usually taken by whipping with a gentle or an
artificial black gnat on the surface of the water, or it may
be angled for with light floating tackle baited with the tail
of a worm, or a small red worm. The bleak makes a good
bait for trout or pike, but is more tender than either dace or
minnow. It spawns in May.

Blow Lines are generally made of fine twisted silk,
exceedingly light, and employed in fishing with the May fly
or green drake, the wind carrying the fly and line far out
on the water. (See article on " Lines.")

Blue Bottle Fly.— The natural one is found in the hot
summer months about cellars or places where meat is kept.
It makes a capital fly for dapping with for trout. Insert a
No. o or 1 round bend hook in the thorax of the fly, bringing
the barbed point out between the wrings at the shoulder. This
does not immediately kill the fly, which flutters on the surface
of the water, and is sure to be taken by the fish, provided
the angler conceals himself from view and makes no rash
movement with the rod and line. In the autumn evenings,
under bushes hanging over the river's bank, letting the fly-
down on the water close to the edge is a likely method of
hooking a good trout, if there happens to be one rising in
such a spot. The imitation blue bottle fly is called the
"blue blow," and is made by some from dark dusky blue
silk bodies, with dark starling's wings and black hackle ;
by others — body of mole's fur, wings of tom-tit, and black
hackle. This fly is used in late summer or autumn months
on windy days. Tied on No. 2 hook.

Books on Angling" are very numerous. All of them
are readable, from that of Dame Juliana Berners down to
the present. Among the old books, first ranks Walton and

56 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Cotton's, " The Complete Angler." Some of the early-
editions of this book are scarce, and command a very high
price. Comparatively few books on angling were brought
out between the date of Walton's, in 1772, and 1820.
Daniel's " Rural Sports" was published in 1801. It is a
fine book, and the plates of the different varieties of fish
are admirable. Ephemera's " Handbook on Angling" was
a standard work for some time. Sir Humphrey Davy's
"Salmonia" still holds its place as an authority. Useful
books have been written by Stoddart, Russell, Colquohoun,
Hoffland, Wade, Stewart, Senior, Pennell, and Francis.
The latter author was an enthusiastic fisherman and conse-
quently practical. He has given to the angling world
several very interesting and well written works. For a
beginner in the gentle art of trout fishing, no better book
can be perused than Stewart's " Practical Angler." He
may rest assured that he is in the right path, following
a practical, experienced, clever, and conscientious guide.
And then let him study Ronald's u Entomology," which
will give him a thorough insight into the natural com-
•position of the various flies he will meet with during
his angling career. Halford's book on dry fly fishing, with
its beautiful coloured plates, and Pritt's works on Yorkshire
flies and " The Book of the Grayling" are great additions
to piscatorial libraries. A quaint treatise on fly fishing,
illustrated with actual artificial flies, feathers, and silk, was
written some time ago by the late Mr. W. H. Aldam, of
Winchester, aided by his friend, the late Mr. Edward Porter,
of Sheffield, but is now out of print. Theakstone and
Jackson on Yorkshire fishing are well worth perusal. The
latter's work is scarce, and can only be picked up
occasionally.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 57

Boots used by the angler should be made of good
sound pliable leather (easily fitting over woollen socks or
stockings), with a low, flat heel and a broad sole — laced.
There is no necessity to have the soles paved with nails, until
they look like an iron plate, making the boots so weighty
that the angler is wearied by carrying them ere half of the
day is gone. A few "■ sparables " or not too broad-headed
nails, about half an inch apart, are quite enough to give a
good footing on slippery stones. The best leather for
anglers' boots is porpoise hide ; it keeps soft always, no
matter how wet it has been. It is expensive, but on account
of the lasting properties, boots made from it will be found
cheaper in the long run. A good shape for boots is that
used by the military, called " high lows " ; they are easy on
the ankle and across the top of the foot. Another good
boot, which comes up to the knee and can be used to wade
in for a short time, is the " Field" boot. It is made of
extremely fine-grained soft leather, is laced up the front
over a waterproof tongue, and easy to walk in ; a pair of
these are very light in weight, considering the length of leg,
but they are very expensive. All leather boots after being
used should be dressed with some of the various " dubbins "
or waterproof mixtures (q.v.), and put on "trees" to keep
in shape ; they should never be dried at the fire.

Bottom Fishing1.— Nearly all fish that swim may
be captured by this mode of angling, as they have a habit of
grovelling about the bed or bottom of the water, stirring up
the soil on the look-out for grubs, worms, and larvae of all
sorts which may be found there. The angler has merely
to choose the well-known baits suitable for the fish he is
about to angle for, and present it to them in the natural
manner of lying on the bottom of the river or pond, with

5§ THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

this exception that inside the bait is concealed the barbed
hook, and attached to it is the line which is to bring them to
the net. The salmon is very fond of a mouthful of ground
bait in the shape of a bunch of well-scoured worms, and
when they refuse the fly, they may be captured thus in lakes,
at the heads of rivers, or in deep silent pools at the foot of
falls, when the water is too shallow on these to allow them to
ascend. The tackle used is various — the snap hook, the
ledger tackle, and the Stewart tackle. The hooks are pretty
large, and may be single or double — the latter for the large
fish ; if for small fish, the arrangements are according to the
size. It is rather tame sport at any time waiting of the bite,
but it gets exciting when a good fish pouches the bait. As
a rule the fish are well hooked. Being allowed time to
swallow, the hooks or hook get well into the gullet. In
rivers where bottom fishing is much practised, it is usual to
"ground bait" the "swims," or places where the fish are
supposed to be congregated, and this plan keeps them
convenient to the spot. Barbel are mostly taken by bottom
fishing, and also most of the carp tribe and eels. Floats are
always used when bottom fishing is practised to denote the
presence of the fish at the sunk bait.

Boxes. — There are a number of boxes used by different
anglers. They are principally made of strong tin, black
japanned, and white enamelled inside. The dead bait box,
as its name implies, is used for carrying dead bait — minnows,
gudgeon, small dace, &c. The spinning box is employed
to carry artificial minnows, traces, and leads. The general
box is useful in storing minnows, casts, lines, and traces.
Paternoster boxes have generally three trays, to carry the
paternosters and gut lines. Cast boxes are numerous, as
will be seen by the large display of any respectable tackle

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

59

maker. They are generally round, made with either one
or two lids. Some are fitted with felt, which is damped and
the lines put in to soften the gut before using. In the
regular boxes the casts are kept separate by means of
cardboard or thick paper. Another good box is the " Royd "
cast box. This is of oval shape, having cards that are cut

SPINNING BOX.

MAY FLY BOX.

WORM BOX.

away in the middle and flannel that is stretched tightly over
them. On the frame of the cards are hooks, on which to
wind the casts. Boxes to hold worms are made in several
ways, round, oval, and kidney shaped, and when in use are
generally strapped round the waist. These boxes facilitate
baiting, which is very desirable in up-stream worm fishing.
Be sure and have name and address painted on box, for if
left at the river side it may probably be restored, otherwise
it is very doubtful.

Bream, The {Cyprinus brama). — There are several
varieties of this fish, but the one under notice is the best
known to the anglers of Britain as the carp, common, or
golden bream. It is to be found in most of the rivers in this
country, also in ponds, lakes, and canals, seeking quiet, deep

6o

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

holes. The bream is a broad fish with a small head, leather
mouth, and no teeth ; it is covered with net-like scales.
The sides of the larger ones are of a golden colour, the
belly more of a reddish tinge. The flesh is soft, and, as it

THE BREAM.

contains a multitude of small bones, is not very desirable
for t e table. It is gregarious, and swims in shoals. Bream
spawn in May or early part of June. They run up to a
weight of six and sometimes seven pounds, but the average
is about three pounds.

Bream Fishing". — This can be done in two or three
ways. The most successful plan is to ground bait the spot
where these fish are known to be; they will then congregate
in numbers. The best lure for them is a clear red worm,
threaded on a No. 6 or 7 hook. The line is leaded about
two feet from the hook, and then is gently dropped into the
water, having a float attached. When the bream takes the
bait the float disappears ; the angler should then allow the
line to pay out, until the fish stops running, when he should
strike. The bream is a strong fish, and gives a good run for
a moment or two; he then gives up, gets out of his ordinary
position, and can be sailed up to the net. Some anglers use

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 6l

one or two rods, with the bait at different depths, as this
fish does not incline to root in the mud, and will seek its
prey a little off the bottom. Another plan of fishing for
bream is with the ledger line, and, in addition to the
ordinary way of rigging up the tackle, there is a hook and
short line fastened above the bullet — this gives the double
chance. In lakes these fish can be angled for from a punt,
with half-a-dozen rods dispersed over the sides. The float
in this case should be so arranged on the line as to allow
the tail of the worm to about touch the bottom. It is usual
to ground bait the spot round the boat occasionally with
some boiled barley or wheat, or oatmeal made into paste or
porridge. Early in the morning is the best time for fishing
for bream. If the weather is showery or gloomy they will
bite all day. Lough Erne, in Ireland, abounds with bream,
and they can be caught by the hundredweight.

Brogues are strong coarse boots worn over fishing
stockings or waders. Some are made entirely of leather,
others of canvas and leather, and some of indiarubber. In
all cases the soles of these brogues should be leather,
studded with a few nails, as indiarubber soles are too
limber to give the angler perfect command over the action
of the feet, especially when wading in heavy water with
a rough bottom. A few holes should be bored in the soles
or sides to allow the water to escape. If leather brogues
are used over fishing stockings they should not be greased
or oiled, as, although a heavy pair of wool socks inter-
venes between them and the waders, the grease is liable
to make its way through and injure the rubber; they
get very hard, but it is far better to soften them in warm
water before using, than to subject them to oil or grease;
it is also necessary to have them extra large, to allow them

62

THE BRITISH ANGLER S LEXICON.

to be worn with comfort. The best fasteners for brogues
are straps and buckles. Indiarubber brogues (sometimes
called gaiters), with leather soles and heels, studded with

CANVAS AND LEATHER WADING BROGUE.

nails, are most comfortable, very light, and do not require
oiling. At the end of the season, before putting the leather
brogues away, they should have a good dressing of dubbing

INDIARUBBER WADING BROGUE.

or currier's grease, which will renew the life of the
leather, and he entirely absorbed before using the following
season.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 63

Bronzing". — When the brass ferrules of a rod get bright
and have lost their bronze appearance, they can be re-
coloured by applying the following mixture : — one ounce
oxide of iron (rust) and one ounce arsenic, mixed in half-pint
muriatic acid. Cleanse the brass from grease or dirt by
washing it in soda and water, very hot. Wipe dry, and
hold before a fire until the brass is well warmed; then apply
a little of the above mixture with a feather or cloth wrapped
round a stick, or a brush. When the desired colour is
obtained rub with oil, which stops the process. The ferrules
may then be lacquered or varnished.

Bustard Fishing" is practised on many of the larger
rivers, principally in the North of England, wherever night
fishing is not prohibited. It is a deadly plan of capturing
large, wrary jtrout, who have hitherto declined to be caught
in the daytime by the ordinary methods practised. Usually
this fishing begins about ten o'clock at night, as very often
from that hour till midnight the large fish go on the feed.
The rod should be strong, and the casting line composed of
fine salmon gut. To this is usually attached one and
sometimes two bustard flies. The angler is provided with
fishing stockings or trousers, and wades up the centre of
the river if not too deep ; but it can be practised from the
bank if free from trees, as the light is very uncertain, and
any obstruction will cause delay and mishap. Cast, if
wading, to either side. The rise is not seen, but the tug is
felt when little play is allowed, and as the tackle is strong
the fish may soon be brought up to the net. The warm,
cloudy nights in June and July favour this style of anglings
moonlight nights should be avoided. The bustard is an
imitation of the large light-coloured moths which flutter ove

64 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

rivers in the vicinity of meadows in the
warm evenings of June and July. The
natural moth is very successful, but it is
troublesome in the dark attaching fresh
ones after each fish has been caught. In
consequence of this the artificial bustard is
artificial much used, although not so killing as the
bustard. natural fly ; yet it is very deadly in the
hands of a practised night-fisher. The following are the
•dressing of the three best patterns : — White bustard: Body,
white wool or white chenille made full and round ; legs,
white hackle; wings, white hen or pigeon. Yellow bustard:
Body, pale yellow-coloured wool or yellow chenille, made
full and round ; legs, yellow hackle ; wings, white hen or
pigeon. Brown bustard : Body, light brown wool or brown
chenille, made full and round ; legs, ginger hackle ; wings,
trown owl or darkish feather of hen pheasant wing.

Butt is the stoutest and lowest piece of a fishing rod.
It should fit the hand nicely, be quite round, and possess a
good skin either got up by polish or varnish, as any rough-
ness of the handle chafes and blisters the hand. If the
hands are soft, gloves may be worn, or an old glove fastened
on the butt just where the hand grasps. Many of the best
turned-out fly rods have their butts chequered, bound with
leather, indiarubber, cane, or cork to form the grip. The
old style of hollow butt has almost died out, as it greatly
weakens the power of the rod. Giving the butt is a term
applied to indicate the method of putting a heavy strain on
a fish by raising the point, and consequently putting forward
the butt of the rod.

Caddis, also called "cadbait" (in Ireland "corbait"),
is the larvae of several flies, found in spring under stones and

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 65

at the bottom of streams. It is covered by a case, which is
smooth inside and rough outside. From this it partly
withdraws and carries the case along, retiring inside at the
least sign of danger. It is often used as a bait for various
fish, but is tender and will not bear rough treatment in
casting.

Cane, Mottled, is used in forming trolling or spinning
rods. It can be made into a very light and stiff rod,
easily handled, and costing comparatively little. Care
should be taken not to have the joints, which extend over
it every few inches, rasped down, as this weakens it. If
near a river, the rod may be fast-jointed and never taken
down; this is better than having brass joints, which are apt
to get slack. This cane also makes a good handle for the
landing net, and, being hollow, comes in handy for con-
taining one or two spare tops of the fly rod. Cane is easily
shivered if it hits a rock or stone, or if trodden upon.

Cap is a comfortable and suitable head dress for the
angler. It should be made of soft Shetland wool, of a dark
smoky grey colour, well ventilated, so as to keep the head
cool, with a peak standing well out in front to shade the
eyes from the sun, and one behind is also useful. A button
sewn every three inches on the band or rim is handy for
catching the loop of a casting line when wound round the
cap, and greatly preferable to using pins.

Care Of Health. — Anglers often run the risk of
getting a cold, or laying the foundation of rheumatism,
lumbago, and other ailments, for the want of a little
carefulness. Wet weather is generally good for fishing,
and one is apt to hazard a wetting on the chance of
making a decent basket. There is no necessity for this.
Nowadays, waterproof coats and capes are made so

E

66 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

cheaply and so handy that there is no excuse for an angler
ever going on an excursion without either one or the other.
A cape is especially recommended to keep the shoulders
dry ; it is easily thrown off the moment the rain ceases, and
takes up little room when slung from the basket strap. It
is very unwise to permit the shoulders to get wet, and to
continue fishing in a wet coat. It is also necessary that
the feet should be kept dry. Young anglers may wade
during warm weather and incur no immediate danger, but
it tells in the long run. If a stream has to be crossed, or
an occasion occurs when the angler finds it necessary to
enter the water, and he is not provided with waders, let him
take off his boots and stockings, put the latter in his pocket,
and if there is any danger of getting the bare feet hurt with
rough stones, put on the boots. After the wading is
finished, the feet may be dried with the handkerchief, failing
a towel or other means ; the boots wiped out with dry grass
or hay ; and then when the angler puts on the stockings
and boots again he will not only feel most comfortable, but
be safe as well. If one does happen to get wet feet, and
there is no means of changing, better to walk and keep up the
circulation in preference to either driving or going home by
train, if distance will at all permit. On arrival home,
bathe the feet in warm water, rub well with a hard,
rough towel, and no bad results will follow. In going to
fish at a distance, always carry a pair of dry socks ; they
take up but little room ; put them on after the fishing is
over, and before starting on the home journey. Be careful
not to sit on damp grass ; spread the waterproof cape or
coat before sitting down. Do not sit still while the
body is warm and perspiring ; walk slowly about for a
little, until the temperature is lowered. Never drink cold

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 67

water when in a state of perspiration, and always wear
flannel next the skin. These remarks apply particularly to
anglers who are over forty years of age.

CaJ?p (Cyprinus carpio). — This is a rather handsome
fish. It is leather-mouthed, destitute of teeth, but has
some bones at the entrance to the gullet which serve
as such. This fish is not a native of Britain, but was
imported to the country by the monks in the fifteenth
century. It lives to a great age, and can exist out of
water longer than any other fish. The back is arched,

THE CARP.

colour of a golden greenish hue, very long dorsal fin, and
the tail is broad and deeply forked. The carp lives on
aquatic plants and the insects it obtains from them. Its
fecundity is very great, more than one hundred thousand
eggs have been taken from one of moderate size. It is
found in ponds and the deep still parts of a river. The
flesh is not much appreciated. Carp are wary and shy of
taking bait, and not much sought after by the angler.

Carp Fishing?. — The best bait for this fish is a well
scoured worm, baited upon a No. 5 or 6 hook. Tackle
should be strong, as the fish when hooked fights in a dogged
kind of way. A light float ought to be used, and a sinker
of shot to keep the worm on the bottom. The carp

68 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

nibbles at the worm, takes the tail off, and sometimes strips
the hook altogether ; it is no use striking until the float
disappears. It is usual to ground bait the place where carp
are to be angled for, doing this with broken worms, boiled
wheat, rice, or peas. Sometimes three rods are employed
at the same time with the bait at different depths of
the water. When hooked, a tight line must be kept to
prevent the fish from getting into the weeds, which are
generally abundant wherever carp are found.

Cast is a term usually applied to that portion of a river
known to be a favourite spot for catching fish — especially
salmon.

Casting? is the technical term applied to the act of
throwing the flies by rod and line on the surface of the
water when fishing. To cast well ought to be the aim of
every angler, and careful attention should be paid to each
individual cast — to get into a careless habit is not only
unsightly but abortive. The cast made with a single
handed rod should be from the wrist only, and no play with
the arm above the elbow. The line must be brought round
the head, either by the right or the left, with a nice even
sweep, allowing the line to go out to its limit behind before
returning it for the forward stroke. This is to prevent the
flies cracking off. Casting should be practised with both
hands, also underhand and side casting, as all these modes
are found necessary at some time or other, owing to the
peculiarities of the water or the surroundings of it. The
point of the rod need not be thrown behind the head; there
is no necessity for doing so, as the elastic qualities of the
rod are quite capable, or should be made so, of getting the
line well out with very little manual exertion. In casting,
fix the eye on an object, or an imaginary one, if the first is

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 69

not available, beyond the spot, say a yard, where you
intend the tail fly to alight, and the eye and hand will
work in unison with wonderful precision. When casting,
just as the flies seem about to alight on the water, raise the
point of the rod slightly; this checks the forward movement
of the main line, which pulls up, so to speak, the casting
line, and causes it to level itself in the air, and to alight
straight with all the flies in their proper position and
without a splash. The tyro should devote a spare hour or
two in practising casting on some quiet spot on the water ;
it will be well spent time. In salmon casting both hands
are used, and a wider sweep of the heavy line is given.
Always keep a sharp look out behind, that the flies do not
come in contact with bushes or other obstructions, else a
smash will occur.

Casting" Line— sometimes called the "collar "— is
attached to the end of the reel line by a "knot" or "hitch/'
and serves to bear the hooks or flies. It is made either of
silkworm gut or horse hair, and varies from six to nine feet
long. If made from gut it should be composed of good round
transparent threads, sorted so as to give it a distinct taper ;
that is, the thread of gut next the reel line is the thickest
and strongest, the next finer, until the last, which is chosen
the thinnest of all. These threads are steeped in tepid
water for about half-an-hour, the curled shrivelled ends
clipped off, and they are then knotted together, either by
the " water knot," or the "double fisherman's knot" ((/.v.).
The latter is the neatest, and has the advantage of allowing
the knots to be drawn asunder, so that the artificial fly link
may be inserted when making up the casting line for
fishing. Gut should always be chosen perfectly round, as
flat gut is readily seen by the fish, as it glitters badly ; it

JO THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

should also be clear, not opaque, as the latter denotes
brittleness. Horse hair casting lines are favourites with
many good and careful anglers, and have many advantages.
They are very elastic, and throw with great truth and light-
ness, keep very free from getting into kinks, and if they do,
are very easily righted ; but it is very difficult to obtain good
hair, hence it is superseded to a great extent by gut. The
best hair is obtained from the tails of cream-coloured stallions,
four or five years old. All discoloured, wavy, or flat-shaped
hairs should be discarded, and round transparent ones chosen.
The casting lines from these may be made up in the same
way as the gut ones, but it is an advantage to have what is
called a "bridle" attached to them — that is: first next the
reel line four hairs twisted, and then a length with three hairs
twisted, and then the single hairs. This makes the line go
out with greater perfection when casting. A hair casting
line will not bear sudden jerks, but will stand an even pull
of some pounds, and gives much pleasure to the observant
angler in playing a fish, as owing to its great elasticity
the wreight of a fish seems very much more than it
turns out to be when got into the net. It is invisible, or as
near it as possible, to the trout, and will perform wonders
sometimes in very clear water. It floats better than gut,
and keeps the flies more lively. It should never be tried in
rivers where fish run over one and a half pounds. When
casting lines are rolled up after use, the larger the coil the
better ; they are more easily straightened than if coiled
up small.

Cast Nets. — These are large bell-shaped nets from
eight to eighteen yards in circumference, weighted with
bullets round the edge, and have the latter looped up
inwards to form a sack to hold the fish. They are used for

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON; 71

collecting minnows, gudgeon, &c, for baits. The meshes
of body of net are large, but for one foot in depth round
the edge they are made of suitable size for fish required,
i.e., either gudgeon or minnow mesh, because when the
net is thrown over the fish they never attempt to pass
through the meshes but swim to the outer edges, and so
into the sack. The centre meshes have a cord run
through them, and when casting, first tie it round the
left arm above the elbow. Then take a part of the rim
or edge of the net and throw it over the left shoulder,
allowing the remainder to hang down to the ground in
front. Then, with the right hand, gather up the net from
left hand close to the leads, till, say half is held in the
right hand, then throw the net from left to right into the
water, swinging the body round at the same time, the
object being to make the net open as wide as possible
when falling into the water. This should be ractised on
grass first to acquire the method.

ChaPP {Salmo umbla) is a fish of the same genus as
the salmon, to be found in some of the lakes of Britain,
and is abundant in the Cumberland and Westmoreland
lakes. The colour of the back is a dark olive, the
sides lighter and spotted with red or white ; the belly
yellow, inclining to orange. The fins are small and the tail
deeply forked. It is considered to be one of the most
beautiful fish that swims, and is highly esteemed for the
table, large quantities being netted for potting. They
sometimes take a fly, but sport with them is very precarious.
They also have taken a minnow when spun slowly. It
is getting scarce, owing to its wholesale slaughter during
the spawning season. Charr seldom attain a weight of
two pounds.

72 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Check is the term applied to the small ratchet wheels
which are supplied to nearly all winch reels, and are useful
to prevent the line running off too freely. It is from this
check that most anglers strike their fish ; the line should
be free from the hand at the same time. Check reels wrhen
first procured from the tackle maker should be humoured so
as not to be too stiff nor too slack. This can be done by
taking off the cover of the reel, and either tightening or
slackening the small screw nail which confines the ratchet.
A check should have a soft sound when in use, not a sharp
hard sound. When laid away for the season, the wheels
and ratchet should be oiled with sperm oil to prevent rust.

China Twist. — This is manufactured in Japan, and is
simply a hard twisted silk line, clear and semi-transparent,
made from silk in its natural state. All rawT silk is more or
less covered by a gummy secretion, but the Japanese silk
of which the above is composed is very thickly coated
with this natural gum, and when made up into lines gives
them the peculiar stiffness and clearness which is their
characteristic.

Chub (Leuciscus cephalus). — A fish of the same genus
as the roach, dace, minnow, &c. The body is oblong,

THE CHUB.

rather round, and the scales large. The colour is bluish
black on the upper part of the body, and silvery white on

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 73

the belly. The cheeks and gill covers are a golden yellow.
It rarely attains a greater weight than six pounds. The
flesh of the chub is not much esteemed. They are found in
deep holes, by a bank, under the shade of bushes. They
may be seen basking on the surface of the water on the
hot summer days, and afford good sport by daping. They
spawn in April and May.

Chub Fishing" is very fair sport. They rise well at
the fly, and can be angled for with a variety of baits. It is
a strong fish, but the first rush is the worst. In bottom
fishing for chub, the rod should be rather stiff, with a light
but strong casting line, a hook (No. 4 or 5), and a float;
the line shotted, so as to allow it to sink. The hook
may be baited with worms, grubs, beetles, cheese, or
any bait that will give it a good rich mouthful. Ease the
line off the reel, and allow it to go down with the current
as far as the float can be fairly seen. When the float bobs
strike well, and as the mouth of this fish is like leather the
hold is good, and it can be easily brought to the net.
Chub will take a frog which has had the hook passed
through the skin of the back, thus allowing it to swim
about. Daping is successful with the blue bottle fly,
grasshopper, or cockchafer. The angler must conceal
himself behind bushes or a tree, and remain motionless
when allowing the lure to light quietly on the water, just as
if it had dropped off the bank. The best artificial flies for
chub are those called palmers (see list of chub flies), which
should be dressed bushy, casting under the boughs of the
trees, or such shelter as they may be seeking. Chub rise
boldly at the fly ; although they are shy fish, and easily
frightened off. The shadow of a bird crossing the water is
quite sufficient to scare them to their haunts. Care should

74 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

be taken to keep the line from getting entangled in the
weeds, or getting caught on the hidden roots of trees, as
the resorts of the chub are generally convenient to these
obstructions.

Chub Flies.— Good flies for chub are the red and
black palmers, larger than the ordinary trout flies, also an
imitation of the humble-bee, a large alder or cinnamon, and
other trout flies are at times very acceptable to this fish.

Clearing Ring's are made of lead or brass, opening
with a hinge, and employed for disentangling the hook
when it gets caught on weeds in the water. Having a

CLEARING RING.

strong cord fastened on it, and opening the ring, it is
slipped over the rod above the reel ; it travels down this

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 75

and the line until it comes to the obstruction. If this-
is a stump or anything immovable, the clearing ring^
breaks the line off at this point ; if the obstacles are weeds,
small twigs, &c, the ring is allowed to travel off the line
on to them, and by means of the strong twine which-
holds and guides it the obstruction is pulled away, and thus
the casting line, flies, &c, are saved. It is not much used
nowadays, but as it takes up little room, it might be
fastened to the lid of the fishing basket, and will occa-
sionally come in handy.

Clear Water denotes the peculiar colour of a river
when it is free from flood or earthy matter. Streams
flowing over granite, pebbles, or chalk are very pellucid,
and there is great precaution necessary on the part of the
angler to reach and fish such water, as fish, trout especially,
are able to see very long distances in these streams. As a
rule fishing clear water necessitates the use of very long
lines. The angler has a better chance by wading than by
walking along the margins, and his chances are still better
if he can fish up stream. The dry fly and the worm are the
most deadly lures for clear water.

Close Season, The.— This is the period in each
year, determined by law, in which fish may not be captured.
During this close season the fish spawn, and get into
proper condition thereafter. The seasons are different
for the various species, as they do not all spawn at the
same time, and even fishes of the same species have
different periods for breeding. There are early spawning
fish and late spawning fish, and this depends very much on
the particular waters they frequent. It is found that fish of
the same variety will spawn in one river a month earlier
than the same breed will, in a river not a mile distant,

76 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

consequently it is from observation on the part of practical
men that the close season for each district is defined ; and
from time to time those periods alter, and it is the duty of
the inspectors or overseers of these districts to study the
habits of the fish, and note the changes taking place, and have
the periods altered accordingly. Salmon and trout spawn in
the autumn, and the average close season for them is from
October till March ; in some districts from September till
March. In many localities the salmon will begin to run up
the rivers as early as January, quite fresh, and in good
condition ; and still these fish may not be angled for until
February or March, and the season will be open till
September, when really they are foul in August. As a
rule, trout are not in good condition till the hawthorn
begins to show green leaf, as up till then very few if any
flies hatch, and, consequently, the fish are short of food.
The weekly close season is from noon on Saturday till six
o'clock a.m. on the following Monday, with a fewT excep-
tions— this season is only for nets. (See " Laws, Fishery.")

Coat.— (See " Dress.")

Corks are used as floats to denote when the fish is at the
bait under the surface of the water. The slabs of cork
are first cut into squares, and then turned on a lathe into
the various shapes and sizes that are in use— from the half-
inch round float to the four-inch pike float. The shapes
are egg, thin barrel, pear, sneck head, pilot, live bait or
Jack float, trimmer, &c. After the cork is turned, it is
ground on stone ; next, the cavities are filled up with putty,
the quill is inserted, and the plug is bound in its place ; the
rings are whipped on, and the cork float is then painted
and varnished. All the varieties mentioned can be pro-
cured from the tackle makers.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 77

Cotton, Charles. — A notice of this writer is almost
a sine qua non in any book relating to angling, as he was so
closely associated with the father of angling — Isaac Walton.
He was an expert angler as well as an industrious writer.
Born in 1630, after his school education he was sent to
Cambridge. In 1656, he married a daughter of Sir Thomas
Hutchinson, of the county of Nottingham. He published
his first work in 1663, and in the year 1676 he published
the second part of the " Complete Angler," in conjunction
with Isaac Walton. The work is similar in style to the*
first part published by Walton, and since then this cele-
brated work has always been published as the writings
of Isaac Walton and Charles Cotton. He died in 1687, at
Westminster.

Creeper, The, is the larva of the stone fly, and is a
disagreeable looking animal, but trout are extremely fond of
it, and consequently it is used very generally. These creepers

THE CREEPER.

are found under stones in shallow streams, very near to
the edge, and are so active in their movements that they
are not easily captured. When caught, they can be put in

c

MAYFLY&CREEPER,

a .perforated box, with a little damp moss. They will live
for some days in this. They are generally baited on a
special flight of hooks; one of the hooks is run under the

78 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

throat, bringing the barb out near the tail, and the top hook
is run upwards through the head or neck. Some anglers use
only one hook, having a short bristle lashed to it, pointing
towards the shank. This can be inserted in the creeper,
and will prevent it slipping off. The bait must be cast
gently, as it is rather tender. It is fished up stream, exactly
the same way as the clear water worm. The best portions
of a stream to fish are the edges, where trout are always
■on the watch for creepers, and also in all broken water
•and strong eddies. The line should be about two yards
long, not too fine, and a small shot added six inches above
the bait, as it is essentially necessary the creeper should be
well down in the water. No landing net is required, as the
line ought to be strong enough to lift a heavy trout. No
use fishing with this bait in deep still pools. Strike quickly,
and, as generally large fish take this bait, be cautious in
handling. Before striking, depress the hand and rod for a
moment.

Cushions made of thin cork wood, to fold up, and
•covered with baize, can be carried in the fish basket, and
are very serviceable to sit upon in a boat, especially in

FOLDING CUSHION.

wet weather. They should be dried in the air after use,
and will last a lifetime.

Daee (Leuciscus vulgaris), a lively fish of the carp
species, found in deep clear water and quiet streams,
abounding in the Thames and many other English rivers.
They are in form not unlike the roach, rather longer,
with larger mouths and smaller scales. The upper parts

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 79

are dusky blue, paler down the sides, white on the belly,
and the cheeks and gill covers silvery white. They spawn
in April and May, and very soon get into condition. Dace
afford sport to the young angler, and will take all varieties
of bait, but especially a bright lively red worm. The angler
must be very quick in striking. They give a good deal of
sport with the fly, principally little black or red palmers,
very line tackle, and a light rod. It makes the lure more
enticing if there is a maggot or a gentle put on the barb of
the fly hook. They need to be approached cautiously when

'.'HE DACE.

whipping for them, as they are easily frightened. The best
weather for them is when it is warm and dull, with no
ripple on the water ; they rise quickly, and blow out the
fly if not struck the moment the stir is seen on the surface.
The style of fishing for roach will do for this fish as
well. When in good condition they are esteemed by many
for the table. In bottom fishing it is well to ground bait,
or to stir up the mud so as to discolour the water, then the
lure, whether maggot, worm, or gentle, should be about four
inches off the bottom. Use a cork float.

Dapingf, Dipping1, or Debbing" is the term ap-
plied to angling for fish with the natural insect or fly.
The rod required is one inclining to be stiff, but it must
be handy and light, as it is used single-handed. The
line may be either floss silk, or silk and hair, with a very
fine casting line of gut or horse hair ; this casting line

8o

need not exceed three feet in length, as only one fly is
used, and none of the line touches the water. The hook
is a round bend special make very small No. i or 2, Kendal
scale. On this the natural fly, which may be a blue
bottle, a moth, or beetle, is impaled, and the lure is then
allowed, with a quiet motion of the wind, to be wafted over
the rising fish or the spot where a fish is supposed to be.
The fly may be allowed just to hover on the surface of the
water, and is sucked in by the fish, when it is struck
and played. This style of angling may be clone from a
boat, when daping is comparatively straight work, but
very often it is practised from the bank of a river over-
hung with bushes, briars, &c, and underneath which the
trout are lying waiting for flies which drop off the bushes,
In this case the line is shortened until only the cast is free
of the top, when the latter is wound round the point of the
rod, by turning it in the hand until all the line is rolled up to
the hook. The rod is now pushed through the intervening
bushes until the point is clear of them, when the line is
unwound and the fly allowed to descend to the water. The
angler must be very quiet in his motions ; no shaking of the
rod or bushes, and everything must be kept out of sight of
the fish, unless what cannot be helped. In the warm
summer evenings this is a very successful way of capturing
fish, and they are usually good ones too. This is a favourite
mode for angling for chub, which are generally found in
shady spots close to the banks ; it is also the style for the
celebrated green drake fishing, which is very exciting sport
while* it lasts. (Described elsewhere).

Derby Twist. — This is a spun silk line made in
different degrees of thickness, and used by barbel, roach,
and occasionally pike fishers.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 8l

Detached Bodies are obtained, in forming some
sorts of artificial flies, by fastening in with the arming a few
hog's bristles or a couple of small clippings of fine gut,
letting these rise away at a slight angle from the body of
the hook, and instead of finishing off the body of the fly
to the bend of the hook in the ordinary manner, the body is
made on these bristles and carried up to form a taper body
and tail. These detached body flies are intended to
represent insects which may be seen raising their bodies up
from the surface of the water. Some of these bodies are
made of cork, stained or ringed, others of indiarubber, but
mostly from proper coloured silks.

Disg'OPg'eP is made from bone, wood, or metal. It is
shaped like a long needle, with a cleft at one end and an
eye to attach it by a string to a button at the other. The
disgorger is used to push back and thus release a hook
which may have been taken far down the gullet of a fish.
It is seldom used, except in the case of taking a hook out of
a pike's throat. It is dangerous to put the fingers into
this fish's mouth, as its teeth inflict nasty wounds, which, if
received, are not easily healed. The disgorger can be
carried in the fly book, or attached by a string to the lid of
the fishing basket. A new one is now made of brass, eight
or nine inches long, with a groove at one end to slide along
the trace until it reaches the hook. There is also an
excellent disgorger made like a pair of scissors, which will
extricate any hook in the throat of a fish.

Double Brazing, a term used when the male ferrule
of a rod is bound entirely with brass or other metal.

Drawn Gut is the ordinary silkworm gut scraped
down by a certain process of drawing it through minute
holes in a steel plate, which renders it very thin, but

F

$2 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

to a certain extent deprives it of transparency ; as the
outer skin is taken away this gut is not nearly so strong as
the ordinary undrawn. It is greatly used for very fine
fishing, will not bear a heavy strain, and when playing a fish
care should be taken not to give sudden jerks with it, or it
will give way. It is much used for links for tying on to small
fly hooks, and as the link in this case is short it will stand a
very fair strain. It does not wear well, soon becoming
chafed by the action of the water when made up into a
casting line. Being so fine renders it almost invisible to
the trout. It is of great service in bright weather and clear
water, when the ordinary gut would be useless. Gut
should always be kept in a roll of chamois leather, fine
flannel, or guttapercha paper, to protect it from the air.
This applies to all gut, drawn or undrawn.

Dress. — It does not matter much what the cut of an
angler's coat may be, so that it is easy fitting and has plenty
of pockets ; but it is essential to be particular about the colour
of the garment, especially when trout fishing, as these fish are
remarkably sharpen their sight, and do not like any striking
or glaring colours. The best colour is a neutral grey, and
the material wool. If the angler chooses to provide himself
with a proper angling dress, the best sort is a Norfolk
jacket and knickerbockers, made from what is known as
Donegal or home-spun frieze. This mixture is got from one
fleece of black wool and three fleeces of white wool, and is
a warmish grey colour. The texture is open and prevents
overheating, and so kindly and soft it will not allow the
body to chill. Being made from the natural undyed wool
with the oil in it, it turns a shower of rain wonderfully; and
should it get soaked through, it dries quickly and does not
feel damp. If a hook "catches in it, it will draw easily from

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 83

the thread, and seldom requires to be cut out. The jacket
should have plenty of room about the armpits, a broad
belt to encircle the waist, and a small buttoned shoulder
strap to confine the girth web strap of the fishing basket,
to prevent it rising over the collar of the coat, as it is apt
to do from using the arm in casting. The knickerbockers
can be used with or without waders, and, if properly made,
are the most comfortable of nether garments. A man,
when fishing, should always wear a flannel shirt with turn
down collar, loose at the neck. It is always well for
the angler to carry with him either a light waterproof coat
or cape. This* can be strapped to the basket, and increases
the burden very little. The stockings or socks worn should
be hand-knitted, made from Alloa wool, which is strong and
stands the wear and tear of going through briars, furze, &c,
and heather mixture or grey are the best colours.

Dropper is the name given to each artificial fly
depending from the casting line above the terminal or
stretcher fly, which is at the extreme point of the casting
line. The lowest one is called the first dropper, the next the
second dropper, and if there are more they go on thus by
numbers. These droppers should hang on a link of gut, in
length about two and a half inches. Some anglers, in
making up their casts, have the first dropper two inches,
the second three inches, the third four inches ; but this
is only a fancy, as they do well of equal length, if not better.
The idea of the varied lengths is that they would all alight
on the water at the same time. The objection to long
droppers is that they are apt to get twisted round the Casting
line more readily than short droppers, and are not so easily
shaken loose, as they occasionally throw themselves into a
regular knot when casting against a wind. The mode of

84 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

attaching these droppers to the casting line is described
under the heading of " Knots " and "Casting Lines."
Always examine carefully the link of gut attached to the
droppers, and be sure that it is not damaged at the head,
as this is the spot where it generally gives way.

Dubbin. — This is the name given to the various greasy
compounds which are used to keep the angler's boots soft
and to preserve the leather from the effects of water.
There are several recipes, viz. : — One pint of raw linseed oil,
half-pound mutton suet, quarter-pound beeswax, one ounce
white resin, melted together in a pipkin ; to be used when
milk-warm, and applied with a short-stapled brush. — India-
rubber cut into thin slices, and put into a pipkin wTith either
tallow or mutton suet, and allowed to stand on the range or the
hob near the fire until it gets into a homogeneous mass ; this
will take some days before it is melted thoroughly. This
dubbin should be rubbed on the boots when damp, with
the hand ; it gives a complete coat of indiarubber ; it is
a very dirty article to use, soiling the hands. There is a
softening dubbin made to rub into the boots when they get
hard — one pint of linseed oil, two ounces beeswax, one ounce
Burgundy pitch, two ounces turpentine, melted together in a
pipkin. This can be used cold, and should be rubbed in with
the hand before a fire ; two or three rubbings will make the
leather very pliable and easy on the feet. Castor oil, well
rubbed in, renews the life in boots wThen the leather has got
hard and cracked. The best dubbin for the soles is made
from any of the above recipes, adding a little coal tar. Care
should be taken in using these dubbins on boots worn
over fishing stockings not to allow any of the grease to get
inside the boot, else it will decompose the indiarubber of
the waders and render them useless.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 85

Dubbing's. — The technical name given to various
materials which are employed to form the rough or hairy-
bodies of artificial flies, mainly composed of furs taken from
the hare's ear, the squirrel, the mole, the water rat, the
white seal, and black and grey rabbits ; the wool or hair
from a pig ; also mohair of various colours, and wool or
dyed worsteds. All these can be used singly, or they may
be teased and mixed together in proper proportions, and,
being nicely shaped up into a roll, are twisted or spun
round the well waxed tying silk, and then round the body
of the fly, forming it according to the shape of the natural
insect. Many anglers go in entirely for these rough bodies
in preference to the silk covered ones. The latter is much
smoother and shines very perceptibly. A fly can be made
either by floss silk, waxed silk, or by dubbings, which will
go to represent the natural insect of whatever kind it is
intended to imitate. Take for instance the blue dun fly.
English dressers prefer to use silk for the body ; Irish
dressers use the fur of the mole, or that taken from the
flank of the water rat — both are successful imitations.

Dyeing? is the art of staining or colouring by means of
dye stuffs the materials used in making artificial flies, as
well as the casting lines, and the rods, nets, &c. If wool
or feathers are to be dyed they must first be deprived
of the natural oil which they contain ; this is done by
immersing them in a weak alkali, such as soda, potash, or
alum. The latter is the safest to use, for it hardens the
fibres instead of softening them, as the other alkalies have a
tendency to do. After the materials have been in the alkali
for some time they are well washed, and then immersed in
hot decoctions of the various dye stuffs which are chosen to
produce the desired colours. Recipes for the different

86 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

colours can be found in books devoted to the purpose. Dyed
materials are not to be compared for permanency to the
natural colours, especially feathers, which very soon get
worn and bleached looking in the water. Mohair, seal's
fur, and wool used in the composition of the bodies of flies
can be dyed pretty fast colours. The new aniline dyes are
very easily applied, and are very bright in hue. Crawshaw's
dyes are highly spoken of; instructions are given how to
use them. Salmon flies generally are largely composed of
dyed materials, on account of the brightness necessary in
the composition of them. Many fly dressers are their own
dyers, as great stress is laid upon special shades of colour,
which experience and practice alone can obtain. Interesting
instructions about dyeing materials for flies are given by
Halford and other writers.

Eel {Aquilla vulgaris). — A serpent-shaped fish, found
in nearly all waters. It is destitute of the ventral fin, and
covered with a thick, soft, slimy skin, the scales being
minute and often invisible to the naked eye. The gill
orifices are very small, and as they are situated far
back, there is a long passage from the gill chamber
outwards ; hence, the gills not becoming dry, these fish
can remain out of their natural element for a very long
time without receiving injury. They are extremely tena-
cious of life. There are three well-known British species :
The broad-nosed, the snig, and the sharp-nosed. The
latter sometimes attains the weight of thirty pounds,
and is considered the best-flavoured of the three varieties.
Eels are different from other fish, in that they descend
rivers to spawn. Young eels, in countless myriads, wThen
spring comes, ascend rivers when barely one inch long ;
and so strong is the instinct impelling them to ascend,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 87

that they surmount obstacles apparently sufficient to
arrest their onward progress. They will leave rivers and
go over land, making their way at night through damp
grass, getting back to the river when daylight appears.
The eel is highly esteemed for food, and, when stewed, is
considered a dainty dish. The London market is largely
supplied from Holland. Eels caught in the River Bann,
coming out of Lough Neagh, in Ireland, are very large,
firm, and well-flavoured. Weirs or traps on this river
are very remunerative ; twenty tons have been captured
in one night, in heavy water.

Eel Fishing? is not a very high-class sport, still an
angler may amuse himself in trying some of the various
methods of capturing this fish. The simplest and least
troublesome style is with the rod and line. Bait the hook
with a worm, let it trail along the bottom of a muddy river,
and when the line stops give a moment's time, and then
pull up ; when, if the eel is on, it may be thrown out, and
the hook cut out. There is no necessity to use a f oat
with this rig, but a few shot placed on the line, a foot
above the hook, help to keep the worm on the bottom.
Very often the eel is taken when the angler is fishing for
trout in flood water. Sniggling is another method, and is
the favourite amusement of the youthful rural angler. The
tackle used is a few yards of strong whip-cord, which is
fastened to the middle of a darning needle; the needle is
thrust into a long worm until it is thoroughly covered. The
point of the needle is slightly pushed into the end of a strong
hazel or ash stick, six or seven teet long, which may be
cut out of the hedge. The free portion of the line is caught
in the left hand, the rod in the right, and the baited needle
is pushed down into some likely hole under the water,.

88 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

where, if an eel is located, it will swallow the worm at
once ; when the tug is felt withdraw the rod gently, and in
a minute give the string a pluck which will cause the needle
to get across the gullet or stomach of the eel and stick there,
when the fish may be pulled out. Another method of
catching eels is called clod fishing. A number of worms
are threaded on as many short strands of worsted, and the
whole made up into a cluster, fastened to the end of a short
cord, which is thrown into the water and allowed to go to
the bottom ; when the eel comes at the bait, the cord is
lifted, and the worsted getting entangled in the crooked
teeth of the eel, it is not able to get rid of it until hauled
out, when the fish can be dropped into a can of water to
keep safe till killed. The clod can -be again thrown in
and the process continued so long as there is an eel in the
hole. Eels feed more at night than in the daytime, hence
night lines are successful in capturing a number of these
fish. When unhooking an eel, the plan is to put the foot
across the back, near the head, and sever the vertebra of
the iLsh with a penknife. It is difficult to kill eels; they
will show life after being skinned. It is to be hoped that
they don't feel pain, as some assert.

Eel Lines, for catching these fish at night, consist of
strong, tolerably fine, well-twisted cord, which should be
varnished. To each end is fastened a weight of at least
four pounds, either lead or stone. At intervals of two or
three feet, droppers of fine gimp, or cord with a gimp
ending, should depend, each armed with an eel hook upon
which a worm is baited. Drop one end into the water, and,
having stretched the cord to the full limit, drop the other
end ; lift by a boat hook first thing in the morning; an easier
plan is to attach one end to a fastening on the bank, and it

89

can then be lifted without having recourse to a boat. Night
lines should not be allowed in a trout stream, otherwise
many a good trout falls a victim.

Eel SpeaPS are implements used for capturing eels as
they lie buried in the mud. They are usually four or five-
pronged flat steel forks with jagged edges, distance between
prongs about three-quarters of an inch, attached by a
socket to a smooth light pine handle or shaft from eight to
twelve feet long. The spear is driven down with some
force into the mud, and if it comes in contact with an
eel it jams it between the prongs. The sport, wThich is
fatiguing, is generally carried on from a boat, at the mouth
of sluggish rivers as they enter the sea and in harbours
containing brackish water.

Ephemera is the name given to certain insects whose
existence as perfect flies lasts, in some sorts, only a few
hours, and very seldom more than a day. They are
distinguished by the smallness of the hinder wings, have
only a very rudimentary style of mouth, require no food,
and are possessed of slender filaments attached to the
lower end of the body. The eggs hatch and pass into
larvae, which remain for two years in the water. They
make for themselves burrows in the mud of the stream
or pond. At the end of two years they rise to the
surface, casting off an outer skin which liberates the wings,
and the pupae fly to some stick or obstacle, to which they
attach themselves, and by their own exertions and the heat
of the sun cause a second skin to burst, and the fly now
exhibits its brightest colour, and takes to flight. They breed,
drop their eggs on the water, and die. The ephemera
vulgata, or green drake, is to be found in profusion in a few

90 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

localities, and are favourite baits for trout, who gorge
themselves to repletion on the countless insects which skim
along the surface of the water. The trout prefer the female
fly containing the eggs. The male green drake is nothing
but a bag of wind. The female pseudimago is the green
drake — the perfect insect is the grey drake.

Feathers enter into the formation of the wings and
hackles of artificial flies, and contributions are levied upon
nearly every member of the feathered race. The wings of
trout flies are usually obtained from the starling, woodcock,
snipe, partridge, dotterel, landrail, water-rail, grouse, hen
and cock pheasant, &c. The hackle feathers principally
from the neck or back of head of game cock, neck feathers
of the domestic hen, the partridge, and tail feathers of the
wren. There is no feather that contributes to the manu-
facture of the variety of trout flies more largely than the
wing feather of the cock starling, taken from the inside of
the pinion ; it can be got with a variety of shades, from
light slate to almost black. It is an easy feather to work
with, being firm in texture and holding a close web. The
next principal feather for wings of trout flies is the landrail ;
this also is an easy feather to keep in shape, and choice of
colour can be had in this feather as well. The partridge
tail is a very universally employed feather, either by itself
or in conjunction with others ; it is a little difficult to keep it
in web, apt to get straggling in fibres, but it forms a pretty
and taking wing. The fibres of the dark mallard enter very
extensively into the formation of tails of trout flies, and the
red game cock's neck furnishes a most generally used hackle.
It is nearly impossible to possess all the feathers used in fly
making, but it is no harm for the angler to obtain as many
as possible ; and in his rambles in the country, should he

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 91

come across some good feathers of any kind it is well for
him to get hold of them ; if he does not care to use them
himself, his fly dressing friends will be very pleased to
have them. Real good, well-coloured, well-shaped feathers
are more difficult to get than any one would imagine. Many
of the feathers used in fly making, especially for salmon
flies, are dyed, as the latter are generally gorgeous in
colour. All feathers should be viewed by transmitted
light, that is by holding them up against the light and
judging their colours by the transparent view presented ; it
is in this way that the fish see them, and no other ; the
appearance of a feather as to colour seen by reflected
light is very different from that of transmitted light. A
study of these two distinct views is well worth the angler's
attention. The feathers that are principally used in the
manufacture of salmon flies are the blue and buff macaw
tail ; these are very valuable. A good feather from the
centre of the tail is worth about two shillings per inch ;
of course very little is used — only two fibres to put as
feelers on each side of the wing. Summer, Canadian, or
wood duck furnish very essential feathers for mixing with
the wings. These are the ones with the distinct black bars
across the fibres ; they are very striking in appearance.
Also those of the bittern, owl, heron, and lapwing. Red
macaw tail feathers are used occasionally, not so much as
the buff and blue. The jungle cock's neck furnishes very
useful feathers ; in fact, nearly all bright salmon flies have
one or two portions of them in — they go to form the sides
and cheeks of the fly. Toucan breast feathers are for
jointed bodies, most notably for the celebrated Jock Scott
salmon fly. Golden pheasant crest feathers go to form the
topping overlapping the wings of nearly all the best salmon

92 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

flies, also for tails of these, and very often for tails of trout
flies. Golden pheasant tippet feathers are used in several
flies for the wing, such as the Durham ranger, black ranger,
and others. Golden pheasant spotted tail feathers partly
compose the wings of many salmon flies. Kingfisher
feathers are used for the cheeks of several flies, and give a
beautiful and attractive appearance. The foreign king-
fisher yields the more useful feathers. Blue chatterer is
another foreign bird that contributes its beautiful blue
feathers, and these go to form the cheeks and sides of the
fly. Red ibis : A red feather got from this bird comes
in occasionally, but not to any great extent. Indian crow
neck gives a feather very highly prized by the salmon fly
dresser. It has a colour peculiarly its own. It is useful for
tails and jointed bcdies, such as the Popham fly and several
Irish patterns of salmon flies. Indian bustard feathers for
wings, not only for salmon flies but for loch trout and some
of the ordinary trout flies ; a valuable feather. The ostrich
herl, nearly always brought into requisition for butt and
heads of salmon flies, and invaluable. Argus pheasant and
turkey feathers are used for entire wings, and sometimes for
mixing. Eagle feathers : These are used for the celebrated
eagle flies, but are not in great demand.

Fishing" Rods form a very essential part of an angler's
outfit, and are endless in variety as to shape, size, and finish.
There is every opportunity now-a-days given by the tackle
makers to choose the right sort from their varied and
extensive stocks. A purchaser will find it to be to his
advantage, when buying a rod for the first time, if he has the
advice of a friend who is a practical angler. It is unwise to
buy a cheap and consequently a poor rod at first, under the
mistaken notion that any sort will do to learn with. Any

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 93

sort won't do to learn properly with, and the education
received by the means of a poor rod is so much time thrown
away. Very soon the rod will be thrown away also, the
cost of which is lost, and would have been more wisely
added to the price of a good one. It takes some little time
before the angler, be he tyro or professor of the art, becomes
acquainted with the capabilities of his rod and what it will
do for him. Rods are made from a variety of woods (see
11 Rod Making"), but the wood that is now to the front is
greenheart, especially for salmon and trout rods. It makes
a powerful, yet elastic and easily-handled weapon. A fly rod
made from it is capable of hooking and playing a one pound
trout, and quite able, if the occasion turns up, of hooking
and killing a ten pound salmon. A fly rod should give
a perceptible spring right down to the hand. Some anglers
prefer a stiff rod and others a whippy one. The latter is a
little more difficult to work with, especially casting against
the wind, and does not lift the line so cleanly from the
water. Many of the rods are made with small handles — for
instance the Castleconnell rods ; others, especially the
English makes, have a good grip — at least one inch in
diameter where the hand grasps — and the rod in this case
tapers off suddenly. Others have false handles fitted over
the thorough wood, made from cork, fancy wood, lapped
cane, leather, or lapped with twine like the handle of a
cricket bat. The preference should be given to the solid
wood handle, as it gives a more commanding grip. The
fewer splices or joints there are in a rod, the more
perfect the playing powers. Except for convenience, it
would be better if it had no joints at all. But this would
render it awkward to carry about. One splice or joint is
quite sufficient in a nine or ten foot rod, two in a twelve

94 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

to fourteen foot rod for trout, or sixteen or eighteen
foot rod for salmon ; that is to say, rods up to ten feet are
better in two pieces, above ten feet to eighteen feet they
are better in three pieces. A pleasant style of fly rod to
use is one of eleven to twelve feet long, with a brass taper
joint either locked or plain between the butt and middle
piece, and a waxed corded splice joint between the latter
and the top piece. Most rods give way at the top joint
owing to the wood being small there, and when making a
heavy cast against the wind the brass joints, which, wrongly
in many cases, are let into the wood the thickness of the
brass, act as a knife, and snap the wood off close. The
wood should never be cut to allow the ferrule to be fixed
flush ; in all the best rods the ferrule is driven tightly
on the joint over the wood, and if this is done and the
wood well seasoned it will never move. The wax-corded
lapped splices, when properly put together always give
satisfaction, but to make these right takes up some little
time, which on the banks of a stream is apt to cause the
angler to lose patience and to hurry over the job, lest he
should miss the trout which he sees rising on each side
of him ; consequently the joint is only half made, and
works loose, especially at a critical time. Besides, when
tying, this joint necessitates the angler wearing gloves to
prevent the wax adhering to his fingers, which it will do in
a determined manner, and is only to be got rid of by an
ample use of hot water and soap. If a flat silk braid is
used, much wax is unnecessary ; silk takes a better " bite n
on the wood than cord or thread. A single-handed rod
should never be longer than twelve feet, and this length
will cover all the water necessary. For wooded or narrow
streams, a rod nine or ten feet is very suitable. A double-

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 95

handed rod for trout is about thirteen or fourteen feet long,
and this length will suit well for lake fishing or trolling from
a boat. A salmon rod is seldom less than sixteen feet, and
rarely more than twenty. There are rods called " general
rods," which can be used for various styles of fishing by
having top joints of several strengths and lengths fitted.
These rods are not very satisfactory, as the balance of
them cannot be properly obtained. A fly rod should
never be used for any other style of fishing. Spinning and
trolling rods are often made from the hollow mottled cane,,
generally with the top piece made of greenheart. These
rods are very light and powerful. A spike to a rod is an
useful adjunct, although it is now considered to be old-
fashioned. It comes in handy to keep the rod upright when
loosening a fly that has got caught in a branch, and it keeps
a rod and line out of harm's way by sticking it in the ground
when the angler is resting or changing his flies, or when a
friend comes round to borrow a fly or interchange views on
the sport of the day. It is dangerous to lay the rod on the
ground ; many a good one has been smashed past all
redemption by being trodden upon inadvertently. Most of
the present style of rods are finished at the butt with an
indiarubber or turned wooden button. Some anglers
prefer a top-heavy rod ; it certainly lifts a long line from
the water well, and casts a heavy line against the wind
comparatively easy, but it is tiresome on the arm. Rods if
not varnished — which many anglers have an objection to —
should be French polished and kept well oiled. After the
day's fishing is over, the rod should be wiped dry and clean
with a soft cloth and put away in its waterproof case, and
then laid down flat on a dry floor or table, or hung up by
one end from a nail on the wall, or put in rod rest (q.vS)*

96 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

It is a very common but mischievous practice to lean them
up in a corner like walking sticks ; this will certainly give
a set, which, if it once occurs, will never be got rid of, and
will spoil the fine casting powers of any rod. The rings of
a rod should be large, even at the expense of appearance,
as with these there is less danger of a foul when the line is
running than if they are small. It is gaining in favour to
have upright rings now fastened on trout rods. They are
a little awkward to handle in the case, else there is no
objection to them. The weight of these rings alters the play
of rod. The tying of the rings should always be carefully
attended to, and kept well varnished to prevent them from
becoming loosened. Rods should be stained a dark, sombre
colour, such as brown or drab. All light and bright colours
ought to be avoided. Trout as well as salmon rods should
be furnished with an extra top, which can be carried in the
handle of the landing net or gaff.

Flights are certain combinations of hooks, either single,
-double, or treble, which are fastened to short links of gut
or gimp, according to the kind of fishing, viz., trout, sea
trout, salmon, or pike, and are used for dead and live bait
spinning. The simplest is one large hook with lip hook.

c

LARGE HOOK AND LIP HOOK FLIGHT.

This is a tackle greatly liked in Scotland and the North of
England. The next is the same, with a flying drag hook}
which is recommended by the late W. C. Stewart in his

THE 'BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

97

" Practical Angler." Another favourite flight is the large
hook and lip hook, with triangle to fasten in the back of
bait. This flight is highly spoken of by the late Francis
Francis. The Pennell flight, which has a lead to go into
the body of the bait, has a good reputation. There is one

r

c

LARGE HOOK AND LIP HOOK FLIGHT, WITH FLYING DRAG.

LARGE HOOK AND LIP HOOK FLIGHT, WITH TRIANGLE.

PEN NELL'S FLIGHT.

THREE TRIANGLES AND SHIFTING LIP HOOK FLIGHT.

made up with triangles and lip hook, and another one with
screw fins and lead, which is pushed into the mouth of the
dead bait, and the triangles are then fastened in the sides
or back of the fish; it is sometimes called the " Chapman

G

98 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Spinner." The angler can, however, choose any sort he
likes from the endless variety offered by all the tackle

CHAPMAN SPINNER.

makers. All these patterns answer if they are properly
baited and worked well.

Floating* Flies are used for dry fly fishing, and are
now becoming very fashionable. They are dressed on eyed
hooks specially manufactured for the purpose, also on hooks
tied on gut like the wet flies. The wings and hackles of
these are rather heavier than those of the ordinary trout
flies, but the mode of dressing them is very similar. The
dubbings mentioned under the head " Dubbings" are used
to make the bodies ; also maize straw and the small quills
taken from the pinions of various birds, and as the latter
can be dyed any colour, and stand the water well, they are
very suitable to the purpose. The bodies made from maize
straw are not so lasting, as they suffer considerably from
the teeth of the trout when hooked. Fish scales are em-
ployed as wings, and also the wings of natural flies ; these
latter, of course, look very real, but they require great care
to keep them in shape, and must not be carried in a book,
but in a box or other receptacle where they will not be
crushed. Floating flies, having the wings of fine silk,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 99

showing the veins in exact imitation of nature, have been
lately introduced by a London firm of tackle makers. The
wings are prepared by a patent process, and are most life-
like copies of aquatic flies. Quills, when used for bodies,
must be steeped a considerable time in water before they
are pliant enough to wind. It is claimed for these floating
flies that they are much closer imitations of the natural fly
than the ordinary wet ones. They require to be so, as they
are generally used in very clear water, and, no doubt,
undergo a severe scrutiny from the wary, watchful trout.

Floats are made from cork or quills, or both combined,
and are attached to the line a certain length from the hooks
and bait, so as to keep these the desired distance from the
bottom, according to the studied plan of the angler, learnt
by experience. The float by its movements serves to give
notice to the angler when a fish is attacking his bait, and
allows him the opportunity of striking. These floats can
be obtained all sizes, shapes, and colours. (See " Corks.")

FIOSS Silk is employed to form the bodies of many
artificial flies found in either a salmon or trout fisher's
book. As it is fine in the fibre and not hard twisted, it can
be manipulated to form very even taper bodies. It may be
had of almost any colour, and as the dyes are good, it stands
the water wTell without bleaching. Floss silk is also used by
the angler to form his " blow line," which he uses for fine
daping for trout — principally in lakes or large sheets of
water — from a boat. A short casting line of very fine gut
is attached to one end of it ; the other end is fastened neatly
to the main reel line, so as to appear a continuation of it.
The rod used is long and light, and the angler raising it up
allows the blow line to be wafted nicely by a breath of air
over the spot where a fish is supposed to be. The lure

IOO

being a natural fly, impaled on a daping hook, moves
naturally on the water, and is too enticing to be resisted
generally. The silk is strong, and will play a fish well.
Care should be taken to keep it dry, and not allow it to get
cut or frayed when winding up.

Fly Cast, also called " point/' "lash," and "stinting,*1
is the portion of the single gut or single hair line to which
the flies are attached. (See " Casting Lines.")

Fly Dressing* Tools and Materials consist of

small table vice, pen-knife, scissors, fly tweezers, dubbing
needles, gold and silver tinsel of various widths, gold
twist, reels of different coloured silks for tying, floss silks
of colours, shoemaker's wax and marine glue, wools of
colours, mohair, furs of various kinds, feathers and hooks.
These should all be kept in a properly-constructed box,
with partitions to keep each variety or material separate.
The box ought to be airtight — one made from camphor
wood is a luxury, as no moths will attack the furs and
feathers contained in it. All fly material boxes should
be inspected often to prevent the ravages of these pests.
Camphor is a great preventive, and should be liberally
used among feathers. Scraps of Russia leather, to be
obtained of any first-class bootmaker, should be carried
in the pockets of the fly books for the same purpose ; the
smell keeps away moths.

FOLDING SCISSORS.

■ Folding ScissOFS are handy implements for the
angler's pocket. Some have the blades extended lengthwise,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. IOI

and others fold up with the bools overlapping each other.

READY FOR USE.

They are better electro-plated, being not so liable to rust
as the plain steel ones.

French Polish is useful to finish off rods or landing
net handles, and preferable to varnishing, as it is devoid
of the glisten or shine, which is more or less objectionable
on account of it being easily seen by the sharp-sighted fish.
It fills up the pores of the wood, and an occasional rub of
linseed oil will keep all in proper order for years. A good
reliable polish can be made as follows : — One pint of
methylated spirits wine ; half-ounce gum copal ; quarter-
ounce gum arabic ; one ounce shellac. Place the spirits
and the gums in a vessel closely corked, put near a warm
stove, and shake frequently ; in a few days all will be
dissolved, when it should be strained through a piece of
muslin and kept well corked. French polish can be
obtained ready for use from most druggists, but the best is
generally to be had from cabinet-makers, who have their
own special recipe.

Fpeneh Polishing.— Pour a little raw linseed oil
into a cup, and some of the French polish into another.

102 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Roll up a small cutting of soft old flannel in a ball or pad,
leaving the edges out to form a grip. Put a little of the
polish on the ball ; over this draw a small piece of fine old
linen rag, free from starch. The polish will make its way
through, when a single drop of linseed oil may be put on
the rag with the finger. The ball of flannel and old linen is
held firmly in the hand, and with a brisk, light circular
motion, the wood to be polished is gone over, doing a small
portion of it at a time. When the rubber feels sticky, renew
polish and oil same way, and proceed until all the work is
well filled up, and presents a nice skin. Sometimes a rough-
ness comes on the wood on account of the polish rubbing up
into lumps, When this is the case, go over the work with
a rub or two of very fine glass paper, and polish as at first.
In working the pad, don't let it rest, else it will stick and
remove all the polish that has been already rubbed in. It
takes about three hours to polish a twelve foot trout rod,
resting the hand occasionally. It is not necessary to do it
all at once — it may be half polished, and finished in a day or
so after; in fact, it is better to let the first two or three coats
harden well. Polishing is best done in a warm room, or
near a fire or stove. Finish off the polishing with a rub of
naphtha instead of the French polish; this hardens the skin.

Frog" Fishing" foP Pike is a common practice with
the rustic angler. The frog is baited by passing the line
with a baiting needle under the skin of the back, leaving
the hook exposed between the hind legs ; also by catching
the skin of the back with the hook — this plan keeps the
bait longer alive. Another method is to have a triangle of
hooks fastened to the frog's body by a lashing of fine cord
or thread. Sometimes the frog is skinned. All of these
plans are cruel, and should not be encouraged.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 103

FUPS of sorts are used to form the bodies of artificial flies,
and may be obtained of a furrier. Those most useful are
taken from the lug of a hare ; and the large reddish-coloured
hare of the midland counties of England gives fur of the.
most desirable colour. The poll of the hare also affords a
nice fur. Then the badger's fur, also that of the sable,
martin, rabbit, and squirrel ; that taken from the belly of
the hedgehog and the flank and belly of the water-rat is
greatly used. Seal's fur is also in demand, and is, as a
rule, dyed to colour required. All these should be picked
up as chance offers, and laid by separately ; they will all
come in handy for fly dressing.

Gaff, sometimes called a "clip" or "cleek," is the imple-
ment used to land salmon or other large fish when played
and ready for the operation. It is a sharp steel hook, strong
and well tempered ; sometimes slightly barbed, oftener
plain. This is fixed to a strong ash handle — of different
lengths — either by a screw joint or by being well lashed on
with waxed twine. There are several varieties of these.
Some fold up, others open and shut with a spring ; many
have telescopic handles, but the simpler they are the better.
The points of the gaff should be kept sharp, and to protect
these when not in use they may be inserted in a wine cork.
After use they should be wiped dry and oiled, to prevent
rust forming on them and destroying the temper. (For
illustrations of folding gaffs see following page.)

Gentles are flesh maggots, and may be procured as
follows : — Hang up a liver or portion of one in some shady
place, where the blue bottle or blow fly can have access to
it. Make some deep gashes with a knife in the liver ; in
these the eggs of the fly will be deposited, and in a few
days they will hatch out. In a week the maggots will be

io4

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

ready for scouring. This is done by allowing them to drop
from the meat into a vessel containing some sand mixed

FOLDING GAFFS (SEE PRECEDING PAGE).

with bran. The gentles soon clean themselves in this, and,
becoming tough, are ready to be used as bait for nearly all
sorts of fresh water fish. It is essential to keep the scoured

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 105

gentles in a cool place to retard them from assuming the
chrysalis form, which would render them useless for the
angler's purpose. If the weather is warm, the vessel con-
taining them may be buried in the* earth ; this excludes both
air and heat. Gentles are not pleasant things to handle,
and a nice scoured worm will do as well in most cases.

GillaPOO is the name given to a peculiar description of
brown trout found in many of the lakes and a few of the
rivers of Ireland. The name signifies " red boy." Ruadh,
"red," denotes the very prominent red spots which are
found on the fish; and giolla, "boy," is in accordance
with usage in Ireland, which does not limit the term to
age, sex, genus, or class, but employs it for every object
of familiarity — hence the Celtic word gillie, also signi-
fying a "boy." This explanation is necessary, as it has
been erroneously described to mean "gizzard," which this
fish is supposed to possess ; this so-called gizzard is merely
a large, thick, muscular stomachy which usually contains
a quantity of small shell fish of three or four kinds. Sir
Humphrey Davy considered the gillaroo to be a distinct
breed, or a sort of link between char and trout. The
gillaroo is highly esteemed both for its edible qualities
and for the sport it affords. It is caught by the same means
as ordinary trout and associates with them, and is only
to be found in Ireland.

Gimp is composed of a thread or two of silk, flax, or
hemp, covered over with an arming of fine brass or copper
wire, which can also be had silvered. It is useful for
making spinning traces, and attached as collars to strong
hooks for the capture of pike, as their teeth are so
numerous and sharp that nothing else will stand against
their attacks. It is formed into traces by being fastened to

106 THE BRITISH' ANGLER'S LEXICON.

swivels, and these are looped to spoons, artificial minnowsr
or other spinning tackle, and used for pike, salmon, and the
salmoferox, or the great lake trout. The ends, freed from
the wire arming, when forming ties or loops, should be lashed
with well-waxed silk thread. Knots are objectionable.
Gimp can be dyed a dark colour, which is held in great
esteem by the best pike fishers. The recipe is as fol-
lows : — Cleanse the brass gimp thoroughly ; then brush it
over with the following solution, which should be boiling : —
Distilled water, one hundred parts by weight ; caustic soda,
twelve parts ; neutral chloride of platinum, one part. Then
wash, dry and varnish. The colour given is something like
oxydised silver, and is a desirable one.

Glisten or Glare applies to the disagreeable, blinding
brightness which is thrown over the face of the water by
the sun shining in a cloudless sky. When the angler sees
this, he generally makes up his mind that it is little use
fishing, as the fish are very well able to see his movements,
whilst he can see nothing. This appearance is often to be
seen in the autumn evening with a declining sun and frost
coming on. The only chance of fishing when this glare is
on the water is with the dry fly, casting it lightly on to the
rings made by rising fish.

Glut is the term which applies to a mass of flies
alighting upon the water, and upon which the fish gorge
themselves to repletion, so that they refuse to rise to an
artificial fly. When this glut is on, there is little chance of
the angler getting any sport. In some rivers the flies are so
numerous on the water, that a solid row of them may be
seen sweeping down the current before the wind. When a
fish is caught during the glut, if its mouth is examined it

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 107

will be found crammed with the fly, and oozing out of the
sides.

Gorge or Gorge Hook is made by having either
one or two good-sized hooks fastened to a length of stout
gut, light wire, or gimp. This is carried down through the
body of the bait — either a dace, bleak, or gudgeon — and,
drawing the hooks close against the sides of the mouth, the
bare end of the gut or wire is caught through the tail, and
may be lashed with a few turns of thread to prevent it
slipping. It has a loop on it, to which the trace is attached,
and may be used as spinning bait.

Grayling", The (Thy ma/ /us vulgaris), is a very
handsome fish of the family of the salmonidae ; and of a
genus distinguished from salmon trout, &c, by having a
smaller mouth, much smaller teeth, and a greater size of
dorsal fin. It seldom exceeds fifteen to sixteen inches in
length, and is of elegant proportions. The head is small.

THE GRAYLING.

The colour of the back is a bluish grey, inclining to silver
towards the belly. The spots are arranged across the
dorsal fin. There are several black spots and dusky streaks
on the back. This fish is found in many of the streams in
the midland and southern counties of England, and in the
Clyde in Scotland ; but not in Ireland. It is very fond of

108 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

bright gravelly-bottomed streams, and will not thrive in
muddy ones. It spawns in April and May, and comes into
condition about the time that trout are out of season —
October and November. It is greatly esteemed for the
table, and is better used when fresh caught ; its flesh has a
flavour of thyme, hence its generic name.

Grayling1 Fishing1 begins just about the time trout
and salmon fishing is over. These fish are caught prin-
cipally by artificial fly, but they are fond of a worm or
maggot ; they are seldom caught with the minnow, but
much fished for with an artificial grasshopper — a special
lure for them— made by lightly leading a No. 7 or 8
Limerick hook, wrapping green worsted over it, and
forming yellow rings on the body with silk or gold tinsel.
The hook is baited with a few gentles, allowed to sink,
and then drawn about with short jerks as in spinning.
A small quill float is attached to the line to let the angler
know when the grasshopper has touched the bottom.
Strike firmly when the top of the rod bends ; but be
cautious, as the mouth of the grayling is not as tough
as that of a trout. It is considered amongst high-class
anglers that grayling should never be fished for with any
lure but the artificial fly. The flies used for grayling are
similar to trout flies ; perhaps a shade brighter in appear-
ance. Grayling seldom go over three pounds in weight.
They are not so shy as trout, and therefore concealment of
the person is not of such importance. They do not as a
rule take a good hold of the fly hook, therefore the play
should be gentle, giving them plenty of liberty ; they often
make a last violent effort to escape the landing net. Worm
fishing is a very deadly method of taking grayling and
greatly practised in the Yorkshire streams, the angler using

THK BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 109

a drawn gut cast, with a fine wire round bend hook, on
which is impaled a lively red worm. The line is shotted,
and a small float used to prevent the worm touching the
bottom. It is thrown up-stream. The disappearance of
the float indicates when the worm is seized ; a smart,
quick strike generally fixes the hook, and the grayling is
then led to the landing net.

Green Drake Fishing" occurs generally in the
month of May in several localities of the British Isles, and is
found in great perfection in the lakes and rivers of some of
the midland counties of Ireland. It is considered prime
sport, and numbers of anglers from all parts of the kingdom
flock to the favoured portions of the country to enjoy a week
or so at this style of fishing. If the weather is fine, the
season lasts about three weeks. The insects may be
gathered off the hedgerows at the sides of the river by
shaking or striking the bushes, when they fly out and
alight on the grass a few yards away. They are lifted
carefully by the wings and dropped into a box with a sliding
perforated lid, or a horn made suitable to contain them, which
allows of them being taken out singly when required to be
baited on the hook. The hook should be about a No. 4 or 5.
round bend, with a strong but slender shank, nicely armed
or tied on a casting line. The hook enters under the
thorax of the fly, and the barb is brought out at the little
dark spot found between the wings at the shoulders. This
baiting can be made more alluring by affixing another
green drake by the tail on the barb, which flutters on the
water, drawing the attention of the fish to its movements.
The rod should be light, stiff, and long, to allow the line to
carry out well writh the wind, as the fly being tender it would
flick off if cast in the ordinary way. The trout taken by the

110 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

green drake are generally good-sized ones, and make a
wicked fight, as they are in first class condition owing to the
great amount of luscious food they come in for at this green
drake season, for when this is full on, the river is covered
with countless myriads of the big fat fly. Green drake
fishing is carried on from boats in the lakes, and in
some broad shallow streams where a boat would not
float the fishing is done by cross lining. This is con-
sidered poaching, but as a license can be obtained
it should hardly be dubbed by this ignominious title ;
besides, no other style of angling would be of use to these
fish, nor could the angler put his fly over them in any
other manner, especially as the good fish generally stop in
-deep places where no angler could wade to. This mode of
fishing is done by two anglers joining their lines, and each
one taking a separate bank of the river. Where the lines
are joined a strong gut casting line depends for about six
feet, with the hook at one end and a swivel in the middle,
and another at the junction with the reel line. The hook is
baited with the green drake, and a sharp look-out is kept
for a good-feeding fish. Whichever side of the river this
fish is on is called the fishing side, and the man on that side
angles for the fish. The man on the opposite side is merely
a machine for the time being, giving out line or reeling up
as instructed by the man who is fishing. Sometimes it is
one of them who fishes, and sometimes the other. The
trout caught this way give good play, and as they are as
often out of the water as in it, it requires careful wTatching to
prevent them breaking the hold with their tail, by lowering
the rod immediately the fish falls to the water after the
spring. The green drake is kept bobbing or fluttering on
the top of the water ; not allowed to get wet or drowned, as

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. Ill

in this case it becomes useless and must be replaced by a
living insect. The green drake is named the May fly
in the south of England and in Ireland ; this must not be
confounded with the stone fly, which also bears the name
of May fly in the north of England and Scotland.

GreenheaPt, a tree of the natural order of Lauracce,
is a native of Guiana and Cuba, and grows in the greatest
perfection in the hills behind the alluvial lands. The wood
is dense, extremely strong and hard, and so heavy as to sink
in water. It takes a high polish, and is remarkable for its
elasticity, likewise be ng almost exempt from the attacks of
white ants and other wood-boring insects. It is the most
valuable wood that the rod maker can obtain, and is super-
seding all others in the manufacture of fishing rods. Owing
to its dense, oily nature, it takes a very long time to season?
before it is fit to work for above purposes.

Grilse (in some districts "grawl," in others "peel") is
the name given to the young salmon, which as a smolt
having descended the river to the sea, returns for the first
time to fresh water. It generally attains at this time about
the weight of five or six pounds, and as it spawns now and
does not increase in size when in fresh water, it is called
grilse until it returns a second time from the sea, when it is
called salmon, although it may not have yet attained its full
size. It requires a little experience to distinguish a large
grilse from a small salmon, as sometimes the former is the
larger of the two. A grilse has smaller scales, which are
very soft ; also longer fins, and the tail more forked.
Grilse are very lively, and give most exciting sport when
hooked. Flies, same as for salmon, with smaller hooks.

Ground Bait is composed of various substances,
and used nearly always when coarse fish are about to be

112 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

angled for, by throwing it into the swims or portions of
water in a river or pond where it is desirous to congregate
them. It may be composed of greaves or chandler's refuse ;
any greasy matter mixed up with bran, flour, or stale bread.
These also may be used by themselves, in addition to
cheese, rice, barley, malt, and grains. One of the most
successful of the baits is that made up of broken worms,
which are thrown loosely into the water above the swim, so
that the current may carry them right down to the desired
spot. If maggots or gentles are used, they are best mixed
up with a little clay and bran into a ball. Cheese may be
made up into pellets and thrown in. Greaves should be
scalded and mixed after being broken up small, or they may
be thrown in loosely. Bread, boiled rice, or barley may be
mixed up with clay loosely, or they may be formed up into
little balls without the clay. Ground baiting is generally
done at least ten hours before the angler begins his fishing
operations ; and during the time he is fishing it is advisable
to occasionally throw in some ground bait, as this keeps the
fish on the move and incites them to feed.

THE GUDGEON.

Gudgeon, The (Gobio). — A genus of fishes of the
cyprinidde family, having a short dorsal fin. The scales are

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 113

large, and there are barbules at the angles of the mouth.
The common gudgeon is found in many of the streams
of the British Isles, especially those having gravelly
bottoms. It seldom attains more than eight inches in
length. The tail is forked, the eyes set high up in the
head ; colour, an olive-brown on the back, spotted with
black, and the belly and sides white. They swim in shoals,
and feed on worms, molluscs, and other larvae that they
rake up from the sand and gravel. They are very good
eating, and one of the best baits that can be used for
large trout or pike.

Gudgeon Fishing is the amusement of the young
angler, and often the first lesson he learns in the art of
angling. The tackle cannot be too fine. Bait a No. 1 hook
with a portion of a small red worm, a maggot or gentle.
Let this trip along the bottom of the gravelly stream where
the gudgeons are, and very soon they will attack it. They
bite boldly, and can be thrown out at the first indication of
a nibble. It is usual to rake up the sand at the bottom of
the stream to muddy the water, when the particles floating
about will attract the fish in numbers, and sometimes as
many as ten dozen can be caught in a very short time in the
one spot.

Gut, Silkworm, is an indispensable portion of an
angler's outfit, and great care should be taken to have it as
perfect as possible. It should be transparent — not a dull
white — and perfectly round. If it is not so it will glitter in
the sun and be useless for the angler's purpose. Although
every angler uses it, yet few really know anything of its
origin. The name is rather misleading ; it is not the gut of
the worm, although it comes from its inside. It is formed
from a viscid matter contained in two sacs lying side by

H

114 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

side. This substance is really "embryo silk," or what
would have been spun into silk if the worm had been allowed
to exist. The following description of the preparation of
this article is furnished by Mr. Samuel Allcock, when on a
visit to his gut manufactory at Murcia, in Spain, during the
gut harvest in 1886 : — " The worms are bred by the country
people in their cottages, which usually consist of two rooms
on the ground floor. In some of the villages near Murcia
this is the sole occupation of the people, some of whom rear
the worms, while others attend to the initial stages of gut
making. On one side of the living room of these cottages
the worm breeder ties together a number of bamboo cane
rods, which grow plentifully there, forming a bed of twelve
to fifteen feet long by four feet wide. The worms are
spread over these, and are fed five times daily by covering
them with mulberry leaves. Before feeding, all unhealthy
or dead worms are picked out and removed. The worms
live about fifty days, during which time they sleep three
days at a time, in all twelve days. When they are ready to
spin the cocoon, they creep upon branches of small trees cut
out of the gardens, which are placed on the cane beds.
They are taken off, put into vinegar, where they remain for
six hours, and then put into water. Some of the country
people make a special business of this, purchasing the
worms from others and employing girls to draw out the gut,
which is done by taking off the head of the worm and taking
hold of the so-called entrails with the thumb and finger and
pulling them out as long as they will come, then placing the
gut in clear water. When a sufficient quantity — say two or
three thousand — are drawn, the gut is tied in bunches and
hung up to dry in yard or garden. Some worms produce one
thread of gut, some two, and a few three. It is afterwards

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 1 15

sold by weight to the gut makers. The latter boil the gut
with soap and water and a little soda, when the outer skin
or film comes off easily. It is then washed, bleached, and
hung up in rooms. Girls are then employed, who place
each strand between their teeth, holding the other end
between the finger and thumb, and rub it with wash-leather.
It is then sorted according to strength, thickness, and
length into the various qualities, re-rubbed, and tied in
hanks of one hundred, and again into bundles of one
thousand for sale." Gut is usually classified under the
following heads : — " Corta," or common. " Regular,"
medium in thickness. This and the " Corta" are the
cheapest ; the other classes, whether stout or thin, being
dearer in proportion to extremes of thickness or thinness
and length over the " Regular." The next thinner is
termed " Fina"; and the finest, '"Refina." From the latter
is made the best undrawn casting lines, the shorter lengths
being used for fly-tying. In the stouter guts are first and
second aPadron," and a light salmon gut, u Marana"; and
last, but not least, the double thick " Marana." Great care
is taken in picking out the best strands for fly casting
lines, and not a little skill is requisite in making these
up neatly with suitable knots. All the best casts are
stretched and their weight-bearing qualities tested. The
shorter lengths are used for the purpose of tying on
hooks with fine strong silk. Gut can be purchased stained,
but the better plan is for the angler to stain what threads
he requires before he makes up his casts. How to do
this, and also how to knot the links together, are treated
under separate headings. Gut should be kept at its length,
rolled up in wash-leather, and not in too warm or dry a
place.

Il6 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Haekles are very important articles in fly dressing,
and represent the legs of the fly. They are the small, hard
feathers that hang from the head of a game cock down
his neck ; also to be obtained from the necks of other
barn-door fowl ; good ones are occasionally to be obtained
from near his tail, and from the tails of small birds such
as the wren. The partridge and rails also furnish hackles.
The most generally useful ones are those taken from a
well-bred red game or duck-wing game cock. The better
bred the bird is, the better the shape of the hackle.
The fibres at the root of the quill should not be more
than half an inch long, and taper evenly to a point with
a perfectly straight edge, and those devoid of blue roots
are considered the best. A good cock's hackle will be
as firm as wire, so that when dressed on a fly it stands
out regularly and stiff. The feathers should be obtained
from a bird of not less than two years old ; those taken
from either a chicken or a bantam cock are useless, and
the proper season to collect them is about Christmas, when
the birds are in their best plumage. Hackles for dun flies
are generally blue or grizzled ; the former can be obtained
from the neck of an Andulasian cock, and the latter from
the grizzled cock. Dorking cocks afford cream-coloured
feathers, but they are soft. The wren gives a nice brown-
coloured, long-fibred hackle from his tail ; these also should
be obtained in the winter, when the feathers of this little
bird assume a rich rusty colour, almost the hue of a
withered fern. The topping of the lapwing furnishes a
good black hackle if taken from an old bird ; those got on a
young bird are too soft and short in fibre. Many fly dressers
use hen hackles, but they are soft, yet useful for some
flies. Hackles can also be picked up from many of the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 117

game birds, such as the grouse, pheasant, partridge, &c,
choosing them small from over the back and under the
wings. All hackles can be heightened in colour by dyeing,
and those used in the manufacture of salmon flies undergo
this process as a rule.

HaiP adapted for fly dressing is principally got from the
swine's belly, and is called pig's wool. It is a little coarse,
and cannot well be used in the smaller or fine flies. It
may be dyed any required colour. It stands the water
remarkably well. Hair is obtained also from the badger ;
and that taken from the Angora sheep, called mohair, is
very much employed to make the bodies of small trout
flies — it is long and of a soft silky texture, dyes well, and
retains its colour in water.

Handle of gaff or landing net is generally made from a
stout, straight piece of ash, hickory, or from bamboo cane.
The latter, being easily made into a hollow cylinder, is
convenient for carrying a spare top or two for a fly rod.
But the solid handle of stiff wood is the best, as it is useful
to lean upon when the angler is wading, and to assist him

LANDING HANDLE— CLOSED.

"S

LANDING HANDLE— OPEN.

when going over slippery stones, and for this purpose it
should be shod with a small strong steel spike and crook.
Many of these handles are telescopic, to make them handy
for carrying. The handle of a landing net should be
not less than five feet long, as often the fish has to be

Il8 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON

landed over a fringe of weeds, or perhaps from a high,
overhanging bank. The gaff handle should be about three
feet long, as a greater length than this does away with the
command the angler has over it when gaffing a fish. For
boat work the handle may be shorter. All handles should
be stained of a darkish colour and well varnished, and
when not in use should either lie flat or be suspended by
one end from a nail ; resting them in a corner gives them
an awkward bend. Many of these handles have an
arrangement whereby they can be attached to the pannier,
leaving both hands free.

Hat. — This portion of an angler's outfit should be made
of some light material — broad in the brim to protect the
eyes from the glare of the sun. It should be soft and well
ventilated, as the head is apt to get heated in angling,
especially in warm weather. A nice drab soft felt hat is
about the best style. It may have a flannel band round it
of the same colour, on wrhich the spare casting lines and
flies may be wound. It is objectionable, however, to keep
casting lines, especially fine ones, exposed to the air and
sun, as it tends to make them brittle. A hard hat is an
abomination to the angler.

Haunt is the particular spot or portion of a river
wrhere a good fish, especially a trout, is known to frequent
and to be seen feeding. The denizens of a haunt are not
easily enticed, and a great deal of ingenuity and patience is
required very often on the part of the angler before he can
circumvent the wary fish.

Hemp Lines. — These are made both twisted and
plaited, and used principally for sea fishing, eel fishing, and
for pike reel lines.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 119

Hickory (Carya) is the wood of a tree indigenous to
North America, and imported to this country in large
quantities, as it comes into use for many purposes. It is
highly esteemed for making the butts and sometimes the
second or middle joint of fly rods, as it is strong, tenacious,
and has a considerable spring. It is much lighter than
greenheart, and can be used with advantage in conjunction
with this wood. It is liable to get a set if not very well
seasoned. It stains well and takes a good polish. It will
not stand much heat or moisture, and is liable to injury
from worms. The second growth of the hickory tree is
that used for rod making.

Hitches are half knots, and useful to the angler in
many ways ; although they hold firm, yet they are easily
unloosed. There are several of them, the simplest of which
is called the half hitch, and is mostly what is adopted in
finishing off the body of a fly, or of fastening any portion of
it with the tying silk to hold it firm while another portion of
the process may be gone on with. It is made by taking a
loose turn of the thread round the body, drawing the
end of the thread through the open coil and pulling it
down tight ; as the thread is well waxed, it bites hard,
and is wonderfully firm. This hitch shows no knot or
protuberance, which would be unsightly in a small fly. The
double hitch is made by leaving two open coils and drawing
the end of thread through ; this gives a firmer hitch than
the single one. The double half hitch is made by repeating
the single half hitch, and is usually the fastening made
on the head or finish of a trout fly ; but some fly dressers
use the whip hitch, especially for tying off the heads of
eyed hooks. This is done by throwing a long loop of the
thread out and confining both ends of thread by the finger

120

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

and thumb of left hand. Now take one arm of the loop,
pass it over the end of the hook, and with it lap in the other
arm of the loop at each turn until three or four turns or
whips have been given, when the loose end of thread may
be drawn tight and confined by the whips which have passed
over it, forming a very firm finishing hitch. This hitch can
only be made on an object where the end is sufficiently close
to allow the loop to pass round, hence suitable for eyed
hooks. This whip can be readily understood by referring to
the illustration given of it in " Halford's Dry Fly Fishing."
There are the hitches by which the casting line is fastened
to the reel line ; and there are several of them. One is
made by passing the knotted end of main line down through
the loop on casting line, holding it by thumb of left hand ;
then pass the main line across the loop, holding it with

JAM HITCH.

thumb of right hand, and bring the knotted end up between
the loop and main line, when it can be drawn tight,

ANOTHER JAM HITCH.

manipulating the knot on end of reel line till it is close to
the head of the loop. When this hitch is required to be

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 121

unloosed, slide it back on the loop and the end will come
free. This is a neat hitch, and quite safe. Another jam hitch
is shown by figure ; it is a little bulky, but a good one.
Another hitch used for same purpose as last is made by
catching the main line within two inches of the end by the
finger and thumb of left hand, underneath the knot of the
loop of the casting line ; pass the main line across the loop,
fetch the loose end up over it, and double it into a loop,
which is now passed into the head of casting line loop and all
drawn up tight, thus leaving the knotted end of main line
free to be pulled when the lines are to be unfastened. This
is the tiller hitch ; it is clumsy, but it can be loosed in the

TILLER HITCH.

dark by a pull on the loose end of main line. The hitch
given to lapped joints of fishing rods when put up, is by
passing the last five or six coils of the lapping twine round
with the forefinger intervening ; then withdraw the finger
and pass the loose end up through the coils and draw tight.
This is a half hitch on a large scale. The fastening of the
line rings on the rod is made in a similar way, except that a
doubled and separate piece of loose thread is used instead
of the finger, and the loose end is put through the loop,
which is then drawn back through the lapping and cut off
close. This makes an invisible finish, and is perfectly

122 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

secure. There are many more hitches, but these are
sufficient for the angler's purpose.

Hollow Butt is now seldom used in a fishing rod ;
still, if the angler is having what is called a general rod,
where a nice style of casting is not aimed at, he will find a
hollow butt useful to carry a few tops of different lengths so
as to make his rod suitable for the style of fishing engaged
in. The butt to be hollow is necessarily thick, and. not
much tapered, to permit a suitable cavity to be bored up its
entire length. It is clumsy in the hand and devoid of
spring, not at all suitable for fly casting.

Hooks. — These important necessaries of an angler's
outfit are numerous and varied. There are four distinct
recognized bends made by all hook manufacturers, namely,
sneck, round, Kirby, and Limerick ; and springing from
these four are many modifications, such as Sproat,
McKenzie, and others. No less than one hundred and
eighty different sorts, each having twenty to thirty sizes,
are in use, such as quadruple, treble, double, gorge,
lip, and snap hooks, eyed hooks of various styles, and
many others too numerous to give details of. Redditch
is the largest hook producing district, and several well-
known makers have their factories in that town, viz.,
Messrs. Allcock & Co., Messrs. W. Bartlett & Sons, and
one or two others. The Redditch makers number their
hooks as follows : — Round, sneck, or Kirby commence at
No. 17 as the smallest and run up to 10/0 as the largest.
The Limerick bends commence at No. 18, the smallest, and
run up to 10/0. These latter run larger than the other
three makes ; for instance, the No. 18 Limerick is about a
No. 16 of the others. The Kendal makers run their sizes
the reverse of the Redditch makers, hence there is a good

124 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

deal of confusion. Their smallest hooks ccmmence No. oo
and run up to No. 20, the largest. It has often been dis-
cussed amongst the angling world the desirability of having
all makes of hooks uniform in number, but as yet no change
has been made, and no doubt it would make confusion
more confounded to alter, seeing the different makers have
their trade catalogues scattered all over the world. The
Redditch makers number their hooks after the wire they
are made from — No. 16 hook from No. 16 wire — so that the
number of the wires would have to be altered as well, if
a uniform plan of numbering was to be adopted. How-
ever, most catalogues give illustrations of the numbers
and sizes of hooks, so that the angler can have no difficulty
in procuring the size and shape he wants by consulting
them. The manufacture of fish hooks is a very par-
ticular business, giving employment to a large number
of skilled workpeople, and a description of the various
operations through which a hook passes, from the plain
straight length of wire until it is papered up for sale,
may prove interesting to many anglers. First the wires
are cut by shears into the requisite lengths necessary for
the particular number of hook that the operator intends to
make. The barb or beard is cut by means of a hollow-
ground knife, which, being deftly turned by the hand of the
workman, opens the fluke to the required gauge, care
being taken not to cut too deep lest the barb be weakened,
which would give way when used. The third operation
consists of filing the points up to the shape required, forming
either hollow, Kirby, or Dublin points. All the best hooks
are filed by hand, and are given either three or four
knife-like cutting edges, which causes the hook to have a
particularly good penetrating power to enter the fish's jaw,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 125

more so than the needle-pointed hook, which is not so
costly. The fourth process is turning the hook to give it
the particular bend required. Fifth, the shank is shaped by
a hammer, or by the aid of an ingenious machine, to be
either ringed, flatted or sharp pointed ; the latter is the
usual shape for small trout or salmon flies to be tied to gut.
The hook up to the next and sixth process has been in a
soft condition, and must now be hardened. This is one of
the most particular parts of the manufacture, as the hook
must be carefully watched during this process lest it become
too hard or not hard enough. The wires are heated in a
furnace until they attain a certain appearance, which the
skilled workman notices with accuracy. They are with-
drawn and plunged into oil ; this converts the hitherto soft
hook into a highly brittle condition. The heat required for
each style and size of hook is varied. The next and seventh
process is equally as particular as the last ; that is the
tempering, and the angler knows — to his cost sometimes —
the difference between a hook perfectly tempered and one
not. If the hook is not right, it will either draw out when
playing a fish until it is as straight as it was when first cut
with the shears, or will break off above the barb, and in
both cases the fish is lost. The tempering is done by with-
drawing the brittle hooks from the oil, heating them in a
pan over a charcoal fire, having them mixed up with heated
emery sand, and this mixture of hooks and sand kept in
constant motion. Every now and then a hook is picked
out, and the temper gauged according to the experienced
knowledge of the skilled operative. Then the eighth
process is scouring, by placing the hooks in barrels, with
water, and keeping these barrels in motion for several days
by steam power until all scale which may have been on

126 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

them is removed. The ninth process is polishing, and may
be performed in two ways. The hooks are placed in a bag
containing fine emery powder, and shaken until they
become bright. The other way is to place them in barrels
having an inclination of forty-five degrees from the per-
pendicular, and revolving more or less round on their own
basis, it having been found that this inclination of the
barrels is more effective in gaining the desired end in view
than it they were either upright or horizontal. The tenth
process is colouring, either by japanning, blueing, or
browning ; and the last, and eleventh, is the counting,
papering, and packing in hundreds and thousands. The
girls and boys who do the counting take up the hooks with
a knife, and, balancing them on its edge, turn over their
hundreds with incredible speed. The packages are labelled,
well dried to prevent rust, and sent off to the various
markets. It is essential that the angler should see that his
hooks are Ai, for on the perfect condition of this little mite
of tempered wire depends the success of the sport. There
is a great improvement in the appearance of the hooks of
the present day from that of our forefathers. There used
to be as much metal in one of them as there now is in three,
and lightness with strength is the thing required. The num-
bers noted all through the " Lexicon " refer to the Kendal
scale.

Horse HaiP.— {Vide " Casting Line.")

Imperceptible Spinner. — This is made in several
sizes for trout, sea trout, salmon, and pike. It is composed
of a piece of flat soft copper, leaded at the head. The
blade is put down the mouth of the dead bait, and the hook
attached to the sides. The bait can be bent to any degree,
causing it to spin admirably.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

I27

THE IMPERCEPTIBLE SPINNER.

IndiaPUbbeP Bag's are used instead of baskets for
carrying the fish when caught. They aie not expensive,
and will last many seasons, care being taken, as with the
stockings, to turn them inside out, wash the fish scales, &c.
off them, and dry in the air. The best sort is found to be
white indiarubber inside and Angola or twill outside. They
clean easily. (See "Bags.")

Indiarubber Long Boots are used by many
anglers for fishing and wading purposes. They are per-
fectly waterproof, and can be waded in all day without any
damp penetrating. They are exhausting to wear, as they
sweat the legs and make the feet soft and tender. They
should only be worn at the river side, as they are too heavy
to wear going or returning from fishing if the angler has
any distance to walk. It is better to have the soles made
of leather, studded with nails, as indiarubber ones want

128

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

firmness and will not give the angler a good command over
his footing when wading over slippery stones. Indiarubber
boots should always be wiped out dry after use, and not

LONG FISHING BOOT.

permitted to go near a fire. A great improvement in these
boots has recently been made by the introduction of felt
soles and linings, which materially assist in absorbing the
perspiration.

Indiarubber Shoes.—

These are intended to be worn
over the fishing stockings or
trousers. They never require
oiling, and are light and com-

INDIARUBBER SHOE. fortable.

Jack, a name very often given to the pike. It is
usually understood that it applies more to the smaller-sized
of these fish, say up to five or six pounds ; afterwards,
when the fish attains a greater weight, it is usually called
pike. This term is quite unused in Ireland.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. I2g

Jag or Jagging".— To jag a fish is to touch him with
the hook when striking, without being able to retain him ;
this very often occurs owing to striking too late, and the
fish, feeling that he has made a mistake, instantly blows
the fly or lure from his mouth and escapes. Brown trout,
as a rule, fight shy of a fly after being jagged ; but white
trout and salmon will come again almost instantly, and are
sometimes hooked the second time.

Japanese Rods. — These are imported from Japan.
They are principally in demand by the juvenile angler, and
hardly worthy of an extended notice.

Joints connect the several pieces of the rod to make
it into a full length for use. With one exception they
are made of brass, and may be either bronzed, painted,
gilt, or silvered ; the bronzed colour is the best, and
keeps good a very long time. There have been many
styles brought out from time to time ; like everything else,
some good, but more bad. The screw joint was about the
first made, and had its day. It has a male screw on one
piece and a female screw on the other, encased by ferrules ;
the screw soon loosens by the action of the rod, wears
the thread, and the whole affair wants firmness. Then
comes the tongued or taper joint, which is the most
universally used now. The ferrule and counter fit each
other accurately, and on the counter part of the rod is
shaped a tongue of the wood slightly tapered, which fits into
a socket on the ferrule portion of the rod, so that when these
two joints are pushed home they are really double joints —
first the counter and ferrule, then the tongue and socket.
In all good rods this tongue is covered with brass, and then
the joint is called double brazed (q.v.). This is a very secure.
joint, and may be made more so by having small bent

130

" catches " or wires attached to each joint about two inches
off each other and opposite; these "catches" are lashed
together by a few turns of a stout thread, and prevent any
possibility of the joints withdrawing when casting. This
joint has been made with a fish screw at the end of the
tongue, which by a turn fits into a receptacle made for it; it
is not much of an improvement, and adds somewhat to the
weight. Another taper or tongued joint, called the lock
joint, is now coming into use ; it has a bayonet catch, which
by a turn grips fast and does away with the " catches " and
lashing by thread ; it is a sensible joint. There is a flexible
joint, which is also made of brass, and the ferrule is cut
spirally, so that, when in its place, the maker claims for it
that it allows the portion of the rod under the brass to spring
equally with the rest of it. There is a small socket in centre
of wood, and a pin to correspond on the counter side ; this
serves as the tongue. It is also fastened by a gib,
wrhich grips on a small rim brazed on the end of the ferrule
and does away with lashing. There are several other ferrule
joints, but those mentioned are the principal ones. Lastly
comes the oldest of all, which still has its ardent admirers,
namely, the spliced waxed joint. Each piece of the rod
is made with a taper splice seven or eight inches long,
accurately fitted to ,each other, and lapped together by
a well-waxed cord or silk braid in open coils, which
allows the rod to play almost as well as if it was
thorough from butt to top. It is a little troublesome to
make, and there is a danger of the fine splices getting
broken or damaged. A spliced joint is very often used
as a top joint of a salmon rod, as it stands a good bend
and seldom breaks. All the brass joints can be had from
the tackle makers, and are in standard sizes, generally

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON 131

measured by sixteenths of an inch — from four-sixteenths
up to twelve-sixteenths.

Kelt is the name given to a salmon which has spawned,
and still remains in the fresh water. It is considered to be
a foul fish, and anglers, when they get hold of one in the
course of their fishing, should return it to the water on
the chance of it going down to the sea to renovate its
shattered constitution. A kelt remaining over a season in
a river does a good deal of harm by devouring the young
fry, and many anglers would think that they were doing
good service by capturing and killing them ; but the law
as it now stands prevents them doing so.

Kipper, The, is the name employed to describe the
male salmon, during the spawning season, when he is
about to shed his vivifying milt, "kip" being the term for
the cartilaginous hook of the under jaw, becoming very
prominent at this season, and which formerly he was
supposed to use in furrowing up the spawning bed. This
idea is now exploded, as it has been found by careful
■observation, that the snOut is not used at all, but that the
tail alone is employed for this purpose. The term "kip-
pered" is applied to dried and smoked fish.

Knives.— One of the most generally useful of these
articles is the " Multum in Parvo," containing tweezers,
pricker, corkscrew, &c, as well as two good blades. The
handle is better electro-plated ; this saves it from rusting.
It should have a ring at one end, by which it can be attached
to a cord or chain, fastened to a button, as loose knives
very often get left on a river's bank. Another useful
knife is the sailor's spring one, which can be carried
by a leather belt worn round the waist; this comes in
handy to assist at lunch time, to cut down small branches

132 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

or brambles that may be in the way, and to make a splice
on a broken rod. Knives are also made with disgorger
blades set in, and others with scissors to fold up.

Knots. — There are several which the angler will find
useful, and which he ought to learn to make, so that at any
time he can do them neatly and quickly. For joining or
making up a gut or hair casting line, there are four knots :
The first one is the single water knot, and this is made by

SINGLE WATER KNOT.

laying the two ends together and past each other about three
inches ; give these a turn over the right fore-finger and form
a loop ; slip this off, and pass the two ends to the left
through the loop and draw tight, cutting off the short end
close up to the knot, or leaving about three-eighths of it to
lap with silk if it is thought right. This is a quick knot,

DOUBLE WATER KNOT.

and generally used to mend a broken cast when on the
bank of a river. It is pretty secure, and not apt to draw.
By passing the ends twice through the loop, the double
water knot is formed. It is clumsy, but very strong. The
single fisherman's knot is formed by laying two strands
of the gut together about four inches prst each other; take

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 133

one end, pass it over the other link of gut and form a loop,
then pass the opposite end through the loop, and, humouring
this up as close as possible to the bare end to be safe
without losing or wasting any of the gut, draw tight ;

SINGLE FISHERMAN'S KNOT.

reverse the hands and do the same with other end, when by
pulling on the longer lengths of gut the two knots will draw
close to each other and bed themselves neatly together;
the bare ends may now be snipped off or three-eighths of an
inch of them left to be lashed with waxed silk ; this is not
otherwise a secure knot, being apt to draw. A better knot
is the double fisherman's, which is both neat and secure.

DOUBLE FISHERMAN S KNOT.

It is the same style as the single, only in place of putting
the ends once round the links of gut they are put twice,
forming two loops ; the first loop is gripped by the finger
and thumb of left hand, the next passed round and caught
same way ; the bare end of gut is now passed underneath
and pointed upwards, and the knot tightened ; the gut is
now reversed, and the same process gone over at other end ;
when these are finished, both knots are pulled together and

134 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

jammed neatly, fitting into each other so that they represent
a series of small rings. There is another way of making
this knot, but it could not be described clearly; it is called
the smooth knot. Before closing up these knots, if dropper
flies are wanted to be attached they can be inserted in their
places now between the knots. There is a jam knot for
attaching eyed hooks to the casting line. Push one end of
gut through the eye towards the bend of the hook ; bring it
back and make with it a slip knot round the line; don't

JAM KNOT.

draw this slip knot tight, leave it so open that it will pass
over the eye of the hook, which is done by pulling on the
main line ; it then tightens, and the knot is complete.
A double slip knot for salmon fly attaching is formed by
making a long loop on the well-soaked link of gut ; pa^s
this through the eye of the fly hook towards the bend,
drawing all the loop through until its knot presses up
against the eye ; now spread the loop upwards and over the
fly, and keep the whole of the loop well to the front so as to
clear hackles, wings, &c. ; take the knot of the loop, which
should be a slip knot, between the nails of the forefinger
and thumb of left hand, holding it tightly in its position
against and in the eye of the hook, whilst with the right
hand, and, humouring the gut in the process, the main line
is gradually drawn tight, thus taking in the "slack " of the
loop ; cut off the bare end of gut, and all is complete.
Before making any knots on gut, be sure and have the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 135

latter well softened or the knot will crack and become
unsafe ; most essential.

Ladders are a series of artificial steps inserted in
weirs, walls, or other obstructions which are placed across
a falmon river. They are formed by dividing off a portion
of this obstruction and intersecting it with transverse steps,
either wood or stone, about two-thirds of its width, so as to
cause the runs of water to become miniature falls. Into
these partitions or steps the salmon find their way, where
they can rest, and readily work their upward passage to
the higher level of water.

LaiP is the favourite spot of some monster trout,
usually the sole inhabitant, and who succeeds in capturing
all the insect food which may cross his kingdom, and is
generally able to defy all the allurements which the angler
may put before him. In nearly all streams and rivers these
lairs are to be found, and can be pointed out by a native.
They are always well situated so as to be a receptacle for
food for the fish, such as the bend of a river or an eddying
back stream, under sunken roots, &c.

Lake Fishing" is mostly practised from a boat, with a
man at the oars well up to his work. A good broad boat is
almost essential for comfort, and although it may tax the
powers of the rower a little more than a narrow one, yet the
advantages it affords as well as the safety, will fully com-
pensate for this drawback. Two anglers can fish from a
boat perfectly well, one at the bow and the other at the stern ;
they should work to one another's hand as much as possible,
and watch their casting so as not to get the lines en-
tangled, which occasionally occurs, creating some trouble
to unloose, besides the loss of temper. In fishing a lake
fringed with weeds or flags, the best lie for the boat is about

136 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

twenty teet off these, and it should be quietly rowed with
the wind, when the angler, casting in to the edge of the
weeds, is almost sure to make a good basket if there are
trout in quantity in the water. Trout don't seem to heed a
boat at all, and frequently may be seen rising within a foot
of it. The pleasantest style of lake fishing is with the
single-handed rod, which gives a good command of the
fish when being brought up to the net, and is not nearly
so tiresome as working with the doubled-handed rod.
When trolling for the great lake trout, the rod must
be almost as powerful as a salmon rod, and should be
at least sixteen feet long. When spinning in a lake for
trout, salmon, or pike, there are generally two and some-
times three rods extended over the stern, having the
lines out at different distances from the boat, wrhich is
generally rowed in a zig-zag way across the water ; this
helps to spread the flies or the minnows or spoons attached
to the end of the lines, and covers more water. When a fish
takes the bait of one of the rods the lines of the other rods
are immediately reeled up to prevent a foul occurring, and
if the fish is hooked not far from the shore it is best to land
at once and kill it from there. If trout are rising freely,
good sport may be had by daping with the natural fly from
the boat; hooking a fish is almost a certainty if the fly is
nicely floated over where it is showing. Morning or evening
is the best time for lake fishing, as the fish seem to rest in
the middle of the day, especially if it is warm and calm
weather. On some lakes, especially Irish ones, fishing is
only to be had at the spring of the year, and that is when
the green drake or Irish May fly is on the water. The sport
then is exceptionally good, both on account of the numbers
captured, and of the large size. During the rest of the year

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 137

the fish as a rule feed under the water, only occasionally
coming to the top to suck in a fly. These lakes abound
with shell fish and molluscs of minute size, which serve as
food for the trout. In many of the Scotch Highland lochs
good sport is obtained all the year round. The fish are not
large, but they are plentiful, and easily caught. When fly
fishing in a lake, do not draw the flies against the wind; but,
on the contrary, let the wind, in lieu of a stream, take the flies
before it. Sinking the fly in a bad-rising lake is sometimes
useful, and by putting a small shot at the head of the fly it
will go down easily, and should then be lifted with short
jerks. When a good curl is on the water, there is a fair
chance of hooking a large trout with a fly. The fly in this
case may be a bright one, and tied on a No. 4 or 5 hook.
A Berthon boat, being easily transported overland, gives
many a good day on a mountain lake which without this
means of locomotion would be a ten-a incognita to many an
angler. It takes one to manage the boat and land the fish,
while the other lies on his side and angles. Changing
places in these boats is a ticklish job, and requires some
care to prevent an upset.

Lake TPOUt Flies are from two to four sizes larger
than the ordinary river trout flies, and are generally bright
coloured. The bodies are composed of red, orange, yellow,
blue, brown, black, green, mauve, and crimson wools, mo-
hair, or seal's fur, and generally tinselled. Wings: Grouse,
woodcock, teal, mallard, white tip, pheasant, bloe, &c.
Legs : Black, blue, red, and Coch-y-bondu cock's hackles.
Tails : Golden pheasant topping. The condition of the
water and the amount of wind prevailing regulate to a great
•extent the colour of the fly. As a rule trout, if they are in
& taking humour in a lake, are not very particular as to the

138 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

flies; but to cater accurately for them'is the better plan.
Not too strong gut and neat flies should be the rule. The
following will be found an excellent range of lake flies : —

LAKE TROUT FLIES.

Teal wings ; bodies red, yellow, green, and black ; ribbed
silver tinsel. Bloe wings; bodies red, yellow, green,
and black ; ribbed with silver tinsel. Woodcock wings ;
bodies red, yellow, and green ; ribbed with silver tinsel.
Mallard wing, body claret, ribbed with silver. White tip
wings ; bodies red, yellow, green, and black ; ribbed silver
tinsel. Dark grouse wing, body claret, ribbed silver tinsel.
Woodcock wing, hare lug body, ribbed silver tinsel. The
Zulu, which is made like a palmer, black hackle, black
body, ribbed silver tinsel, with red wool tag for taiL
Pheasant wing, green body, gold tinsel, and grey hackle
for legs. There are many other good patterns, such as the
professor, heather moth, green mantle, soldier palmer,
and Francis fly; in fact, lake flies are legion.

Laneewood, occasionally employed by some rod
makers, but not so much in demand now as greenheart. It
is strong and elastic, generally obtained from the trunk of
the tree, which is rarely more than nine inches in diameter,
and grows straight. It is imported from the West Indies,
but chiefly from Jamaica

Landing Fish. — This seems a very simple job, yet
there is some knack required to do it in a proper manner,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 139*

and many a fish has been lost by the bungling of the man
who was working either the landing net or gaff. Whether
the. angler lands his own fish or not, there is a certain rule
to be observed. If an assistant is landing, he should do
exactly as he is told by the angler, and if he fails to bring
the fish to land, why, the fault cannot be laid to his charge
provided he has carried out the directions of the man who
holds the rod an'd is playing the fish. If the fish is to be
landed by a net, the time to put it in the water is denoted by
the play of the fish, whether trout or salmon, and that is,.
when it rolls on its side or sails in quietly with its mouth
above water. The net should be sunk well under the sur-
face previous to the fish coming within reach, and be held
there quite steady with the side of the hoop of the net
furthest away from the fish in a slightly raised position, ?o
that when the fish is sailed in over the lower side of the net
the upper side serves as a stop, when all is lifted imme-
diately with a steady motion, upward and towards the
lander. Never mvve the net to meet the fish; doing so is
apt to frighten it, as, when seemingly unable to make
further exertion, it suddenly darts off with renewed energy,
very often over the net, which gets foul of the casting line,,
and a smash occurs. If the fish refuses to enter the net and
passes either over or by it, do not shove at it; allow it to go
by quietly, to be again sailed in, when it may be safely
landed. The net handle should be long enough to permit
the angler to extend the net out clear of the edge and in
good water. In landing a fish by a gaff (of course it is a big
one, and an assistant is usually at hand to do this job for
the angler, although he can do it himself quite well if he has
had any practice), it should be stretched out behind the
line which is holding the fish, and brought home into the

140 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

shoulder, or as near the gills as possible, with a steady,
•even drag; and when once the point is in, the handle
should be raised to a perpendicular position, so that the fish
hangs on the gaff. Don't strike at the fish as if you wanted
to hit it a blow. Keep a look-out for the casting line, for if
it is struck by the gaff, good-bye to the fish. Some gaffers
use the implement by holding it underneath the body, and
drawing it in this position ; this is a bad style, as the body
of the fish is apt to hit the shank of the gaff and rebound
off. It takes a little practice before the landing of a fish, if
a large one, can be done satisfactorily — one of the objects
being to mutilate the fish as little as possible. Above all,
keep cool and don't get nervous.
Landing' Handles.— (See " Handle.")
Landing1 Net is used to land the fish after it has
been hooked and played. An angler should invariably
have one with him whenever he goes to fish, except when
he is salmon fishing and prefers to use a gaff (q v.). There
are several varieties of nets, some made from linen cord,
others from cotton, and some from silk. The last is ex-
pensive, and won't stand the hard usage that nets some-
times get. Linen cord makes a strong net, but it is hard in
texture, and does not hang so nicely on the hoop as a
cotton one, nor does it hold the knots so well. Those made
from evenly-twisted cotton leasing are all that can be
desired. The best shape to have the net is somewhat like
a sack, pretty broad at the bottom, and not tapered like
an onion bag ; permitting the fish, if a large one, to get
well down in the bottom, so there is no danger of it
throwing itself out in its dying struggles. Some anglers
prefer a long, deep net. The objection to this shape is
that when a fish is netted it draws the whole set of flies

LANDING NETS.

142 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

among the meshes, and the hooks often get fixed, which con-
sumes valuable time before the cast is again free. The mesh
for a trout net should be about half an inch, and the width
at top, to suit hoop, twelve or thirteen inches in diameter.
This will take about seventy-six meshes, to correspond with
seventy-six holes bored through the hoop ; and the depth of
net should be at least twelve inches. A salmon net should
be three-quarter inch mesh, and from twenty inches to two
feet wide at top ; the wider it is the better. All nets should
be wThat is called " barked/' that is, steeped in a hot

LANDING NET.

solution of catechu or cutch for a few hours. This serves to
tan the cord and render it waterproof to a certain extent,
also prevents it suffering from wet and weather, and gives
it a good brown colour, which is not so liable to be seen by
the fish when it is being used. They can also be oiled or
varnished, but in this case the nets are stiff and unyielding.
The nets may be fastened on ash hoops, rigid, and made to
screw into the landing handle ; or they may be fastened to
either steel collapsible or galvanised iron folding hoops,
which are handy for carrying; or, better still, on whalebone
hoops, which are very complete both for handiness and
strength, but are a little expensive. Iron hoops are not
satisfactory, as they rust and eat through the net, and

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 143

brass hoops are weighty. There is a good class of net
made from black cable cord ; this material is hard in
texture, and not so liable to get caught by the hooks as
the soft unprepared cotton or linen nets.

Landing" Rings.— {See " Landing Net")
Laws, Fishery.— There are a few which bear upon
rod fishing. In England, Scotland, and Wales no license
is required by the angler for using rod and line. In Ireland
a license must be obtained to angle with rod and line
for salmon, grilse, or peel, and for white trout. These
<:ost twenty shillings each, and can be obtained from most
tackle makers. They are not transferable, but if taken out
in one district can be used without let or hindrance in any
other. These licenses must be produced on demand to any
commissioner, conservator, inspector, officers or men of the
navy, coastguards, constabulary, or water bailiffs, under a
penalty of not less than double or more than treble the
amount of license duty. Also, cross lines in rivers can only
be used by the owner or owners of a several fishery, or any
person authorised by him or them in writing, and is liable
to be charged license duty. Prohibited modes of taking
fish is similar in the three countries : — First : Not with
dynamite, snatch tackle, jack wire, or snare light, spear,
gaff, or strokehall, nor with salmon roe, nor place lime
or other poisonous or noxious material, substance, or
liquid which would destroy the fish. A public fishery exists
wherever the public have the right of fishing. As a rule,
all ancient navigable rivers in which the tide ebbs and
flows are public, provided the right of fishing has not been
given to an individual or individuals by ancient statute. If
the river is made navigable by Act of Parliament, the
public cannot fish in it above the ebb and flow of the tide

H4

The public have no right to fish from a bridge, road, or
towing path ; nor even if they have a right to fish in a river,
they have not the right to go on or use the banks for fishing
without the owner's permission, and he can withdraw that
at any time. An angler has no right to fish from or on the
Queen's share or gap. In streams not navigable the
general rule is that each riparian owner — i.e., the owner of
the lands on the banks of the stream — has a right to fish up
to the middle line of the stream ; if he owns both sides,
then he has exclusive right to the whole fishing of the
stream so far as his lands extend. The principal law that
the angler has to observe is that of trespass. He has no
right anywhere to go on lands to fish a stream without
permission from the owners of the lands. Many streams,
by usage, are free to all anglers, and no hindrance is
offered to using the banks. It is always well for the angler
to ascertain if this is the case or not before attempting to fish
a stream. There are special statutes affecting many of the
noted rivers, such as the Sol way, Tweed, Thames, &c, &c.r
but they do not interfere with the general law. The
weekly close season (q.v.) is between six of the clock
on Saturday morning and six of the clock on the Monday
morning following. The annual close season (q.v.) for
angling with single rod and line, and this for salmon
and trout, was fixed to be uniform over Ireland, to be
from the first day of November to the first day of February,
in each fishery, and should not comprise fewer than ninety
days. The season for nets was originally uniform, but
power was given to alter, and it varies in different districts;
but it must comprise not fewer than one hundred and
sixty-eight days. The close season for trout is the same
as for salmon. A free or Queen's gap must exist in all

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 145

fishery weirs placed across a salmon river, which shall be
one-tenth of the width of the stream, and at no time less
than three feet wide. There is an exception to this, in case
of any fishery weir held by charter in a river where the
breadth does not exceed forty feet, and in such the weekly
close season shall be extended twenty-four hours. No
person can obstruct this free pass by any means, nor can
it be fished from with rod and line or any other engine.

Leads constitute all descriptions of sinkers used on
various tackles and traces, such as jr,ck leads, ledger leads,
paternoster leads, drilled and split shot, &c.

Leap is that portion of a salmon river where an obstruc-
tion occurs, either naturally or artificially, and as there
often is a space of five to six feet over which the salmon
have to jump, it is usually called "the leap."

Ledger Line or Tackle is principally used for
barbel fishing, and may be described as follows: — A lead
bullet is drilled through the centre ; through this a strong-
gut line is passed, to the end of which the hook is attached.
About twenty inches above the hook a shot or small lead is
fastened to prevent the bullet getting any closer to the hook.
The hook is baited with a worm or gentles and thrown into
the water where the fish have been coaxed by ground
bailing to assemble. The bullet rests on the bottom, and
the gut lies along invisible ; the line is kept taut, but
without lifting the bullet. The moment a fish bites, the
angler will have notice, when he may strike, or he may
allow the jigging motion of the line to go on for a little
before he strikes, as the barbel are apt to nibble without
wholly taking the bait. The angler, when he does strike,
must do it pretty heavily, as he has the bullet to lift as

J

146 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

well. A short, stout rod and a line of forty yards may be
used for ledgering.

Leg'ging'S are very useful to protect the legs of the
angler from tears and scratches when walking through
briars, furze, &c, which very often fringe the banks of
mountain streams. In Scotland, where adders occasionally
lurk about the banks of rivers, these leggings are essential
to prevent injury from their bites. The best material is
tanned canvas, as it is porous and not so apt to sweat the
legs as those made of leather. It is also very strong, and
will not tear easily. They fit nicely over knicker stockings.

Line DpieP. — This is a most useful article, made so as
to screw on a table ; it is a skeleton drum of wood, with
a handle, and used for winding off a wet line from the
rod reel, that it may get thoroughly dried before putting
away. (See " Lines.")

Lines. — By these are meant the main lines which are
wound upon the reel attached to butt of fishing rod, and
carried through the rings and fastened to the casting line.
They form an important part of the fishing gear, and some
judgment is required in choosing them, so that they may
suit the rod to which they are attached, especially in weight,
as a heavy rod with a light line, and vice versa, is a mistake.
Lines may be composed of various materials, viz., of horse
hair, twisted ; of silk and horse hair, mixed ; of fine silk,
twisted or braided, and finished with waterproof varnish or
enamel; of cotton, hemp, and flax. The two latter fibres are
only used for coarse fishing lines, and for night or set lines.
Cotton makes very good lines if well coated with waterproof
varnish ; without this they cling to the rod when wet.
Hair alone is now seldom to be met with ; although strong,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 147

elastic, and light, it is uneven and rough in make, and
does not run nicely through the rings. A great improvement
on this line is having it mixed with silk, forming the silk and
hair line. This is still a favourite with many anglers, and
has had a long run as the principal reel line for all purposes
of fishing, especially as a trout line. It alights very nicely
on the water, is elastic, has a good natural spring with it,
and floats well. It requires to be carefully dried after use,
and will, if attended to in this respect, last many seasons.
To dry a line properly, the portion that has been in contact
with the water should be loosely wound off the reel and
allowed to lie on a table or dry floor in loose coils ; or it
may be passed round the backs of two chairs, or stretched
across a room, so that the air may get freely at it for a night
at least, when it should be re-wound on the reel again.
A properly-constructed line drier (q.v.) can be procured
from any good tackle maker. Silk lines, either twisted,
plaited, or braided, are now much used, and supersede all
other lines for fine fishing. They are dressed with water-
proof varnish or coating, which gives them an even and
smooth surface, so that they handle well and run easily
through the rings. The varnish should be perfectly hard
and dry before using, and care should be taken that it is
good, as some bad varnishes have a tendency to rot the
silk ; others wear off after being a few times in the water.
However, most tackle makers give a guarantee with their
lines, and it is as well for the angler to have this when
purchasing. The braided lines are now brought to great
perfection, and as they can be tapered better than the
other sorts they will probably take the lead. Silk lines cast
well against the wind, and if got straight out on the water
are quicker to strike with than any of the others. These

148 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

lines need also to be well dried after using, and will
be all the better for an occasional rub with deer's fat, or,
as some use, the rind of a piece of bacon, or vaseline.
Lines can be got either taper or level. Some prefer one and
some the other. The double taper lines cast very neatly,
and as these are tapered at each end, they can be reversed
on the reel, so that when one end gets worn a fresh
portion can be brought into active use. The usual length
of a trout or grayling line is twenty to forty yards, and that
of a salmon line seventy to one hundred and twenty yards ;
some like one hundred and fifty yards, and it is well to have
plenty, although this requires a large reel and adds weight
to the rod. In Norway and Canada, salmon have taken out
upwards of one hundred yards of line at the first rush.
Always be sure to fasten the line on the barrel of the reel.
There is another line called the blow line, which is made of
floss silk, not twisted. This is used solely for natural fly
fishing, and is not cast in the ordinary way, but allowed to
be carried by a gentle wind or breath of air, which, with a
little manipulation of the rod, it does beautifully, alighting
the natural fly like a snowflake on the spot where the rising
fish is making its circular rings on the surface of the water.
This practice is principally carried on from boats. (See
"Daping.") Lines, when not in use, should be kept in a
moderately dry place, lest mildew attacks them, and they
should be carefully examined, before the season opens, and
tested for strength.

Liquid Wax is made by dissolving a small portion of
ordinary shoemaker's or cobbler's wax in some methylated
spirits of wine. Keep in a well-stoppered bottle, and use
with a fine camel's hair brush. It is useful to put on very
fine silk when dressing a small dark-coloured fly ; also for

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 149

touching up the silk lapping of casting lines or any other
tyings that may get frayed or loose.

Live Bait Fishing is practised principally for pike.
A dace or gudgeon is attached to a live bait tackle (q.v.)t
thrown into the water, and allowed to swim about. It is
considered rather a cruel method, and has been condemned
by the late F. Francis and other authorities.

Loach (Cobitis barbatula) . — This little fish is found in
the brooks of Britain, and is used as a bait for the larger
fishes ; it is perhaps the best fish bait for eels. It has six
barbs or tufts springing from its upper and lower jaws. It
seldom attains a length of more than four inches, feeds on
the bottom, and is sometimes called a groundling. Can be
taken with a small red worm.

Loeh Leven Trout.— This
game and beautiful fish is con-
sidered by some to be a separate
species and by others only a
variety ; however, be what it may,
loch leven fltes. ft gjves sport to hundreds of

anglers and clubs that fish Loch Leven yearly. The best
flies are the ordinary loch flies of Scotland, but much
smaller in size — Teal, woodcock, bloe, white tip, and
mallard wings, with red, yellow, green, claret, and black
bodies, tinselled ; also Zulus, Sam Slicks, March browns,
&c. Large numbers are also caught by trolling with
artificial minnows.

Loch Tay Rods are used for trolling for salmon on
this celebrated Scotch loch. They are generally made
thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, and sixteen feet long, strongly
built, with upright rings.

150 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Marine Glue is used by some fly dressers instead of
wax for their tying silk. It is dark in colour, and conse-
quently would not suit to dress a light-coloured fly with.
It is made as follows : — Dissolve by heat one part of pure
indiarubber in naphtha; when melted add two parts of
shellac ; heat until mixed ; pour when hot on a metal plate
to cool ; when required for use, melt and apply with a
brush. Another kind is made by dissolving twenty grains
caoutchouc in two fluid ounces of chloroform ; then add
four drachms powdered mastic ; let macerate for a week ;
must be kept cool and well corked. The first sort is the
more common and useful.

May Fly, The.— Two well-known flies come under
his designation, and as there is some confusion among
anglers in speaking of the May fly, a little explanation will
not be out of place. The green drake is the fly always
called the May fly in England, except in counties north of
the Humber, and in Ireland it is known as the Irish May
fly. The phrase "the fly is up" refers solely to the green
drake, wThich is to be found on almost every river south of
the Humber. It sometimes appears during the last week
in May, but more commonly not until the first week in
June. An extended notice of this fly appears under the
heading " Green Drake." The stone fly is also called the
May fly north of the Humber and in Scotland, but is un-
known to the midland and southern fishermen, though it is
occasionally seen in Devonshire. The females of this
species are the largest flies taken by the trout. Their
period of existence is from two to three weeks. They are
produced from the larvae of the creeper {q.v.), and bred
at the bottom of rivers near the edges of gravelly streams.
The creepers leave the water about the middle of May,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 151

crawl under stones close to the edges, and merge into
perfect flies. Although having wings they rarely use them,
but trust more to their legs and run quickly among the
stones, or across the streams and pools, where they are

MALE STONE FLY. FEMALE STONE FLY.

seized by the trout, generally on the look-out for them.
They can be used for daping, but by far the best way is to
fish them up-stream on a special tackle of two hooks, same
as used for the creeper but not shotted. Trout will either
take them on the surface or submerged. The female, which
is the largest and most attractive, is considered the best;
but when well on the feed the male fly is also acceptable.
Bright, hot days, when the rivers are low and clear, also
warm, rainy days and when the waters are slightly dark and
full, are favourable for its use. Excellent advice for this
fishing and instructions maybe found in Stewart's " Prac-
tical Angler." The flies should be carried in a suitable
box. A capital one is here illustrated. It is made of
zinc, with a flat bottom, giving plenty of room. The top
slide is used when collecting the flies at the river side,
and the end slide when raised allows them to come out as
the angler requires. The box is fitted to strap round the
waist. The fly needs to be carefully put on the tackle, as
it is tender and will not bear to be jerked when casting;
it should not be drawn through the water, as this will

152

THE BRITISH ANGLER S LEXICON.

mutilate it and render it useless. Some anglers put two on
the hook, and some three. The beginning of June is the
best time for stone fly fishing, about a week after the flies

MAY FLY BOX.

have appeared. Should a small flood occur, the trout will
attack them greedily ; but a heavy flood will carry the flies
off, and put an end to this particular sport for the season.

Milt is the seminal fluid of the male fish, which is
ejected at the spawning season on to the eggs of the female
and enters the small opening of the eggs and fecundates
them. It is very essential that the milt is what is called
" ripe." This may be known by the tendency it has to
spurt out. It should neither be thin, watery, nor very
thick. Of course these features are only observed when the
impregnation is artificial, as when the natural spawning
takes place it is conclusive that both male and female fish
are in proper condition for carrying out the process.

Minnow {Leuctscus phoxinus) is a small fish of the
genus of roach, dace, &c , and to be found in most of the
clear gravelly streams of England. It swims in shoals, and
rarely exceeds three inches in length. Colour : A dusky
olive-green, sometimes blue on the back, shading into
white and sometimes a pinky wrhite on the belly. In

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 153

some localities it is of a pearly white, and this colour is
preferred when the fish is wanted for bait, forming as it does
a favourite one for salmon, trout, perch, and pike. The best
size for trout fishing is about one and three-quarters of an
inch long, and the largest that can be obtained is used for
salmon. They are captured either by a landing net or a
minnow trap (q.v.).

Minnow, The Natural.— Spinning with this is
much resorted to now in the early season for salmon, and
when first practised on a river is a deadly bait ; after
a time the fish get cautious, and approach it with diffidence.
The best minnows are got in the midland counties of
England, and they are also caught in quantity in the southern
rivers- of Scotland. For trout fishing a small neat well-
coloured minnow is preferred, which can be baited simply by
inserting a hook, attached to the gut, in the mouth of the
little fish, carrying it down to near the vent, where it may be
brought out and the barb exposed, giving the minnow a slight,
curve so as to cause it to spin freely ; another hook is
fastened above this one, and is inserted in the lip of the bait.
A swivel is attached to the line about two feet above the
hooks, and another close to where the casting line joins the
main line. One or two coarse shot may be attached, and
either inserted in the fish's mouth or they may be put further
up the line. Some anglers like to have a third hook, at-
tached to a separate length of gut and fixed to the casting
line where the lip hook joins. This is called the drag hook,,
and hangs behind the minnow from three to four inches. The
gut used for this flight should not be too coarse, but strong
and sound. The minnow is cast into a stream where it
begins to run under an overhanging bank, and the angler
spins it quietly across to his own side, when he lifts agaia

154 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

for another cast. In very clear water the minnow should be
worked without leads, so as to avoid splashing. During
the time of spinning the minnow, the angler should keep
very steady, not move from the spot he stands on lest he
be noticed by the trout, which comes out from the heavy
water and follows the bait right across to the shelving
side upon which the angler is standing. Should it not
be seized, and the angler sees the wave of the fish, wait
for half a minute or so, to allow it to return to its lair,
before making the next cast. When the trout takes the
minnow, lower the point of rod for a second and then
strike ; this allows the fish to get the bait well into its
mouth. When the wind ruffles a pool, there is a good
chance of capturing some of the trout that are in it by
working the minnow7 across it from the top to the bottom.
In fishing for salmon, the flight should be much larger,
and a good-sized minnow should be employed. The bait
should be threaded on to a good link of salmon gut, with
two triangles of hooks whipped on, one ending under the
vent and the other just at the end of the tail. A lip
hook is also attached, and a small oval of lead inserted
in the mouth or gullet of the bait. The weight of the
lead is varied according to the strength of the water.
The flight of hooks is attached to a strong single, double,
or twisted gut trace ; three swivels should be in the
trace, or even four. The rod ought to be fifteen or
sixteen feet long, and the best reel is a " Malloch,/M which
allowTs the line to be swept a good distance across the broad
river or stream — more down than across. The line is then
reeled in, bringing the bait across the current in a circular
manner until it reaches the near side, when the sweeping
•cast can be again made. This cast is not an overhand one,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 155

out an upward side sweep; and in practised hands it is
wonderful the length the bait can be thrown, even against
the wind — fifty yards or more. The fish generally attack
the minnow before it begins to be reeled in — at the length
•of the cast — and must be struck well at the moment of
feeling the fish. Minnows, when they cannot be obtained
fresh, may be pickled by putting them in a jar with a
layer of salt between the rows, pouring the brine off as
it accumulates. Pickled minnows are not as good bait as
fresh ones ; however, they are better than the artificial
ones, but they become very tender. When spinning the min-
now in flooded water, it can be worked almost any way —
letting it go down with the current and bringing it up with
short jerks, or it may be thrown up and brought down
quickly, or across and allowed to sweep round.

Minnow Traps are made by perforating a hole in
the bottom of a glass bottle, through which the fish enter.
The neck of the bottle is covered by a piece of fine muslin,
and some crumbs of bread are placed in the bottle. Turn
the neck of the bottle up-stream ; the fish enter by the
■orifice, and cannot find their way out again. Properly-
made traps can be procured from a fishing tackle maker.
Minnows may also be taken by the hoop net, or by
fastening a fine net to two sticks and attaching lead to the
lower part of it, and when this is pushed up to a corner
where there is a shoal, any number may be captured. A
few broken worms thrown in are useful to collect them.

Napoleon Boots are made of indiarubber, and can
be had either with rubber or leather soles. The latter are
decidedly the best. They are very handy when no deep
wading is required, or on the margins of rivers when the

56

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

grass is long and sometimes wet. They are easily slipped
on and off, and for shallow stream wading are invaluable.
They are also much used for shooting purposes.

NAPOLEON BOOT.

NON-ABSORBENT FISHING STOCKING.

Non - Absorbent Fishing* Stockings. - The

material of which these stockings are made is light and
soft, having no unvulcanised material in their construction.
They dry in a few minutes, and can be easily rolled up and
put in a large pocket or in the fishing creel.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 157

Norway. — Many tourists, nowadays, annually visit the
Land of the Vikings — some to gratify their taste for the
picturesque, which that delightful country of fjord, fos,
and fjeld affords ; others to avail themselves of the privilege
of " wetting a line" in its numberless lakes and rivers.
For the benefit of these latter, and especially for those
who for the first time cross the North Sea in search of
angling sport, the following hints may prove acceptable, not
only to assist them in rinding suitable fishing quarters, but
to point out the best means of reaching these; also informa-
tion as to charges for travelling by road, rail, and steamer,
language, currency of the country, best guide books,
together with a list of fishing rods, tackle, flies, &c, with
which they ought to provide themselves. Cost and best
means to reach Norway : — There are two recognised lines
of steamers plying between the United Kingdom and
Norway, entirely devoted to passenger traffic. One is the
Wilson line of steamers, sailing on different days from Hull
and landing passengers either at Stavanger or Bergen.
Single fares, including meals, are £4 ; return fares, £6.
This line also has steamers running to Christiansand and
Christiania. Single fares to these places are £4; return
fares, £6 ; victualling, six shillings and sixpence per day
extra. The other is the Halvorsen line. This firm has
two fine steamers. One is named the " Norge," which
carries seventy first class passengers, leaving Newcastle-on-
Tyne every Thursday evening at five o'clock. Single fares,
meals and steward's fee, £3 ; return fares, £5. The other
vessel is the new and now celebrated M Britannia." This
steamer is luxuriously fitted, and for comfort is without
doubt the finest afloat. It carries one hundred and fifty
first class passengers, and has a speed of sixteen knots an

158 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

hour. The state rooms are lofty, well ventilated, and
lighted by electricity, and the steamer is well provided with
baths, &c. This vessel sails from the Albert Edward:
Dock, Newcastle-on-Tyne, every Saturday evening at seven
o'clock. Single fares on this steamer are £4, including
meals and steward's fees, and return fares £6. Both the
"Norge" and "Britannia" call at Stavanger on their way
to and from Bergen. An agreement has been made with the
North-Eastern Railway Company to convey passengers free
of charge from the Central Station, Newcastle-on-Tyne, to
the Albert Edward Dock, the railway running alongside
the quay where the " Britannia" is moored. It returns
every Thursday, leaving Bergen at nine p.m., and calls
at Stavanger to pick up passengers. The "Norge" leaves
Bergen every Monday evening at nine, also calling at
Stavanger. Those who make their way to Stavanger
must bear in mind that it takes seven hours after the
steamer leaves Bergen before it reaches Stavanger. The
average passage in the " Britannia" from Newcastle-on-
Tyne to Stavanger is from twenty-three to twenty-four
hours. The "Norge" is not so quick ; her average passage
for the same distance is thirty to thirty- one hours. The
"Britannia" leaves on certain dates the port of Grantonr
Edinburgh, direct for Bergen, on Wednesdays ; but for
further information on this point the reader should apply to
Borries, Craig, & Co., Newcastle-on-Tyne, and be sure and
have berths booked well in advance to prevent disappoint-
ment. Luggage : — The tourist who has a fixed abode to go
to, and does not intend moving from place to place, may
take as much luggage as he considers necessary for his
comfort, as he can generally get it conveyed by steamer to
the nearest point, and thence by road to his fishing

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 159

[uarters ; but to the angler who wants to view the country
and explore the fishing in several localities — perhaps take
long journeys to distant lakes, out of the beaten track and
far away from the main roads — the question of luggage is a
very important one. If hampered with too much it will
sadly mar his pleasure, and in many cases prevent him
from making certain excursions, as it is hardly possible to
get a lot of luggage conveyed over mountains, particularly
in thinly-populated districts ; besides, the conveyance of it
would be very costly, and altogether prove to be a nuisance.
The advice tendered is to take as little as possible, and
only what can be carried in a handy valise. The angler
should travel in a warm suit of clothes, and have a change
in case of getting wet through. A spare flannel shirt, with
loose turned-down collar should be taken ; flannel is com-
fortable to fish in, either in cold or hot weather. A good
waterproof coat, to strap on the fishing bag or basket, so
that it can readily be got at in case of sudden rain, is also-
necessary. A light pair of shoes or strong slippers will
prove a comfort, to relieve the feet after a hard day's
fishing in heavy boots. A warm topcoat or ulster will
be found extremely serviceable in crossing the North Sea ;.
this, or any surplus clothing, can always be left in the
hotels or shipping offices, either at Stavanger or Bergen,
and come in very acceptable on the return journey. Fishing
Stockings and Brogues add much to the luggage, and are
practically unnecessary for trouting in Norway. For lake
fishing they are of no use at all, as this is generally practised
lrom boats, and the rivers are far too deep and rapid ta
make wading practicable. With a long rod the angler can
pretty well command as much water as he likes ; therefore,
these otherwise useful articles are better left at home. Rods

l6o THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

-and Tackle: — A fly rod of eleven feet is the right length
for most of the rivers, and a fourteen feet double-handed rod
is also recommended for lakes and rivers where the one-
rianded rod is too short; besides, this rod may be employed
for sea trout and an occasional salmon, should the angler
fall in with any. Another one is also indispensable, and that
is a short trolling rod from ten to eleven feet; this comes in
for trolling in the fjords, near the mouths of rivers, when
sea trout and salmon are ascending, and also on lakes
for large trout, some of which run up to eight pounds.
A spare top to each rod is necessary. The best plan to
carry these rods is to have a light common deal box
made, with two straps and buckles, and fitted with a lock.
The whole will not weigh much, is easily strapped to
the shaft of a carriole or stolkjaerre, and prevents any
breakage, which otherwise might occur. Some strong black
thread and shoemaker's wax, in case of accidents, should
not be omitted. Landing Net and Gaff : — The best is a
good-sized collapsing or folding landing net, with shaft of
ash about five feet long, the net to screw into shaft. A gaff
Tiook made to take the same shaft will come in handy for
sea trout. These should also be packed in the box. Basket
or Fishing Bag: — As this is entirely a matter of choice,
either can be taken. A basket is very useful to carry odd
articles in, and weighs but little. Flies : — These do not
take up much room, so let the angler take plenty — all
sizes — for river and lake, some for sea trout, and a few of
the best patterns of salmon flies. For river trout, flies
dressed on No. 4 to 6 hooks are the best, viz., Coch-y-
bondu, GreenwelPs glory, heather moth, red palmer, Lee's
favourite, Alexandra fly, Zulu, March brown, mallard and
claret body, woodcock wing and red body, bloe wing and

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. l6l

red body, teal wing and red body, a large light dun fly
ribbed with silver tinsel, and Heckham Peckham. always
kill. These constitute a good useful range of flies, and
should be tied to undrawn gut, as Norwegian trout are not
so fastidious as those in England ; besides the rivers are
rough, running over sharp boulders, therefore drawn gut is
not suitable. For lake fishing have two or three sizes, viz.,
Zulu, Heckham Peckham, black and red body, red palmer,
woodcock wing and red body, bloe wing and red body,
bloe wing and blue body, heather moth, mallard and claret,
teal and red, and many other Scotch loch flies will kill
equally well in Norway. For salmon flies take Jock Scott,
Durham ranger, black doctor, Benchill, Childers, and silver
doctor. A good supply is needed of three yard casting
lines to suit river, lake, and sea trout ; also a few stronger
for salmon. Reels : — Two reels will do for the three rods.
One of them should be about twro and a-quarter or two and
a-half inches, with thirty or forty yards of No. 2 Canadian
line ; the other a small salmon or sea trout reel, to contain
no less than sixty or seventy yards of line, about No. 4
thickness. The latter can be used on the fourteen feet rod
or en the trolling rod, according to the fishing required; but
an extra reel sometimes comes in handy. Minnows and
Traces : — It is very important that a proper set of minnows
and traces should be provided, as in many of the lakes it is
necessary to troll ; by using the correct pattern some of
the largest trout ape captured, and in many of the fjords at
the mouths of rivers fine sea trout and salmon are often
taken by trolling, and excellent sport it is, the fish being in
the primest condition and affording the best of play. Blue
and brown phantoms stand first on the list, the former colour
generally killing well ; Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are the most

K

l62 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

useful sizes. The Devon minnows rank next; the best
sizes are two and a-half, two and three-quarters, and three
inches, blue backs and gold bellies. The bar spoon is most
deadly and also the pearl phantoms. Single, double, and
treble gut traces are necessary, each trace to have four
swivels and detachable leads. For river trolling, Nos, i
and 2 quill minnows will be found to kill in heavy waters,
and should be included in the outfit. Guide Books and
Maps : — There are many of these, all good in their way —
"Wilson's Guide to Norway," with maps, published by
E. Stanford, Charing Cross, London, price five shillings ;
"The Land of the Vikings," by Jurgenson, published by
Walter Scott, London, price three shillings and sixpence ;
but by far the best and most reliable is "Baedeker's
Norway and Sweden," which is generally to be depended
on. There are numbers of excellent maps of Norway; one
issued in two sheets, by F. Beyer, of Bergen, gives all the
principal roads, by-roads, railways, mountain paths, and
boat stations. A good map is even more useful than a
guide book. Language : — This need not trouble the visitor
much, as English is spoken more or less in every hotel and
station along the main roads ; besides, many of the drivers
and boatmen speak it, if not fluently, yet well enough to be
understood. It is only when the tourist gets right away
from the main roads, far up the mountains, that he may find
himself at a loss for the language. An excellent phrase
book is published by Bennett, giving in English and Norske
most of the common and familiar questions likely to be
required. If the tourist cannot pronounce the question in
Norwegian, he can at all events point it out and allow
the native to read it ; they are generally quick enough to
comprehend, and are always willing to oblige a stranger.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 163

Money : — Norwegian currency is soon understood. There
are only two kinds, krone and ore. One krone is equal to
one hundred ore. In bronze they have one ore, two ore,
five ore ; in silver, ten ore, twenty-five ore, fifty ore, one
krone piece, two kroner piece, four kroner piece ; in gold,
five kroner piece, ten kroner piece, twenty kroner piece.
Notes are issued for five, ten, fifty, one hundred, five
hundred, and one thousand kroner. One penny in English
money is worth seven and a-half ore, sixpence is worth
forty-five ore, one shilling is worth ninety ore, half-a-
sovereign is worth nine kroner, a sovereign is worth
eighteen kroner. F. Beyer, 2, Strangaden, Bergen, will
exchange English money into Norwegian free of cost ; but
a slight commission is charged for the re-exchange from
Norwegian into English. The tourist should have a lot of
small change for disbursements, required for boatmen,
drivers, &c. Travelling : — If the tourist lands at Bergen,
he will find steamers going daily to all parts of the
coast. The hours, however, vary ; but every information
will be given on applying to the landlord of the hotel or to
the shipping companies. There are regular fixed charges
for meals on these vessels. A breakfast costs about one
krone fifty ore ; dinner, two kroner forty ore ; supper, one
krone fifty ore. Wine and beer are extras. Man and wife,
father and son, or brother and sister, may travel for a fare
and a-half ; several members of one family are carried at a
fixed reduction. This does not apply to the ocean steamers,
only to the home mail boats. If the steamers do not run to
suit the visitor, he may, in many places, demand a boat,
with three men and six oars. A table giving the legal
boating charges is to be found in the guide books. This
mode of conveyance is a legal obligation imposed on the

164 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

peasants, and they are bound to provide the boat and men
to row it. The hotels in cities like Bergen have increased
their prices considerably during the last few years, and it
may be generally stated that it costs from eight to ten
kroner per day, in the large country hotels six to seven
kroner, and in smaller hotels three to five kroner. These
charges are exclusive of wine or beer. If anglers wish
to keep expenses down they must avoid making long
sojourns in the large cities. The tourist intending to stay
for many days at an hotel can always get a reduction of
terms, by arranging beforehand. Four or five kroner is
amply sufficient to pay for country hotels. The other mode
of travelling is by road, either by carriole or stolkjaerre.
The former seats one passenger, the latter two. A postboy
sits behind each conveyance, generally on the tourist's
luggage. The cost of travelling by carriole is about seven-
teen ore per kilometre, and by stolkjaerre, when two occupy
the cart, twenty-five ore per kilometre. The scale is fixed
by the Government, and the distances from one station to
the other are generally given in all guide books, so that the
tourist knows exactly what he has to pay. A small gratuity
is expected by the postboy ; twenty ore per Norwegian
mile (seven English miles) is generally given. It may be
stated that the traveller will be kindly and civilly treated
by all sections of society in Norway, and of course is
expected to return that kindness. The natives are par-
ticularly honest, polite in their demeanour, and willing to
assist visitors in every way to add to the pleasure of their
trip. If the traveller is driving, he must bear in mind
to keep to the right, whereas in England the rule of
the road is to keep to the left ; the rule is reversed in
Norway. Railway Travelling : — The writer has travelled

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 165

on one railway only in Norway, that from Bergen to Voss,
the entire length being sixty-seven miles. The train passes
through forty-eight tunnels, and the line — a narrow gauge
one — is a wonder of engineering skill. The cars, which are
on the American system, run at a speed of twenty miles an
hour, passing through beautiful scenery, and the journey is
well worth the price of a third class return ticket, which
costs five kroner eighty ore. Fishing Quarters : — From
Bergen there are steamers running to all the principal fjords,
so that the angler can have unlimited choice. A nice trip can
be made by taking the rail from Bergen to Voss, by Tvinde
to Opheim, where he will find a good lake for fishing; thence
to Stalheim, and down the Narrodal to Gudvangen, and
then by steamer to Vadheim, on the Sogne Fjord. From
Vadheim to Sande are numbers of lakes, and in the
neighbourhood of Sande, in Vicks Vand, there is good trout
fishing. From Sande proceed to Forde Hafstad. At the
latter a stay should be made to fish Mo Vand and Digernas
Vand. Further on comes Nedre Vasenden, at the end of the
celebrated Jolster Vand. From there to Loen, the angler
should be satisfied, as all the lakes and rivers yield good
angling. Sometimes at Loen sea trout fishing is to be got
free. If time permits, this journey may be continued by way
of Red and Faleide to the celebrated Romsdal Valley, where
excellent angling can always be obtained ; thence back to
Bergen by mail boat. By taking steamer to Christiansand
the main road leading into the Setersdalen district can be
explored, and its numerous lakes and rivers fished. Thele-
marken is a good fishing locality, and can be reached from
Stavanger, by way of Sande, sailing up the Suldal Vand — a
splendid fishing lake; then by way of Naes, through the fine
valley of Bratlands, and on to Roldal. The fish run small in

l66 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Roldal Vand. The road can then be taken over the
Haukeli Fjeld, on to the Haukeli Saeter; then to Botton,
and right into Thelemarken. From Christiania numerous
districts in southern Norway may be reached. A word of
caution as to the best time to go to Norway. It depends
entirely on the particular localities. In the lowr-lying
districts of the Hardanger, and south of this, fly fishing
commences as early as June ; but in all the lakes far up
the mountains (many of which lie near the snow line), and
in the higher reaches north of the Sogne Fjord, the latter
part of July and August are the best months. It is rather
difficult to advise, as the seasons vary in Norway the same
as in other countries. A warm summer helps to clear the
snow away sooner than a late one, and trout come to the
fly earlier. As fishing months, taking Norway altogether,
July and August are decidedly the best.

Nottingham Reels.— These are wood reels, dif-
ferent from the ordinary brass kinds, and are principally
made from old gun stocks, and also from ebonite. They
revolve on a spindle, and are generally employed for pike,
roach, chub, barbel, and other kinds of coarse fish. They
are also well adapted for sea fishing, and occasionally for
trout and salmon spinning. The better kinds are fitted
with a check action, which can be applied or not at
pleasure, as shown in illustration on next page.

Nottingham Style.— This term is applied when
throwing or casting from the reel is practised. The rod
generally used is one made from either greenheart or East
India cane, moderately stiff, with upright rings, and about
eleven feet in length. The best reel is a Nottingham
pattern, three and a half or four inches diameter, with check
to take on or off, fitted with a spring, so that the drum can

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 167

be detached in case the line is caught and also for the
purpose of oiling, as it is necessary that the reel should run
very freely. One hundred yards of silk line plaited is the
best; it does not "kink" so much as a twisted line; it

NEW NOTTINGHAM REEL.

should be undressed, as in this state it runs better through
the rings. The rest of the tackle differs according to the
kind of fishing engaged in. This style is chiefly adopted in
capturing chub, barbel, and jack.

Nottingham Twist.— A silk unvarnished twisted
line, made in various lengths, and used for blow lines
principally.

Otter, The {Lutra vulgaris), is the king of poachers,
and is of the weazel family, but differs widely from the rest
in its aquatic habits. The body is long and flat, covered
with a smooth soft fur of two kinds — an inner and an outer
coat. Its teeth are strong, and the molars being much

1 68 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

pointed to enable it to hold its slippery prey. It attains a
large size, often measuring six feet from the nose to tip of
the tail, and weighing up to sixty pounds. It frequents
rivers and lakes, inhabiting some hole in the bank. It
swims rapidly, and dives with wonderful agility. Its food
chiefly consists of lish. It destroys more than it eats, and
generally feeds on the daintiest part, such as the shoulder.
It is a very wary, suspicious animal, and is seldom seen in
daylight. It can be caught by laying a strong rabbit trap
on its "spraint" or droppings which may be found on its-
path. The trap must be securely fixed to pins well driven
into the ground, as the otter is so strong that he will make
off with it if not very secure. He is generally caught by
the toe or the foot. Otters are also hunted by hounds bred
for the purpose. This sport is chiefly confined to Wales,
Scotland, and one or two districts in England.

Otter, Artificial, is an implement used in the
taking of fish, principally trout and salmon. It is not
recognised by true sportsmen, and is prohibited by law. It
consists of a piece of wood, about eight or nine inches deep,
three-quarters of an inch thick, twelve to twenty inches
long, rounded at both ends, brought to a thin edge one way
and the other edge square and shod with lead sufficiently
weighty to allow it to ride in the water plumb and sub-
merged about three-quarters of its depth ; painted a slate
colour. On one side, in the centre, is driven a staple of
brass wire, four inches long, on which runs freely a stout
brass ring; this is called the bridle. To this ring is
attached the reel line of a fishing rod or a hand line.
From this main line depends, every four feet; a strong gut
dropper about twenty inches long, to which an artificial lake
trout or large river fly is attached. There are usually six

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 169

of these droppers, but there may be as many as the angler
fancies. The otter being attached to the line, swims away
abreast of a boat at whatever distance the angler likes to
allow it. The flies skim the water, and are supposed to
attract the fish, but very few ever come to net taken by
one of these machines. They are awkward to manage, and
between fouls and breaking away the basket is generally
light. The droppers are attached by small box swivels to
the main line. The Norwegians use this poaching instru-
ment extensively on their lochs, and kill quantities of trout
by its aid.

Otter Bait. — A metal spinning bait, made in several
sizes, but not in large demand for fresh water fishing, as the
improved spoons have quite superseded it ; but for sea
fishing this bait is perhaps unequalled.

PaP-tail Fishing is practically the same as minnow
fishing, but confined principally to Scotland, and advan-
tageously employed when minnows are scarce. It is a
very successful mode of catching large trout, particularly

PAR-TAIL, BAITED.

when rivers are in flood. Stewart, in his book on angling,
says, " Divide the par across from A to B, and cut off all
the fins till it resembles the second figure; then take the
large hook and, entering it at the tail, run it along the back

170 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

and out at the other end, curving the bait to make it spin."
The illustration on the preceding page is the tackle he
recommends, with flying drag, but it is also baited on the
large hook and lip hook tackle, which answers just as well.

Paste, to angle for coarse fish, such as carp, roach,
barbel, &c, can be made in a variety of ways. The
principal material that is used is white loaf bread, either
stale or fresh. If the former, take a small bit out of the
centre of a loaf, dip in water, and work up in the hands until
it has arrived at the proper consistence and toughness.
This is the best paste for roach, as a very small pellet of it
can be fastened on the tiny hook. If the paste is made from
fresh bread it needs no water, but is thoroughly kneaded by
the hands, and soon gets very tough. This is a good paste
for chub, as it takes a firm hold on a large hook, and is
also suitable for dace, as, on account of its tenacity, it
can stand stream fishing. A useful paste can also be made
by kneading flour and water together, working it so that
the finer particles are washed away, leaving a glutinous
mass behind ; it can be coloured with a little vermilion,
and can be kept some time, immersed in cold water.
Another sort is made by kneading flour, water, and cotton
wool together. The wool retains its hold on the hook,
keeping the paste from washing away. Pastes are also
made by mixing bread and honey, and flour and glue, &c.

Paternoster is principally employed for perch fishing,
but is not much practised with outside the Thames, as to
work and set it up properly requires some skill and
trouble. It is usually made from fine strong gut, three or
four feet long, with a lead weight attached to one end which
rests on the bottom. To this gut casting line, two,
sometimes three or four, small gut droppers are attached,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 171

nine or ten inches from each other, the lowest dropper
being close to the lead. The hooks are fine light wire lip
hooks, which may be fastened either to the lip of the
minnow, which is generally the live bait used, or in its back
fin. These minnows spin round and about the line, which
may be dropped by the rod into the several spots where the
perch are supposed to be, allowing the lead to go to the
bottom. Keep the line tight. If no bite, raise and drop in
another place. At the first nibble lower the front ot rod,
and strike when there are one or two repetitions. Play the
fish and lift by landing net. This style of fishing is often
•done from a punt. Two anglers can work, and they assist
each other in landing the fish.

PePCh. {Perca fluviatilis) are very handsome fish,
found nearly everywhere in the British Isles. They live in
waters moderately deep, with pebbly, gravelly bottoms, and
ensconce themselves in holes at the sides of gentle streams,

THE PERCH.

and in hollows under banks or heavy roots of trees jutting
out from them. They thrive well in ponds that are fed by
streams, spawn in early spring, and a single fish will
deposit ova calculated in some cases to the amount of two

I72 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

hundred and fifty thousand. The body of the perch is
deep, and the back heavily arched. The mouth is very
large, and has numerous teeth set in the roof and the jaws.
The colours are beautiful, the back and well down the sides
being of a deep green, marked with distinct upright bars of
a black colour ; the belly is white, sometimes tinged with
pink. The perch has a distinguishing feature in the dorsal
fin, which is spinous and flexible, and from the powerful
spines which it possesses, causes this fish to be dreaded by
all the other denizens of the water.

PePCh, Fishing for. —There are various modes
employed in capturing perch. The most commonly used
is the live minnow, either attached to a single hook and
fastened to a float, or with the paternoster (g.v.) style of
tackle. When a perch attacks the bait, he does it in a
nibbling, half-hearted sort of way, so that, although the float
keeps bobbing up and down, yet this is no sign that the bait
has been swallowed. Better to allow time, and when it sails-
away under water, strike then. They can be fished for with
a spinning minnow or a small spoon, and this is a very
successful plan in lakes and ponds where perch abound. A
good lively red worm is as good a bait as any for still perch
fishing, and very much used by the rural anglers in the deep
reaches of rivers where they are. A gloomy, blowy day is
a good one to fish for perch in. They swim in shoals, and
if you get into one of these, and catch one fish, there is
almost a certainty of getting nearly the whole crowd, one
after the other. Perch will take a gaudy fly with plenty of
tinsel about it, but it is uncertain when they would be in the
humour to do so, consequently a fly is seldom used for them.
When worm fshing for perch, it is useful to throw in
occasionally a hardful of broken worms — this puts them

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 1 73

well on the feed. Let the tackle be strong, the rod short
and stiff, and don't give much time before landing the fish,
as making much disturbance where a shoal is, sometimes
puts a stop to the sport, as perch are very wary.

Pike {EsoxJ. — A fish found over all Europe, and very
abundant in the rivers, lakes, and ponds of the British Isles.
It has rather a largish body, covered with scales of a strong
texture, with a broad, flat muzzle, and very large mouth,
furnished extensively with teeth of various sizes. The
colour of the upper part of the body is olive brown,
becoming lighter, and mottled with green and yellow on the
sides, and passing into silvery white on the belly. The
pike grows to a very large size. Specimens have been
caught in lakes in Ireland weighing over seventy pounds.
Jt is an exceedingly voracious fish, and has been in conse-.

THE PIKE.

quence called the fresh water shark. It is capable of
digesting almost anything it can swallow. The pike will
attack any fish, even if of superior size, and greedily devours
all smaller. Frogs are favourite morsels, and it will devour
water rats, young ducks, and even young geese become its
prey. It soon depopulates a trout river, and an incessant
war is waged against it by all lovers of the gentle art. It
spawns in the early spring, and is best in season in the late
-autumn. The flesh is considered good by many.

Pike Fishing may be carried on in various ways.
This fish is so greedy that almost any sort of bait will e.itice

174 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

it ; and as it is strong and furnished with numerous and
very sharp teeth, the tackle should be of suitable strength,.
and where traces are employed fine gimp must take the
place of gut. If live bait is employed it is usual to work
it with a float, as the line being long it is nearly impossible
to keep the bait at the proper depth, which is about mid-
water. The float effects this, and the leaded line keeps it
from rising to the surface. Care should be taken to prevent
the live bait from getting into weeds, by reeling in the line
until the danger is past. As soon as a pike seizes the bait,,
the float disappearing denotes this fact, when the angler
should allow the line to run off smoothly as any tightening
of it may cause the fish to be suspicious and to leave the
bait. After a little the line ceases running, during which
"time the pike is gorging the bait; when it moves again is
the time to strike, and after a little play — the first rush is
the worst — it may be brought to net. The snap hook is
employed when the pike is wary and not inclined for other
modes. The small hook of this tackle is fastened to the
back fin, and the two large hooks lie against the side of the
fish. When the pike seizes the snap bait — whether gudgeon,
dace, or minnow — the angler must strike at once ; this
action withdraws the snap, causing the hooks to expand in
the mouth of the fish, and prevents it ejecting the bait.
Trolling with dead bait is also a successful mode of fishing,,
using the gorge hook. The best baits are gudgeon or dace.
The baiting needle is thrust down the body of the fish and
out at tail, drawing the gimp-fastened gorge hook after it,
until the hooks come in against the sides of the mouth of
the bait. The tail of the bait may be fastened to the gimp
with a lashing of thread, to keep it straight. The trace
should be joined to the looped gimp by a hook swivel.

GORGE HOOK.

GOUGE IIuOK. BAITED...

;i?^0

Y,:,:::

^.'

ARTIFICIAL PIKE BAITS

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. I 77

The bait may then be cast across the stream or into the
pond, having plenty of line lying loose or coiled in the
hand so that it may go a good distance and drop gently,
when the line may be reeled up in a jerking manner to
imitate the swimming actions of the living fish. When the
pike seizes the bait, which will as a rule be felt, allow it
plenty of time — four or five minutes — to gorge ; then strike
and play. Spinning with dead bait is also practised, using
any of the spinning tackle (q.v.) the angler fancies. The
most general way of fishing for pike, and the handiest,
is with artificial baits, principally spoons, by spinning,
either from a boat, if in a lake or extensive sheet of water,
or from the bank of a river. When fishing from a boat
where large pike are known to exist, hand lines are often
used, as in sea fishing ; but the play is not so exciting as
with the rod. Pike are also very fond of a frog, and many
a good fish is taken in canals and still rivers by the rustic
angler walking along the bank spinning after him a frog
baited on a few hooks. Artificial frogs — lifelike imitations —
can now be procured from tackle makers. There is also
a fly which sometimes lures a pike in summer weather.
It is formed by the moons of a peacock's tail. Pike are the
only fish that do not seem to care for worms, and this bait
is not used for them except occasionally by set lines. In
releasing the hooks from the pike's mouth, gullet, or
stomach, it is necessary to beware of its teeth, which are
apt to inflict nasty injuries to the fingers. If the hooks are
in the jaw, a gag should be put in the pike's mouth, and the
hooks cut out with a knife ; if they are swallowed, release
the trace from the bait tackle, cut open the gullet, and
withdraw the hooks through the opening. The fish should

L

178 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

be knocked on the head the moment it is landed, which
ought always to be done by a landing net or gaff.

Pike Flies are perfect monstrosities in fly making and
are generally dressed on large, strong double hooks. The
wings are composed of a mass of coloured feathers, the gay
peacock eyes standing out most prominently. The body is
made thick, ribbed with gold or silver twist, and two glass
beads are tied on the head to represent eyes. The flies
are about the size of a small bird. They are used in
summer, and worked by means of jerking on the surface ot
the water.

Pipe, The. — The best sort is a straight-stemmed
briar root, with a vulcanite, bone, or horn mouthpiece.
Bent-stemmed pipes are apt to allow the smoke from the
bowl to get into the eye, and this is anything but pleasant
when one is ardently on the look out for the rise of a fish.
An angler who smokes should accustom himself to keep his
pipe in the left side of his mouth ; it is more out of the way
than when in the right. A cigar is a nuisance when
fishing ; it does well enough when resting after lunch. Be
sure and knock the ashes out clear before putting the pipe
in the pocket. Many a man has set fire to his coat by not
doing so.

Pisciculture, or Fish Hatching* by artificial
means, has made great strides within the last few years,
and is now carried out successfully in many establish-
ments scattered over the country, and being remunerative
under careful management many more will continue to
arise. The first essential feature in fish hatching is a
constant steady supply of pure water, mechanically pure as
well as chemically ; and it is very necessary that any
danger of freshets or floods should be avoided. It is found

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 179

that spring water is the best for hatching, on account not
only of its purity, but of its standard heat — the same in
summer as winter, but brook water is the best for the young
fry after they leave the egg. A brief description of the
mode of trout hatching is interesting. The spawning fish,
male and female, being obtained, are kept in separate
ponds or tanks until required A shallow pan, such as is
used in dairies for cooling milk, is placed in position. It is
essential that both the ova of the female, and the milt or
seminal fluid of the male fish are ripe. If the eggs do not
flow freely under the slight pressure of the thumb they are
not ripe, and the fish should be put back and another taken.
The same with the milt. If it is ripe it will assert this fact
by spurting out. The female fish is caught in the right
hand by the head and above the tail with the left. The
thumb of the latter is carried above the exit of the eggs,
and a gradual downward striping pressure is exercised, and
if the ova or spawn is ripe it will flow out evenly into the
pan. The male fish is then held over the pan in the same
way, and the milt allowed to spread over the eggs. It is
not necessary that these should be in water, as there is
quite enough of the latter dripping from the struggling fish
to convey the milt over the eggs. The eggs, having an
infinitesimal orifice at one end, attract the milt, which enters
the orifice and the impregnation is complete. The power
of the eggs to attract the milt lasts about thirty minutes,
after which it ceases and no successful impregnation can
take place. Stir the eggs well with a feather, and allow
about two inches of water to flow over them for about forty
to fifty minutes ; the eggs which have hitherto been in
contact will separate, and these then should be washed or
rinsed till clean, when they may be conveyed to the hatching

180 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

boxes. The boxes in which the fresh eggs are hatched
may be either made of wood (charred or carbonized), or
from stone, slate, or glass. On the bottom of these boxes
is placed gravel, perfectly clean, which has been boiled
to get rid of the insect life, in size about that of a pea; on
this gravel the eggs are placed, over which a flow of
water passes, about two inches deep, which must filter
through properly arranged flannel screens, to prevent
any sediment or impurity passing over and settling on
the eggs. Occasionally these are washed with the rose
of a watering pot to get rid of any glit or sediment which
may have settled on them ; allowing such to accumulate is
fatal. The hatching boxes should be covered with lids
fitting accurately, to prevent the ingress of frogs, snails,
mice, caddis worms, &c, which would prey upon the eggs.
During the process of incubation there are four enemies to
success, namely, fungus, living enemies, sediment, and
dryness. The first arises from the eggs themselves, and is
occasioned by allowing any decayed ones to remain among
the sound ; all these should be removed every twenty-four
hours during the period of incubation. Fungus is a great
pest, and can only be warded off by cleanliness and using
charcoal, having the boxes made from charred wood, and
keeping the water in the dark. Sediment can be guarded
against by judicious arrangement of the filters, and living
pests by closely-fitting lids, and guarding the ingress and
egress of water by fine wire nets. The period of incubation
in trout is from fifty to seventy days, according to the
temperature of the water — the colder it is the longer the
hatching is retarded. Salmon eggs take longer, from
seventy to ninety days. A little practice is necessary to
distinguish the bad eggs from the fertile. In the early days

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. l8l

of the hatching one of the distinguishing marks is : In the
unimpregnated egg a small annular disc, with a smaller
round dot in the centre, will be seen on the top of the egg,
and will remain there until the egg turns white, while that
on the sound egg will disappear in twenty-four hours. The
first appearance of the alevins (q.v.) or hatched fishes is like
little splinters of dark wood about half an inch long ; the
yolk of the egg is attached to them, and remains so until it is
absorbed, and the alevins begin to feed, and are now called
fry. In six or seven days the alevins begin to move about
in an aimless fashion, and need no attention except to keep
screens clean and the water flowing nicely. About the
twenty-fifth day the egg sac is quite absorbed, and then the
trout fry must be fed — first with hard-boiled yolk of eggs
beaten up very fine, and afterwards with liver and curd.
They must be fed four times a day until they are one year
old. It has been found that occasionally throwing some
loamy soil into the water has a great tendency to prevent
many of the diseases to which young fry are liable. The
yearlings can be put into ponds or streams, or may be
transported to stronger water with perfect safety. The
average length of well-cared for healthy fry at a year
old is about three inches. The following description of
salmon hatching has been kindly furnished to me by Messrs.
Foley, of Lismore, Co. Waterford, Ireland, who have been
very successful in their extensive hatching establishment,
which has been arranged on the latest and most improved
principles. As they are the lessees of the Blackwater
fishery it is almost a necessity for them to breed and
increase salmon largely, seeing that they are under a heavy
rent: — "Some years ago an attempt was made to propagate
salmon artificially, but such was the difficulty of obtaining

182 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

ripe spawning fish, as well as the expense, the undertaking
was abandoned. This season the killing hatch has been
utilised for the purpose of capturing spawning fish. The
nearly ripe parents are taken from the hatch and placed in
ponds having a strong running stream passing through
them. They are retained in these until they are quite ready
for spawning. Unripe spawn is worse than useless, there-
fore, considerable judgment is required to use the fish at the
proper time ; also to match the fish as near size as possible,
as the milt of a large fish should not be put with the ova of
a very small one. The ova, by gentle pressure of the
hand, is extracted into an earthenware vessel (such as that
used for milk), and the milt at once distributed sparingly
over it, and then gently mixed with the hand. This is now
allowed to remain in darkness for about half an hour. If
the temperature be over the average the eggs will separate
in less time, and impregnation has taken place. The
change of colour of the eggs will be seen at once — from a
bright red amber to a duller hue. Both tin and zinc trays
have been tried for laying the spawn on, but glass grids,
made for the purpose, have been found superior. The
period of hatching depends entirely on the temperature of
the water ; average, say from sixty to eighty-five days.
The boxes used at Lismore for hatching measure about
nine feet long and fourteen inches wide, and deep enough
to permit a run of seven inches of water. Pure spring
water is used until the ova is ' eyed,' after this period the
best water is that of a mountain stream. From six to seven
weeks the hatched fish remain in these boxes with little or
no food, but before the yolk sac is entirely absorbed it is
prudent to induce the young fry to feed. The most suitable
food is powdered liver or patent food supplied by Mr. Ford,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 1 83

of Caistor ; this latter has been found to be all that is
desired. After seven weeks the fry are removed to the
rearing ponds and judiciously fed with a properly-mixed
insect and animal food until they arrive at the par stage.
This year (1890) there have been turned out into the river
several hundred thousand healthy fry, and as many retained
to be turned out in the spring of 1891." It is easy to hatch
perch, and a succesful mode of taking the eggs is mentioned
by Levingston Stern in his work " Domesticated Trout": —
Take a good sized milk pan nearly full of water, having two
ripe fish handy. Impregnate the water with the milt, then
take in hand the female fish, hold her over the pan of water
so as to let the exterior end of the roe rest, as it comes out,
on the further edge of the pan ; it will stick at once. Then
draw the fish slowly over the pan to the opposite edge,
letting the roe fall in the water, and fasten it as before, on
the edge of the pan. The roe will thus be suspended in
the water in such a way that it cannot get together and
stick and suffocate itself, as it would do if it had a
chance. Shake the pan a little. In an hour rinse the eggs,
change the water twice a day, and in twenty days, if the
water is not too cold, the eggs will hatch. Sixty degrees
Fahrenheit is a good temperature to hatch them in, but they
will stand a temperature as high as eighty-five degrees, and
the development becomes very rapid. A singular feature of
the embryo is its movement in the egg, which begins as
soon as the fish is visible. The little creatures jump from
one wall of the egg to the other with quick spasmodic
movements. This motion is incessant day and night, and
only ceases for a moment when the eggs are shaken.

Plummets.— These are simply leads attached to a
line to ascertain the depth of water, and are used by the

184 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

fishermen of the Thames to regulate the proper distance at
which to work their floats.

Poaching? Fish is not only unlawfully entering on
another's fishery in order to capture fish, but also taking
them by illegal means {q.v. " Laws, Fishery "), An owner
would be guilty of poaching on his own waters were he to
capture fish during the close time or use an illegal net in
the river, or angle for salmon with rod and line without
having a license, or do several other illegal acts. A man is
a poacher if he angle in any river rented or owned by
another without having proper permission from the owner
or his agent. In England and Ireland navigable rivers are
prima facie free, and where anyone can fish, he can catch
salmon as well as every other fish with legal and licensed
engines. But there is an exception to this generality —
a grant from Magna Charta ; and as this has been given
in very many instances to proprietors, care should be
exercised to acquire this knowledge before fishing in any
manner on a navigable river. When a poacher is caught
in the act, he may be apprehended by the owner of
the fishery. All rods, lines, &c, may be seized by the
owner or his keepers, watchers, or other servants ; or by a
river bailiff. This can only be done while he is on the spot.
If he escapes to the highway or into adjoining lands he
cannot be arrested, but he can be summoned for the offence
before the justices. The law of Scotland differs considerably
from that of England or Ireland with regard to poaching.
In Scotland salmon stands on a different footing from all
other fish, and prima facie belongs to the Crown, so that no
person is entitled to fish for salmon (except by angling)
unless he can produce a charter or grant from the Crown ;
but nearly all the great fishery proprietors are already in

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 185

possession of this. Any one who poaches trout or other
fish with net, double-handed rod, cross line or set lines,
incurs a penalty of £5 and forfeiture of the fish ; and he may
be arrested if he be net fishing, but not otherwise. A man
angling for trout — that is, using a single-handed rod with
line and hook — although he may be poaching, cannot be
arrested nor punished by any penalty except that obtained
by an action at law, which may be taken against him.
However, the poaching angler for salmon can be fined. His
name and address should be taken, and a summons obtained
for "unlawfully taking or attempting to take," &c, &c. The
worst kind of poaching is that of capturing the fish heavy
with spawn, about settling on their spawning grounds,
thereby destroying not alone the parent fish, wrhich at this
time are quite unfit for food, but the myriads of eggs which
otherwise would have hatched out, and in time have become
full-sized fish, affording sport to the angler and food for the
million. The main safeguard against this poaching is
plenty of water being in the river at the spawning season,
as the poacher cannot work successfully in heavy water.
It is at this season, too, that the water keepers or watchers
should be most alert. It is difficult to catch poachers in the
act. They usually work in gangs, and while two or three
are sweeping the pools with their nets, others are placed on
heights above the river commanding a good view of all
approaches to it, so that they can give timely warning to the
netters if they see any sign of impending danger. Should
there be no appearance of a keeper or watcher the scouts
remain perfectly still, but at the approach of an enemy they
move quickly away ; this movement is taken up by all the
the others placed at distances along the banks, so that like
a semaphore danger is signalled for miles in a few minutes.

l86 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

At night the movements are made by lights. Water keepers-
should alter their appearance by a frequent change of the
clothes they usually wear, so that they may not be recog-
nised at a distance. A good preventive to poaching pools
with nets is to place in the water concrete blocks, shaped
like a pear, the small end up. As the surface of these are
smooth, they afford no means of hauling them out by
grappling with ropes. Very smooth boulders are also good,
but they are not so easily placed in position as the concrete
blocks, Avhich can be made directly over the spot on a rafty
and dropped down to the position desired.

Poeket or Portmanteau Rods.— These rods are
made so that they can be carried in a large pocket or stowed
away in a portmanteau, and being composed of a number of
short joints, they are very useful in travelling, as they take
up little space.

Pollen, The {Corregonus pollaii), a fish somewhat
resembling the salmonidse, but having a prolonged snout
like the herring. They are called the fresh water herring,
being about the same size, and are only to be found in
Lough Neagh, in Ireland, although some writers affirm that
they are identical with the gwiniad of Wales, and the
powan of Loch Lomond. They are a delicate-flavoured
fish, and when fresh caught are highly esteemed as food.
But they won't keep for more than a day, and decompose
very soon. From an angler's point of view they are use-
less, being only caught by nets. They spawn in December
and January.

Prawn, The (Palazmon senatus) is a crustacean com-
mon on the British coasts ; not so abundant as the shrimp,
and, unlike it, is found in the vicinity of rocks at a little
distance from the shore. It is highly esteemed for the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

.87

table, and is usually caught in traps similar to those used
for lobster catching; also by what are called " putting"1
nets.

Prawn Fishing for Salmon.— The best size for
bait is about two inches long. If possible, the prawns should
be obtained fresh, and scalded for a few minutes in water

PRAWN TACKLE.

PRAWN TACKLE, BAITED.

containing a little salt and saltpetre. This will not only
toughen them, but improve the colour. If fresh baits are
not to be obtained, a supply of preserved ones may be

1 88 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

procured from the tackle makers. These have been
preserved in glycerine, but as a rule are over boiled and
rather large. The angler can preserve them himself by
procuring them when an opportunity occurs, scalding them
properly, and then dropping them into a bottle of glycerine.
They will keep good for months. A favourite tackle is
shown on preceding page. How to bait prawn tackle: — The
point of the needle to be inserted in the tail and brought
out at the middle of the breast, the point protruding about
one-eighth of an inch. A small hook may be attached
underneath the shank of the lowermost double hook and
then drawn over the point and pulled up as far as it will
go, and the tail made fast to the tackle by binding it with
red silk or thread. Other tackles require a baiting needle,
or consist of hooks to be thrust through the prawn. These
are troublesome methods, but the angler can please himself;
the object is to keep the prawn as natural looking as
possible, and in as good a condition as will ensure it
remaining securely attached to the tackle. The prawn may
be baited either head down or tail down — the former for
preference. The tackle is attached to an ordinary salmon
casting line furnished with BB shot, more or less according
to the strength of the water. The most agreeable and
skilful style is to use the prawn exactly like a fly, only
deeper in the water. A rod with upright rings is necessary,
and the underhand style of casting to be preferred, as the
bait is tender. It is cast out across the stream, and brought
slowly round to the side upon which the angler stands, as
nearly as possible in midwater. When a bite is felt, give a
second or two, then raise the rod smartly. A rod set in
mid stream, from a boat moored during lunch, is often
successful, as salmon have taken the prawn when it has

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 189

been known to lie on the bottom of the river. In large and
slow rivers where a boat is used, the plan is to place the
rods — usually two — at right angles to the boat, which may
be either anchored or held against the stream by the oars.
Allow the bait to stream a few yards astern. In very
sluggish water, floats are attached to the line about seven
feet from the bait ; the line is jammed to resist a pull, and
the fish hooks itself. When it gives a good pull or two,
lift the rod and play it. Swivels are not usually employed,
except with a casting reel, when one or two are necessary
to take the twist out of the line after each cast, and they are
essential if trolling with the prawn is practised.

Preserving? Fish Baits, such as minnows and
other small fish, may be done by keeping them in salt and
water, or salicylic acid and water ; sugar will also answer
for the purpose, or spirits of wine — they toughen in this
latter. Oil will keep baits in good order for a length of
time, if both are just raised to a boiling heat by immersing
the vessel containing the oil and fish in boiling water for a
few minutes, taking care not to go too far, or they will get
tender.

Pritt's "Yorkshire Trout Flies."— This book
may now be called a standard work and gives all the best
dressings of trout flies used on the Wharfe, Ure, and other
Yorkshire streams. It is beautifully illustrated with hand-
coloured plates, and generally useful for Yorkshire stream
fishing.

Punt. — A flat-bottomed boat used by the Thames
anglers, and moored across the stream by means of poles
thrust into the bed of the river.

Reels or Winches. — These necessary articles of
equipment should be chosen with care, and as a good reel

i go

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

will last a man a lifetime it is better to procure at first a
really reliable one. A bad or cheap reel is a nuisance, and
as they are now made to perfection there is no excuse for
using an inferior article. The materials used in making
fishing reels are gun metal, brass, ebonite, aluminium, and
various kinds of hard wood. Metal and ebonite are princip-
ally used for trout and salmon reels, and wood for bottom

CHECK REEL, WITH REVOLVING PLATE.

or still water fishing. The ebonite, bound with German
silver, forms a very light and serviceable reel, especially for
using on a light trout rod. Reels are made in several
designs, such as plain, check, revolving plate, multipliers,
contracted, balance handle, and some with removable check.
One of the latest styles of common reels is formed by
striking out at one blow, from a single sheet of brass, the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 191

plate and sides, which are then turned up parallel to each
other, the spindle inserted, and the handle riveted on, thus
avoiding all screws and loose plates. The most serviceable
reel, however, is the plain check winch, with the handle
attached to revolving plate (see page 190). The angler has
better command of his fish with this than with any other
kind. Care should be taken to prevent sand or grit getting

THE "SUN AND PLANET" REEL.

in between the revolving plate and the side of reel, and the
check should be so humoured as not to be too stiff nor yet
too easy, and the sound made when using it should be
soft — not harsh nor sharp. Now and then some fine oil
should be rubbed over the working parts and then wiped off
clean. This will keep them free from rust or verdigris, and

92

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

in good working order. There is a reel called the "Sun
and Planet," which has some advantages. If the handle
%is caught by an obstruction, such as a loop of the line, or
the watch chain, it will not prevent the line from running
out. In playing a fish the hand need
not be taken off the handle, and by
using a slight pressure on it the line
can be checked to any strain. The
" Malloch " casting reel is used for
spinning only, as it turns up and
allows the line to run off speedily, so
that a long cast can be made. The
Nottingham reel, which is made of
wood, has very few working parts, is
simple, and also allows the line to run
off with great speed and ease. These
reels are used for bank fishing, and
the speed of the revolving disc is con-
trolled by the pressure of the finger
acting as a brake. It requires some
practice to work them properly. If
the angler wishes to be particularly
careful of his reel, he should protect
it when not in use by encasing it in a
solid leather pocket, made to fit accu-
rately. This will prevent it from receiving any injury from
falls or knocks, and, if carried in the basket with the fish,.
keeps it from being soiled. All reels after use should be
wiped clean and dry.

Ripple.— A ripple on the water is occasioned either by
the wind blowing against the current or by the disturbing
influence of a stream falling over or rushing through stones

THE "MALLOCH
CASTING REEL.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 193

or other obstructions. The ripple is of great assistance to
the angler in successfully presenting his fly, as it prevents
the fish from seeing him as plainly as they would do in
calm water. Every advantage should be taken of a ripple
to fish a pool, in which large fish generally lie, as they
cannot be approached "when the surface is calm. Fish after
fish may be taken from a pool, if ruffled, without much
change of ground. When the wind is blowing fitfully, and
only occasionally throwing a ripple, do not cast when the
surface of the water is smooth.

Roach, The {Cyprinus nitilus), is a handsome fish,
inhabiting many of our deep still rivers, ponds, or lakes,
is easily domesticated, and multiplies very fast. A few
roach put into a pond will soon produce as many as the
water is capable of sustaining. Roach are of slow growth.
They are a gregarious fish, swimming in shoals. The

THE ROACH.

fins are red, the mouth like leather, no teeth, circle of the
eye golden, scales regular, large, and easily detached. It is
not much esteemed for the table on account of the multitude
of bones which it contains. It gives fair sport to the angler,
spawns about the end of May or beginning of June, and
has been known to attain a weight of over three pounds

M

194 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

but this is very exceptional, the average being about one
pound.

Roach Fishing? is very good sport, especially from a
boat on a pond or lake on a calm, warm, summer evening,
at which time they take the fly greedily. The fly may be of
any description, provided it is small, and the hook and
gut fine; the latter must be strong, as a roach of a
pound weight is a heavy drag on fine gut. They take
the fly best when sunk and drawn towards the surface,
where they are apt to follow it and hook themselves
just as it leaves the water. Their mouths are so small
that a disgorger is required to get tjie hook free, or it
may be cut out with a knife ; if forced or twisted with
the finger it is apt to get broken. They should be
landed with a net. For punt fishing, a nice handy
twelve foot rod, a fine braided silk line, three yards of
drawn gut, and a No. 5 or 6 crystal hook are most suitable.
Roach are more commonly angled for with bait of some
kind. A very convenient sort is paste, which can be made
of flour damped and worked up with a little cotton wool.
This may be dyed a red colour or not, according to fancy.
Take a small bit about the size of a pea, and fasten it on the
barb of a No. 5 or 6 crystal hook so as to cover it. Adjust
the float (which should be a light one), so that the paste is
just off the bottom. Keep the hand very steady, and the
line taut as possible. As soon as the float denotes the
slightest nibble, strike immediately, as they suck the paste
off. Fishing with gentles is also a very common practice,
using a small hook to hold a gentle or a size larger to hold
two, which are put on together and fished in the eddies. In
coloured water, a red worm is also a taking bait ; and, as with
paste strike at the slightest movement of the float. There

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 195

are several other ways of angling for this fish, such as by
means of long lines let off down the stream with two or
three droppers attached, baited with different lures, but
there is not so much sport in these modes. The best of
all is fly fishing, and next to it the paste. When roach
will not take the one they will the other, and the same
tackle, except the change from fly to bait hook, will suit both
practices. With a horse hair casting line the sport is more
exciting; but, of course, it takes longer to land, as they
give good play. There is another method of angling for this
fish practised in southern districts, a description of which
may prove interesting. The rod used is from eighteen to
twenty feet long, with no rings or reel fittings. The line,
of single horse hair or finest drawn gut, is fastened to the
top of the rod ; the float should be as light as possible, and
the hook No. 5 or 6 crystal. When a fish is hooked, the
angler, who is generally seated on a box or basket (specially
made for this style of fishing), disjoints his butt or middle
piece, and plays the fish with the remainder of the rod. In
this mode :>f fishing, which is known as the Lea style,
anglers often get from ten to twenty pounds of roach in
a day. Another method of roach fishing is with a No. 5
crystal hook, two or three yards of hair or drawn gut, a
shot fixed fourteen inches from hook, and a drilled bullet
above the small split shot (arranged so as not to allow
the drilled bullet to run down on the hook). This is
permitted to lie on the bottom, and you fish by feel. In
a stream, of course the bullet rolls, and the best fish are
caught this way. The bait is generally gentles or paste.
In dead water the angler covers the gentles with ground
bait, about the size of a large marble. The roach keep
nibbling at the ground bait, and getting confident they

10,6 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

come to the gentles and take them readily. This is a very
successful way to capture large roach, particularly where
they are much angled for.

Rod Boxes or Cases are made of deal or other
wood, for the reception of rods, reels, and other tackle ;
usually lined with green baize, with partitions for the
various articles. It is better to have them provided with
lock and key, and braced by two leather straps.

Rod Brackets or Rests may be made by anyone
who can use a plane and centre bit. Procure two pieces of
hard wood, which may be of any length from six inches to
two feet, according to the number of rods a man possesses.
The back, which hangs against the wall, should be four
inches wide and one inch thick ; to the bottom edge of this
is screwed the other piece at right angles. This latter may
be two and a-half inches to three inches wide and half an
inch thick, and in it is bored a number of holes ranging
from one and a half inches to half an inch in diameter, with
half inch spaces between each hole. This shelf is covered
on top side by a piece of indiarubber insertion cloth about
one-eighth of an inch thick ; it can be fastened by glue.
Now make two cross cuts with a pen-knife in the cloth
where it covers each hole. The rod pieces are thrust up
singly by their smaller ends just past the ferrules, and the
cloth grips them firm, allowing them to hang in a suitable
manner, and prevents them getting a set.

Rod FerPllles are the metal fittings that hold the
joints of a rod together. There are many kinds in use.
The plain male and female ferrule is perhaps the best known
and most generally used. There are others with lock
fastenings, some with screws, and some with gibs. (See
" Joints.")

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 197

Rod Fitting's include winch rings, ferrules, rod rings
and keepers, rod end r'ngs, and butt caps and buttons.

Rod Making? is a very interesting business or pro-
fession, and is now brought to great perfection. It is an
advantage if the rod maker is somewhat of an angler ;
as that will materially assist his mechanical knowledge,
for theory and practice go hand in hand. There are four
principles in rod making which are essential — strength,
lightness, elasticity, and balance — and when these are
combined the rod must be perfect. There are so many
different tastes to be catered for that the rod maker must
of necessity have a large stock — all sorts, shapes, and
sizes. The woods used in rod making are ash, hickory,
greenheart, lancewood, blue mahoe, and washaba, besides
several sorts of canes and bamboos. These woods, with
the exception of ash, are mostly the growths of foreign
countries. They come in balks or logs, and are then
sawn up into planks nine inches by three — a good use-
ful length is six feet six inches — which serve to work
up into rods nine, twelve, fifteen, and eighteen feet
long ; the six inches over allows for end shakes and
helps to work out twists, &c. These planks should be
permitted to season in this state for two years at least —
longer if possible. Then they may be sawn up into
scantlings suitable for butts, middles, and top pieces. The
seasoning should be carried on in a dry, airy shed or loft,
where neither sun nor damp can penetrate. Greenheart,
which is the most universally-used wood now for rods,
especially for fly rods, is of so oily and dense a nature
that it requires several years' seasoning before it is tit
for use. All the woods chosen should be of perfectly

ig8 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

straight grain, free from sapwood, shakes, and knots. The
choice pieces should be laid aside for tops, the next pick for
middle pieces, and the worst for butts — bearing in mind
that there should be no bad stuff used for any portion of a
rod. Some rods are made in two pieces, and are nice
to use, but rather awkward in length for carrying. The
generality of rods are made in three pieces. The standard
length of a trout rod is from eleven to twelve feet; that
for salmon seventeen to eighteen feet. Of course, many
trout rods are made in lengths of eight, nine, ten, and ten
and a-half feet for single hand, and from thirteen to sixteen
feet for double hand. Salmon rods, more particularly
all-greenheart ones, are often only sixteen feet long, but
in some cases go up to twenty feet. The woods may
be used in combination, for instance — ash butt, hickory
middle piece, and either a lancewood or greenheart top ;
or hickory butt and middle, greenheart or washaba (q.v.)
for top ; or they may be all lancewood or all greenheart.
There is no doubt that the latter is the best known wood
of the present day of which to make a fly rod, possessing as
it does great "life," marvellous elasticity, the hardness of
steel, and a wonderful capability of retaining its original
straightness, provided the wood is properly seasoned and
the rod gets anything like fair play in its care by the
angler. It is weighty, but this fault can be counteracted
by working it comparatively fine. The butt is generally
made first, and is reduced by the plane to nearly the size
required at the handle, which we will assume to be
three-quarters of an inch in diameter. It may be put in
the lathe and the handle turned to exact size, with the
quick taper now generally made. The rest of the butt is
planed down first to an octagon shape, the better to keep

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 199

it perfectly round when finished. It should possess a
gradual taper from the handle or gripping position to
where the ferrule is fitted. The handle should be from
fourteen to eighteen inches long, according to the length of
rod and style required. The top of the butt may be made
to suit a ferrule twelve-sixteenths in diameter. Some
makers can finish their rods well with the plane ; others
with files and scraping. It is of good service to the rod
maker, in planing up his pieces, if he has on the bench a
piece of wood with a V-shaped groove running up it, in
which he can place the piece of the rod that he is planing.
The butt may now have the ferrule fitted and the joint
bored, if for a taper joint, which in all high class rods is
double brazed (q.v.) ; if it is for a plain spliced joint, it is
sloped; if for the flexible joint, it is fitted with the pin
used in this joint (q.v.) ; in either case it must be made to
suit the counter or joint of the middle piece, which may
next be proceeded with. This piece is planed down in the
same way as the butt — octagon first and then circular, with
a slight taper — until it is the size to suit the counter at the
large end and the ferrule at the small end. Then the top
piece is proceeded with, and when reduced to what is
considered the proper size the rod may be put together.
The joints, though nearly in their places, are not yet driven
home, as some manipulation is necessary before the rod is
considered satisfactory in its feel ; the brasses may have
to be turned several times on their bearings before the right
"feel " is obtained. To judge this, take the rod in the right
hand, at the place where it is intended to be held, press the
point against the ceiling or a wall, and note whether the
curve the rod takes be regular or not ; any stiff or straight
portions that refuse to curve symmetrically may be worked

200 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

down by plane or file until they do. Perhaps a better plan
is to fasten one end of a line to the extreme point, and
either have a person to hold the other end or fasten it to a
nail in the floor ; then bend the rod as if a heavy fish was
on it, and observe the curve carefully ; it should be a
graceful one from butt to tip. The reel fittings now may
be temporarily fixed, also the butt cap, either with or
without a spike ; and, having attached the reel, with the
line on, get the balance (q.v.) of the rod. This in a twelve
foot rod should be about two feet above the reel, which
latter is supposed to be as close to the butt end as the
fittings will permit. When all these particulars have been
carried out, the counters should be carefully marked in
their places, and that portion of the wood upon which they
have been fitted should have a thin coating of fish glue, or
Russian cement as it is sometimes called, a few fibres of
towr being twisted over the surface of the glue. The
counters are now driven home to their places, taking care
in the operation not to bruise the brasses or injure them in
any way These counters are now drilled, and brass pins
with counter-sunk heads driven right through ; the pins
neatly hammered and filed off smooth, so as to render them
invisible or nearly so. Some makers fit their joints very
accurately, and do not use pins ; but in time the wood
shrinks a little, and unless pinned they are liable to get
loose and give bother. After the rod is jointed it may be
sand-papered, when it is ready for the stain, which may be
according to fancy — generally of a dark colour — recipes
for which are given under the heading " Stains." It is next
allowed to dry, washed to remove loose particles of the dye,
and dried again by air alonet It is then French polished,
after being slightly sand-papered and boned to lay the fibre

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 201

which has started in the dyeing process. Then it is taken in
the hand loosely, when it will find its natural lean — its proper
feel, so to speak. When this is obtained, and after the var-
nish or polish is thoroughly hard, the ferrules are fitted with
fish glue and tow same as the counters, and the reel fittings
also may be fixed. The under side is then marked for the
rings ; these may be either the ordinary brass rings fitted with
keepers, or the upright solid or snake rings, according to
the style of rod or the fancy of the purchaser, who very often
has his own ideas and insists upon having them carried
out. It is a safe plan to have good-sized rings on in any
case; there is less chance of the line getting " kinked " on
them when running out. Most makers varnish their rods ;
some with spirit varnish, others with copal. Anglers who
are particular prefer their rods without varnish, and have
them French polished instead (an occasional rub after-
wards with linseed oil keeps the wet out of the wood) ;
as they consider, and with some truth, that the flash of a
highly-varnished rod is very apt to scare the fish. The
tying of the rings, which in good rods is made with well-
waxed silk thread, must be varnished thoroughly, to prevent
the thread chafing, cutting, or becoming loose. If the joint of
the rod is the ordinary ferrule and counter, it is usual to have
two small bent wires, called catches, fastened on each joint
about two inches apart and facing each other, which may
be lashed together by a thread to prevent the possibility of
any of the joints withdrawing when in the act of casting. A
salmon rod is made in much the same manner, but being
double-handed the balance is different, and usually the butt
has no quick taper at the handle and is stouter accordingly,
as it has a much heavier line to work. Bottom fishing rods
are made stouter and shorter than fly rods. Spinning and

202 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

trolling rods are longer and stiffer. A fly rod, if well made,
should not show much depression of the point when held
horizontally. It ought to be as nearly straight as possible,
because, in striking a fish, its action should correspond at
once to that of the wrist. If it depresses much it is apt to be
slow, too slow for hooking the nimble trout. The manu-
facture of split cane rods was originally an English idea,
but it was left to our American cousins to work this out to
perfection, and they still claim that they alone can build
these rods in the proper style. However, good rods are now
built in England, and the great matter is to procure proper
canes, and use no trash. These are called Calcutta bamboos.
There are two sorts, the "male" and the "female." The
former selected makes the more perfect split rod, and is rent
or sawn into sections longitudinally, the soft inside wood is
taken away, and the outside silicious barked sections are
cemented up again into hexagonal shape. Some of these
rods have a steel wire running up the centre. A cane
built rod twrelve feet long weighs from twelve ounces to
fourteen ounces only, but at the same time is strong
and pliable. These rods will not bear as rough usage
as a solid wood rod, and are so expensive owing to the
difficulty of their manufacture and the high class skill
required to get them up properly, that they are only to be
found in the hands of the more wealthy. An interesting
and detailed account of split cane rods is given by Dr.
Henshall in his " Book of the Black Bass." The ordinary
Indian or Japanese canes are chosen for rods according to
size, and jointed in their natural state, care being taken not
to rasp the joints of the canes down, and thereby weaken
them. In all rods stress should be laid upon the balance,
when taken in the hand. The difference between a well-

203

balanced rod and an- imperfect one is about the same as
between a gun that comes up to the shoulder perfectly and
one that does not ; with the latter a good shot may prove a
"duffer," with the former a poor shot may carry off the prize
in a " hot corner." If a rod is not balanced to suit a
man the arm soon tires, and when this takes place the
angler wearies, and when he wearies he ceases to enjoy his
sport ; therefore, the purchaser should carefully choose
a rod suitable to his strength of arm and capability, when
pleasure and profit will be the result. Some fly rods
have hollow butts to carry spare tops, but these are ob-
jectionable and have not the play of a solid built rod,
and of necessity are very large in the handle. The Castle-
connell rods are small in the handle and taper slightly right
away from the butt. These rods are top heavy, but are
powerful, and lift a long line with remarkable ease and
give good command when playing a strong fish.

Rod Straps are simple but very useful articles, for
strapping together a bundle of rods, nets, &c. They should
be made of nice pliable leather, with buckles and tongues.

Rudd (Leuciscus erythropthalmus) are found in many
of the rivers and lakes of the United Kingdom. They are
supposed to be a distinct breed, although some affirm
they are the produce of the bream and the roach. They
live on insects, and may be angled for same as the roach,
with paste, gentles, or small red worms. They seldom attain
more than one pound in weight. The tackle used should
be strong and fine. When fishing for them with the arti-
ficial fly, allow it to sink, rest a little, and then draw
towards the surface. The rudd swim in shoals, spawn in
April and May, and are considered better fish for the table
than roach. The name is a corruption of " red eye," from

204 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

the peculiar bright crimson-yellowish colour of the iris.
They are said to be more prolific than the roach.

Ruffe, The, or Pope (Gymnocephalus cerniid). — A
little fish found in a few of the rivers of England. It some-
what resembles the perch : in form more slender, rarely
exceeding the length of six inches. The teeth are small
and disposed in rows ; the colour of the back and sides a
dusky olive green, dotted with black spots ; the belly
yellow ; dorsal fin partly spinous and partly soft; and the
body is covered with rough, closely-built scales. Spawns
in April, and is gregarious. Ruffe fishing is somewhat
similar to perch fishing. The best lure is a small, well-
scoured, red worm, baited on a No. 6 round bend or
Limerick hook, with a quill float attached. The bait should
touch the bottom. Strike at once, the moment the bite is
felt. These fish bite greedily, nearly always pouching
the bait, so that the disgorger is in constant requisition
or the hook cut out with the knife. Ruffe love quiet,
deep pools writh muddy bottoms, where the stream runs
slowly. They are also to be found in canals and ponds,
give fair sport to the young angler, and when in the taking
humour can be angled for with very coarse tackle. They
form suitable live baits for pike fishing, their colour being
peculiarly attractive.

Salmon (Salmo salar) is by far the most important of
all the fresh water fishes, both as to sport and commercial
value. It possesses an exceedingly handsome shape. The
head is small ; mouth well furnished with teeth ; the lateral
line is almost straight ; the back and belly of nearly equal
convexity ; and scales small. The colour of the back when
in season is purplish black, changing to silver grey on the
sides and white on the belly. The male fish is furnished

THE BRITISH ANGLER S LEXICON.

205

with irregular dark copper- coloured spots on either side of
the lateral line. Salmon grow to a large size, having been
caught above eighty pounds weight. Fish weighing forty
and forty-five pounds are by no means rare, but the
average weight is twenty-five pounds. Salmon feed on
small fish, shell fish, molluscs, and insects, and not only
digest their food rapidly, but eject it so quickly when
caught either by rod or net, that on post mortem "examination
their stomachs are always found empty. This fact has led
to the popular fallacy that salmon do not feed in the rivers.
The idea is absurd ; if they do not eat, why do they take

THE SALMON.

worm, minnow, prawn, shrimp, to say nothing of the natural
and artificial fly ? It may be noted here that the common
trout often ejects partly-digested food after it has been safe
in the landing net. The fry are hatched in the spring, the
parents having ascended the rivers the previous autumn
and deposited their spawn in suitable gravel furrows or
beds chosen out by themselves. The young make their
appearance in about twenty weeks, and are about five-
eighths of an inch long — mostly head and eyes, the body
comparatively small. Attached to this latter is the yolk
sac, which nourishes the little creatures for five or six
weeks. At this period of their existence they are liable to be

206 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

injured in many ways, and to become the prey of countless
enemies among the fish and fowl tribe. They are now
called parr, and are about two inches long, the body fur-
nished with transverse bars. By the end of May they are
from three to four inches long, feed greedily on every living
thing which may be of a size to swallow, and are amongst
the greatest pests that the trout fisher encounters — rising at
his fly, hooking themselves, and having to be thrown back
again time after time, until the angler has to give up in
disgust. By autumn they have reached a length of five or
six inches, and remaining in the river all winter, by the fol-
lowing April assume a more elegant form and brighter colour,
and are called smolts. Until they have made this change of
costume they would not be able to live in the salt water.
They now, as smolts, collect in shoals of from fifty to sixty,
and, assisted by the spring floods, make for the sea. They
generally rest awhile in the brackish water at the mouth of
the river, in order that they may acclimatise themselves (so
to speak) ; after which they depart into the salt water,
wrhere they, finding nutritive and richer food, soon arive at
a very respectable size and weight. In July and August
they commence to return to their native rivers, and are now
known as grilse or peel. They in turn deposit their spawn,
return in the following spring to the sea, and are sub-
sequently known as salmon. The tails get more of a
square form, their scales hard and not so easily detached as
when in the grilse state, and they have increased very much
in weight. After spawning, the fish get very thin and
weak, and in this condition are totally unfit for food, and
are known as " kelts " or " spent " fish. They drop down
to deep, quiet portions of the river, remaining until their
strength begins to return, gradually making their way to

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 207

the sea, and feeding voraciously on all that comes in their
way, even devouring their own species. At each return to
and from the sea, salmon remain for a time in the brackish
water, until they acclimatise themselves. Some of the
smolts do not go to the sea the first season, but remain in
the river, and do not increase much in size. Many run up
the rivers in January, February, and March, and it has
been found that they have not undergone the usual change
to the ''grilse" state, but are veritable salmon in colour and
form, attaining the weight of nine or ten pounds, affording
an early supply for the tables of the more wealthy.
These fish ascend the higher tributaries of the stream,
spawn soon in the autumn, and perpetuate the breed of early
running salmon. The muscular power of the salmon is
great ; in their passage up the rivers, when they arrive at
some of the many weirs or obstructions which bar their
progress, they will leap out of the water to the height of
several feet in their endeavour to surmount the obstacles.
It is manifestly obvious that to increase the value of a salmon
river every facility in the way of "gaps," "ladders," &c,
should be provided, in order that the fish may get up the
stream with as little trouble as possible. It would be
difficult to arrive at anything like the value of the salmon
fisheries of Great Britain and Ireland, but it may be
reckoned by hundreds of thousands of pounds. For some
years past salmon were getting rather scarce ; but now that
fishery owners recognise and use the means of artificially
supplying young fish to the rivers there is a steady increase
in the numbers. The last month in the year is about the
only time when salmon may not be angled for with rod and
line in one or other of the rivers of the country. In the
north of Scotland many of the rivers open on New Year's

208 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Day, and good fresh fish are caught, even when the ice has
to be broken on the pools ere the angler can cast his fly.
The salmon of North America is somewhat different from
the British species. It is not of so deep a red in the flesh,
and the flavour is not so rich. Nevertheless, it is a fine
fish, and is so plentiful in many of the rivers there that
establishments have been raised on the banks to utilise,
by canning, the countless myriads available, and many
thousands of tons are preserved annually and exported over
the globe. These American fish are very active. They
ascend the rivers for hundreds of miles, and are so plentiful
as to actually impede navigation. They are caught by
every conceivable means — nets, spears, boxes, and wheels
made to revolve with floats, which lift the fish and deposit
them in boats made for the purpose.

Salmon Bag's. — The superior ones are generally
made of brown tanned canvas, waterproof, with extra
pockets for book, flask, &c. They are used for carrying
salmon, sea trout, pike, or any large fish. (See " Bags.")

Salmon Fishing is the grandest of all sport. No
fish that swims makes so determined a fight for liberty as
the salmon, and, for its size, has so powerful a command
over its muscles. It requires strength, energy, patience,
and ability to succeed in its capture. Trout are more
wrary — require greater skill and judgment in their pursuit
and capture — but they have not the power of the salmon. It
is a different style of angling from that of trout. The rod is
much longer and heavier, the line likewise, and everything
connected with it is of the strongest and most perfect
in its working. The favourite lure is the fly, and if
this is large, it is generally considered that one is sufficient.
If the flies are medium or small-sized, two are sometimes

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 209

attached to the cast — one at the point of the casting line
and one about three feet higher up. The salmon fly,
having a loop attached to it, is easily fastened by any
of the various knots to the casting line ; care should be
taken to have this latter well damped and pliable before
making the attachment. Many anglers keep their traces or
casting lines in a damp cloth for hours before proceeding
to use them, as gut is too brittle when in a dry state to
stand the wear and tear of a run with a good fighting fish.
The rod is usually from seventeen to eighteen feet long ; it
is used with both hands, one above the reel or winch, and
one below. The position of the hands is varied with the
style of casting. If the angler is using the left hand
casting, that is bringing the line round over the left shoulder,
the left hand is uppermost ; if the right hand casting is
used the right hand is uppermost. However, this need
not be made a hard and fast rule, as the angler will have
to shift his hands from time to time, in order that he may
relieve the strain on the muscles of his back and arms. In
casting, it should be done across, and if anything rather
down-stream, allowing the fly or flies to sink well, and
as little of the main line as possible to be dragged either
through the water or on the surface. The rod being almost
at right angles to the body, the current sweeps the flies
round, and at the same time the rod is raised up stream,
and worked with a long jigging motion, so as to impart
liveliness to the fly, which continues to come round
until it is close to the bank upon which the angler is
standing, with the rod point over the shoulder, when
the cast may again be made about one yard lower down.
At the finish of the draw, be careful to have sufficient
command over the rod to strike if a fish should make a

N

210 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

rise, for if the fly is too close, the line slack, and the rod
behind the shoulder, it would be almost impossible to make
a successful hooking of the fish in this position. In striking
a salmon, a good stiff long draw is sufficient. As a rule
the touch is felt as he closes his mouth on the fly, and the
hooking is generally pretty safe. Watch carefully when
the fly, after first alighting on the water, is being brought
round, as this is a very likely time for a fish to make a dart
at it, being enticingly offered and moving in a natural
manner, neither too fast nor too slow, the water close to
the bank running as a rule more sluggish than in the centre
of the current. Bear in mind when a salmon is hooked to
be tender with him at first. He will soon find out that his
liberty is threatened without this fact being brought too
forcibly before him, by pulling or hauling. Allow him time ;
if he wants line let him have it, but always reel up when
he slacks his speed of running, and keep abreast of him by
walking either up or down the bank. If he springs out of
the water, as he may do several times, lower the rod when
he is falling back ; this will prevent him hitting the line
with his tail, which he is trying to do. There are several
modes of casting, such as " scotching" or ''cutting." These
will be learnt in due time by the angler, when he gets into
positions where the ordinary style of casting will not suit ;
but he will require to see them done — no description will
be of use. Many anglers invent styles of casting for them-
selves. As a rule, when a man goes salmon fishing he is
generally attended by some one who understands all about
the sport, and from whom he may get information and
instruction if he takes the right wTay of asking for it.
When the fish is well played and begins to show signs of
giving up, the butt may then be given pretty heavy, and

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 211

the fish towed in to a suitable spot, when he can be
gaffed. Occasionally, at the last, he begins to churn and
flounder on the top of the water, and in this way
manages to get free. It is difficult to give any instruction
about what should be done when this takes place. If he
would sink under the surface, drop point of rod gradually
and allow him to do so ; if he will not, keep the line
firm, and allow him to waste his energies. Do not
pull in hard, as, when in the " flurry," as it is called,
the buoyancy of the fish is not great, and, consequently,
too heavy a weight would be on the hook and casting
line ; whereas, if he is submerged totally, the weight is
comparatively light. If a fish sulks, goes to the bottom, and
looks as if he determined to stay there, you must only have
patience. Keep a steady stiff line on him, and in the long
run he will yield ; but it is very tiresome on the arms.
Sometimes the attendant has to keep throwing in stones
to get the fish to move, and when he does, it is with a
very sudden, quick rush, so be on the watch to see
that the line is free from any catch. Occasionally a
salmon, especially a fresh run one, shoots along the
surface, not unlike a water bird. He runs line out, and
suddenly turns and rushes right back. When this takes
place, lose no time in running back too, if the ground
permits, reeling up at same time, else there will be a lot of
slack line, which in all cases is dangerous. Salmon may
also be angled for with spoons, by trolling, with both live
and artificial minnows, as well as by worms or bait. All of
these methods are treated under their separate headings.
The play nearly in all cases is the same, no matter what the
lure is. It is essential to keep a firm line all the time, and to
be both cool and vigilant. It would take up too much space

212 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

to enter into a detailed account of all the vagaries and
eccentricities of the fish, both before and after hooking ;
most of these will come before the salmon angler in the
pursuit of his sport. How, when weather and water are
perfect, and the river full of fish, they will steadfastly refuse
to take any lure, no matter how temptingly displayed.
Again, when water is very low and weather bright, and the
angler, following the correct rule, will put up his smallest fly
without receiving any response, he alters his tactics and
putting on his cast a fly almost as large and brightly coloured
as a canary will succeed in hooking fish after fish,
Often the fly has to be discarded and the spoon put up, and
this again to give way to the minnow, the par-tail, or the
tail of an eel (the latter a very taking bait in the evening
on many salmon rivers in the south of Ireland), and after
all to find the only successful lure would be a worm, or a
bunch of these reptiles. Therefore the angler should never
despair, but keep both his brain and his body actively
employed. Try one thing after another. It is weary work,
but at the first mad rush of a lively " springer," or the
determined pull of a lusty summer fish, all the weariness
will fade like " snow before the sun." Then begins a
stirring fight. The fear that the fish is not well hooked —
the hope that that spring into the air was the last — the
momentary cessation of the beating of the heart as the line
feels slack, to be sent throbbing again by the certainty that
all is still right — then the anxiety about the bringing in and
landing, and, to crown all, the exultation and the pride
when the white gleaming sides of the fish lie high and dry
on the grassy bank — these give a zest to this sport that
makes all others tame beside it. For more detailed accounts

THE BRITISH ANGLER S LEXICON.

213

of salmon angling let the reader consult Francis, Stoddart,
Colquohoun, and Day.

Salmon Flies.— It would have a tendency to puzzle
the young angler were an exhaustive list of these flies to be
noted down. Should he not be satisfied with the ones
mentioned herewith, let him consult "A Book on Angling,"
by Francis Francis, and in it he will find a long array.
The range is a very wide one, and to possess one-third of it

SALMON FLIES.

would entail the ownership of a long purse and a port*
manteau to carry them. There are several very well
known standard flies, nearly always dressed in a similar
style ; they are safe ones to have, and are given in detail.
It is wise, however, to have these patterns, or indeed any
patterns, dressed on various sizes of hooks, as sometimes
a small fly will be taken by the fish when a large one of
the same dressing would not be looked at, and vice versa.
It is also well to have a selection showing a decided con-
trast, as when a sombre-coloured fly is of no use, a very

214 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

gaudy one may prove serviceable. When starting on a
salmon angling excursion consult a well-known fly dresser
as to the flies suitable for the particular district about to
be visited, and should the angler meet with another fisher
who is having good sport, let him procure from him a
pattern and send it to his fly dresser to have a few made
exactly the same. It is of no use getting too many, as
what will succeed well one week may not be of any use
the next. The flies should be dressed on the " Dublin-
Limerick " shaped hooks, and see that they are well tem-
pered and perfect, as it is most annoying, after a prolonged
tussle with a good and game fish, to lose him at the last,
by either the hook drawing out or breaking off short.

Jock Scott — tag, silver twist and golden floss ; tail, one topping and
one Indian crow feather ; body, in two joints, gold-coloured floss the
lowest, and black floss the upper : from the joint are tied two or three
toucan points, and over the butts of them, at the joint, two turns of
black ostrich herl ; silver twist and a black hackle over the joint, and
speckled gallina at shoulder ; wing, mixed, a white turkey's slip in
the middle, fibres of bustard, pintail, teal, brown mallard, and yellow,
red, and green parrot ; one topping over all ; blue macaw horns ;
cheeks, kingfisher or blue chatterer ; sides, jungle fowl.

Black and Gold — tag, silver twist ; one topping and one Indian crow,
with black ostrich herl butt ; two joints, lowermost one gold tinsel
ribbed with silver twist, black silk ribbed with silver on upper joint ;
two Indian crow feathers springing from butt of ostrich herl between
joints ; hackle, claret over the black, golden olive and jay hackle over
at shoulder ; wing, same as Jock Scott, but with jungle cock cheeks.
This fly is considered by many to be an improvement on Jock Scott.

Silver Doctor — tag, silver twist and yellow floss ; tail, golden pheasant
topping ; butt, red wool ; body, flat silver tinsel, ribbed with fine silver
oval ; light blue hackle and gallina at shoulder ; wings, golden pheasant
tail, bustard, tippet, pintail, wood duck, yellow, red, and blue swan ;
jungle cock cheeks, mallard topping over ; blue macaw horns ; head,
red wool.

Golden Parson— tag, silver tinsel and mauve floss ; tail, two toppings, a
few sprigs of ruff feather and a kingfisher ; body, two turns of golden
floss silk, then golden pig's wool, merging into orange ; golden orange

215

hackle over wool, red orange backle over that, and two or three more
toppings, tied in at the breast instead of shoulder hackle ; icings, a
tippet or ruff feather, with a cock of the rock (not the squared feathers)
on either side and one at>ove ; strips of pintail on either side, and as
many golden pheasant toppings as can be piled on — seven or eight.

The Butcher — tag, gold twist and dark orange floss ; tail, one topping ;
butt, black ostrich herl ; body, two or three turns of claret, ditto of
medium blue, ditto of red, and the rest of dark blue pig's wool ; broad
silver twist ; medium red claret hackle ; gallina on shoulder ; under
wing a golden pheasant tippet and rump feather, over them strips of
brown mallard, bustard, peacock, wood duck, and blue and yellow
swan ; black head.

Durham Ranger — tag, silver tinsel and gold floss ; tail, one topping and
Indian crow; butt, two turns of black herl ; body, two turns light orange
floss, then two of dark orange, then claret, and black pig's wool re-
spectively ; black wool to be picked out at breast ; over the whole of
the wool a coch-y-bondu hackle (red with black centre) stained a
bright orange, two turns black hackle over it, and a light blue hackle
at the shoulder ; icing, a pair of largish jungle cock in centre, double
golden pheasant tippet on either side, one topping over all ; blue
macaw ribs ; and a kingfisher feather on either cheek.

The Priest — tag, gold twist and dark blue floss ; tail, a topping and
pale red ibis or flamingo ; bvtt, black ostrich ; body, three turns orange
floss, the rest dirty olive brown mohair, gold tinsel, and silver twist ;
hackle, golden olive ; medium blue at shoulders ; icing, dark turkey or
cock pheasant tail, over that fibres of bustard and bright bustard,
brown mallard, and a plentiful mixture of green swan sprigs ; head,
red.

Orange and Grouse — tag, silver tinsel ; tail, a topping and kingfisher
feather ; butt, black ostrich ; body, three turns of puce or lake floss,
the rest of light orange floss, silver tinsel ; hackle, largish grouse,
trimmed on breast, not on back ; three or four toppings over it for
wings ; blue jay at shoulder ; blue macaw ribs ; and black head. The
grouse fibres help wings.

The Childers — tag, silver twist and light blue silk ; tail, a topping with
strands of red macaw, powdered blue macaw, and pintail ; butt, black
herl ; body, two turns of light yellow silk continuing with light yellow
seal's fur, leaving one-fifth at the shoulder for scarlet seal's fur, ribbed
silver lace and silver tinsel ; hackle, a white furnace hackle dyed light
yellow ; throat, a scarlet hackle and light widgeon ; wings, golden
pheasant tippet and tail, turkey, silver pheasant, pintail, summer

2l6 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

cluck, bustard, powdered blue macaw, parrot, red macaw, and gallina,
with two strips of mallard above and a topping ; horns, blue macaw ;
cheeks, chatterer; head,' black herl.

The Popham— tag, gold twist ; tail, a topping and Indian crow ; butt,
black herl ; body, in three equal sections butted with black herl — the
first dark orange silk ribbed with fine gold tinsel having Indian crow
above and below, the second or middle joint yellow silk with similar
ribbing and crow's feathers as before, the third light blue silk and
silver ribbing with the Indian crow repeated ; hackle, jay at the
throat only ; wings, tippet, teal, gallina, golden pheasant tail, parrot,
light brown mottled turkey, bustard, red macaw, yellow macaw (swan
dyed yellow instead of yellow macaw for large sizes), with two strips of
mallard above, and a topping ; cheeks, chatterer ; horns, blue macaw ;
head, black herl.

The Thunder and Lightning — tag, gold twist and yellow silk ; tail, a
topping ; butt, black herl ; body, black silk, ribbed gold tinsel ; hackle,
from first turn of tinsel, orange; throat, jay; wings, mallard, in strips
with a topping ; sides, jungle fowl ; horns, blue macaw ; head, black
herl.

The Silver Grey — tag, silver twist and yellow silk ; tail, a topping,
unbarred summer duck, and two strands of blue macaw ; butt, black
herl ; body, silver tinsel (flat) ribbed with silver tinsel (oval) ; hackle,
from first turn of ribs, a silver- white coch-y-bondu ; throat, light
widgeon ; icings, silver pheasant, bustard, golden pheasant tail, pintail,
powdered blue macaw, gallina, swan dyed yellow, two strips mallard
above and a topping ; sides, jungle fowl ; horns, blue macaw ; head,
black Berlin wool.

The Fiery Brown— tag, gold twist and light orange silk ; tail, a
topping ; body, fiery brown seal's fur, ribbed gold tinsel ; hackle, from
first turn of tinsel, fiery brown ; wings, tippet strands between broad
strips of mallard ; horns, blue macaw ; head, black herl.

The Kate — tag, silver tinsel and light yellow flcss ; tail, a topping with
short kingfisher feather ; body, ruby floss, two or three turns, and
darkish red pig's wool picked out at breast ; orange hackle at shoulder,
silver twist ; light mixed wing, tippet sprigs, black partridge (or pin-
tail, if the fibres be not long enough), bustard, wood duck, mallard,
blue, red, green, and yellow sprigs, one topping over all, jungle cock
at shoulders, blue macaw ribs ; black head.

The Major — tag, silver twist and ruby floss ; tail, fibres of bustard
hackle, tippet and a topping ; body, composite, viz., two turns of
medium blue, ditto of dark orange, about four or five of bright claret,

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 217

and two more of blue pig's wool, over this silver tinsel and gold twist
side by side ; a red claret hackle, commencing from the orange wool ;
the blue wool picked out in longish fibres at the shoulder, over this a
bustard hackle, then the wing, and over that a yellow hackle ; the
wing is composed of a white ribbed snipe's feather, with longish tippet
on either side, over this bustard and gold pheasant tail in strips, with
red, blue, and greenish-yellow fibres, and over all topping ; black
head.

The Dun Wing- -tail, one topping and sprigs of tippet ; body, light
orange, red-claret, darkish blue and black pig's wool in about equa
portions merging into each other ; broadish silver tinsel ; black hackle
down to the red wool, a few fibres of the blue wool picked out at
breast ; wings, two strips from the dun brown feather sometimes found
in the tail of a turkey.

The Candlestick ±VLaker— body, lower half black silk, upper black pig's
wool, very bushy towards the shoulder and picked out at the breast ;
hackle, golden olive, with claret at the shoulder ; broad silver tinsel
over ; tail, scarlet ibis and woodcock ; iving, three or four toppings, with
doubled jungle cock on either side.

The Silver Wilkinson — tag, gold twist ; tail, golden pheasant topping ;
butt, scarlet wool ; body, silver tinsel, ribbed with gold twist ; hackle,
pale blue run down body ; throat, jay ; wings, fibres of golden pheasant
tail, bustard, widgeon, golden pheasant tippet, dyed red swan, topping
over all ; horns, blue macaw ; head, scarlet wool,

The Lupus — tag, gold twist and blue floss ; tail, one topping, two Indian
crow, and one wood duck barred feather ; butt, green peacock's herl ;
body, oval silver with gold twist ; pale claret body hackles ; dark claret
shoulder hackles, with blue jay over ; wings, green peacock, two
Amherst pheasant toppings, slips of bustard and jungle cock ; cheeks,
blue chatterer ; ribs, macaw, blue and red. This has been successful
in the late season, especially in heavy water.

Lord Randolph— tag, silver twist and pale blue floss ; tail, one topping
and two Indian crows ; butt, black ostrich herl ; body, gold tinsel, ribbed
with silver twist ; golden hackle over the body ; shoidder, golden olive,
with blue hackle over ; wings, nine or ten toppings ; blue chatterer
cheeks and macaw ribs. This fly has been very successful, and is
intended to imitate a shrimp.

The Blue Doctor — tag, three or four turns of fine silver twist and two
or three turns of yellow floss silk ; tail, golden pheasant topping and a
few fibres of golden pheasant tippet ; butt> a turn or two of scarlet
crewel ; body, pale blue floss silk, ribbed with silver tinsel and blue
hackles wound by the side of tinsel from tail to head, blue jay's feather

2l8

at shoulder (in large flies the tinsel may be rendered more conspicuous
by the addition of silver twist wound on by the side of the silver
tinsel) ; the wing is mixed, containing fibres of bustard, turkey, golden
pheasant tail and tippet, mallard, claret, blue, and yellow fibres of
dyed swan feather ; jungle cock neck feather at each side of wing as
cheeks ; also fibres of blue and buff macaw as feelers, and golden
pheasant topping over all ; head, scarlet crewel.

The Black Doctor — tag, three or four turns of silver tinsel and two-
turns of yellow floss silk ; tail, golden pheasant topping and very small
jungle fowl feather ; butt, a turn of scarlet crewel ; body, black floss
silk, ribbed with silver tinsel and black hackle wound by the side of
the tinsel from tail to head, blue jay's feather at shoulder ; the wing is
mixed, containing fibres of bustard, turkey, golden pheasant tail and
tippet, mallard, claret, blue and yellow fibres of dyed swan feathers ?
jungle cock neck feather at each side of wing as cheeks ; also fibres of
blue and buff macaw as feelers, and golden pheasant topping over all ;.
head, scarlet crewel.

The Dunkeld — tag, three or four turns of fine silver oval thread and a
turn or two of pale blue floss silk ; tail, golden pheasant topping and a
few fibres of American wood duck feather (not barred) ; butt, black
ostrich herl ; body, three turns of light orange floss silk, the rest same
coloured seal's fur well teased out, ribbed with silver tinsel ; hackle,
light blue ; tvings, two strips of dark turkey with white tips, golden
pheasant tail, peacock snow feather, dyed yellow, claret, and blue
swan, a few fibres of American wood duck (barred feather) ; homx, blue
and buff macaw ; head, black wool.

Salmon Fly Cases (Patent) are useful receptacles
for salmon flies, made of tin, in various sizes, japanned
outside and white enamelled inside. It will be seen by
referring to the illustration on the following page that the
flies are held by means of German silver springs, which
permit them to be put on or taken off with the greatest
facility.

Salmon Fly Making* Materials embrace feathers

from the golden pheasant crest and tail, jungle cock neck,
summer duck, bustard, mallard, jay, turkey, tucan, Indian
crow, red ibis, kingfisher, blue chatterer, and many other
foreign birds ; also tail feathers from the blue and red

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

219.

macaw, with silks of all shades (floss and twisted), gold and
silver tinsels and threads, dyed hackles of different sizes,
turkey, goose, and swan feathers dyed, likewise wax and
varnish.

SALMON FLY CASE.

Salmon Fly Making Tools consist of table vicer
small files, scissors, needles, and knife.

Sandwich, The.— Most anglers like to carry some-
thing wherewith to sustain the inner man ; and as fish,
especially trout, as a rule cease biting greedily between
the hours of one and three o'clock, the angler should take
this opportunity of eating his lunch. Sandwiches made in
the usual manner, of slices of bread buttered and a layer of
meat and mustard placed between them, wrapped up in
paper, are generally very dry and tasteless articles of diet.
The better plan is to provide oneself with a proper
sandwich case, which can be had at almost any hard-
ware or tackle shop ; this can be easily carried in the
pocket or pannier. In the bottom of this case place the

220 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

slices of meat — whether ham, beef, mutton, or fowl — by
themselves ; above these put a sheet of paper, the bread
cut in slices, a little pat of butter, some salt, and dry-
mustard ; then, with the aid of the pocket knife and a little
water, a very fresh and palatable sandwich can be made up
on the banks of the stream. A handy sandwich, highly
recommended by a hunting man, is made by having slices
of bread cut to fit the case. Toast these, and cover with a
good layer of potted meat ; then cut up into pieces about
one inch square, and pack in layers. This will keep
fresh, good, and tasty all day long. Hard-boiled eggs, cut
in slices, form a useful adjunct to the lunch ; somewhat in-
digestible, but the exercise which an angler necessarily takes
generally gets rid of any trouble. An apple or pear is also
very refreshing, and serves better to assauge thirst than
drinking water, which is objectionable. The safest drink is
good whiskey and water ; those who object to alcohol must
take their chance of procuring a glass of milk at a cottage
•or farm, taking care to ascertain that no infectious disease
is in the house at the time. Typhoid fever is nearly always
communicated by milk. Bear in mind that nothing is more
apt to disagree with even the strongest stomach than a
draught of cold milk taken after hard exercise and long
abstinence from food. If possible, let the milk be heated or
have a dash of spirits in it. Never drink river water, unless
mixed with wine or spirits. A drink in moderation at a
spring or well is safe enough, provided the body is not
unduly heated.

SeiSSOPS. — Every angler should carry a pair of these
useful articles in his fly book. They are safer to use than a
penknife when cutting a fly out of the mouth of a fish, or
■clipping off the loose ends of casting line or fly links.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 221

Special patterns are made with large bools and fine
clipping points — used by nearly all fly dressers.

Sea Trout Flies are something like miniature salmon
flies, with brilliant bodies, the favourite colours being
various shades of red, orange, yellow, and blue, made from
fine mohair or silk. Wings : Principally mallard, natural
and dyed; grouse, natural and dyed; teal, and woodcock..

SEA TROUT FLIES.

Tails and hackles : Dark red cock's hackle, natural, and
heightened to a bright port wine colour by dyeing with
cochineal and tartar (q.v. " Staining Feathers"). The gut
upon which the hooks are tied should be strong and fine;
the hooks, for preference, Limerick shape, short in bend; a
springy wire is dangerous, as these fish fight gamely.

Sewen, The {Salmo cambrtcus), is a species closely
allied to the sea trout, principally confined to Wales,
also found in a few rivers in the south of England, and
supposed to be met with in the south of Lreland. It is
migratory in habit, and ascends rivers to spawn. It is
a very symmetrical fish, with small neat head, of a bright
steel colour, the back often profusely dotted over with
cross- shaped dark spots ; its flesh is much esteemed. As a
sporting fish it is nearly equal to the salmo trutta. The
best time to angle for it is in the evening late, withjine

222 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

tackle and a small fly. It occasionally is got up to sixteen
pounds, but the average weight is about five pounds.

Shapes of Hooks.— No. i is the Kirby ; No. 2,
round bent ; No. 3, sneck bent ; No. 4, Limerick. The

n

9\

Kirby and sneck bent are a little twisted to one side ; the
round bent and Limerick are flat hooks. There are a
number of other bends, but merely modifications of the
above.

Shoemaker's Wax is made by melting together
equal quantities of black pitch and resin ; when thoroughly
melted, a small quantity of butter or tallow is added to
soften the compound. The quantity of grease depends
upon the season of the year — more in cold and less in hot
weather. This wax can be obtained from shoemakers, and if
it has been used by them in their ordinary calling, give it a
preference, as the more it is handled the better grip it has
on the silk. Another sort is made by simmering, for ten
minutes, two ounces of resin, quarter-ounce bees' wax, and
quarter-ounce pitch ; then add as little tallow as possible to
make the wax sticky ; add this by degrees, working up with
the fingers until it is judged by the tenacity of the wax
that there is enough ; if too much, the wax gets greasy and
loses its holding powers. Another recipe : Melt over a
slow fire eight ounces black pitch, then add half-ounce
fresh butter; stir well, and pour out on a wet slab or into

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 223

water. If found to be too sticky, re-melt, and add a trifle
more butter. This makes a clean and tenacious wax.

Shot PlyePS are specially made for splitting shot and
nipping it on the line.

ShPimp, The {Crangon vulgaris). — A genus of crus-
taceans, allied to the lobster, crayfish, and prawn family,
of a greenish grey colour, dotted with small brown spots,
and rarely more than two inches long ; very abundant
on the British coasts wherever the shore is sandy. It is
esteemed as an article of food, and is generally obtained
by means of nets, in form like wide-mouthed bags, stretched
by a short cross beam at the end of a pole or shaft — the
shrimper wading up to the knees in the tide, and pushing
these along the sand. It is a deadly bait for salmon.

Shrimp Fishing fop Salmon is a very successful
and deadly method, so much so that in many rivers which
are strictly preserved the shrimp is not permitted to be used
as a bait by the bye-laws relating thereto, although the use
of it is not forbidden by Act of Parliament. If the shrimp
can be got fresh, it is plumped into boiling water containing
a little salt and saltpetre, which tends to toughen it and at
•the same time heighten the colour, which ought to be a
bright pink. It must not be boiled long, or it will get too
soft to be serviceable ; the tougher it is kept the better.
The shrimp may be baited on hooks similar to those used in
prawn fishing (q.v.). A simple style of baiting, and one in
common use in many of the Irish rivers, is as follows : —
Insert a round bend worm hook in the thorax of the shrimp,
carry down the body and bring out under tail ; push the
shrimp well up clear of the bend; then take another shrimp,
rather smaller, and insert the barb of the hook at the tail
and bring the point out halfway up the belly, leaving about

224 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

half an inch of the shrimp free. If the river is heavy, a BB
shot should be used close to the shrimp. A common wine
cork is slit on the side and the casting line inserted ; this
float should be so arranged as to keep the bait about one
foot off the. bottom. When a bite is seen to trouble the
float, do not be in a hurry to strike until it is fairly
taken down, when a strong upward pull or strike should be
given ; this detaches the cork, and the fish is played in the
ordinary way. Shrimps may be preserved in glycerine for
a length of time, but they are not so successful as the fresh
ones. Shrimp fishing is similar to prawn fishing.

Single Brazing. — A term applied to the male ferrule
when brazed only on the top portion.

SinkePS may be split shot (q.v.) or thin strips of sheet
lead, which can be wound round the casting line at any
distance from the hook ; various sorts are to be procured
at the tackle makers' shops. Sinkers give a good deal of
annoyance to anglers by catching on stones, causing loss of
time and tackle, and, unless in very heavy water, are
unnecessary.

Spike. — A piece of metal either of iron or brass, pointed
at the end, which can be screwed into the butt of the rod
or landing handle.

Split Shot are used as sinkers to regulate the speed of
the worm or creeper travelling down the current ; but,
except when the water is really heavy, interfering with the
natural movement of the lure is objectionable. Each shot
is generally No. 6 size, and can be split by placing the
blade of a penknife on it and giving a smart blow with a
stone. This makes a cut sufficiently deep to catch the gut
line in, which can be fastened by biting. When fishing
in rocky streams let the gut be very slightly caught, as

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 225

often the shot gets in between stones and cannot be
released without a break ; so if the catch is slight a gentle
pull will detach the shot and save the casting line. (See
"Shot Pliers.")

Spring Balances are occasionally carried by anglers
when fishing for large trout or salmon, as they can weigh
the fish after being killed, and the entry of such weight be
recorded in the note book. These are now made very neat

SPRING BALANCE

and handy to be carried either in the pannier or pocket.
The electro-plated ones are the easiest kept clean, and
can be fitted in a suitable leather case. Balances may
be had to weigh from one ounce up to sixty pounds.

Staining* Feathers.— Many of the feathers used as
wings and hackles for salmon, sea trout, and lake trout
flies, as well as hackles for brown trout flies, are stained or
heightened in colour, and for this purpose Crawshaw's dyes
are most suitable, easily applied, and possess a good range
of shades. A fast and beautiful stain, from a brilliant red
to a deep crimson, can be given to the red cock's hackles
by the following reliable recipe : Tie about one dozen of,
the hackles by the quills into a bunch, leaving one end of
the tying thread free to take hold of. Make a mordant
bath of alum and water, in strength one teaspoonful to a
teacupful of water. Pour a little of this into a small test
tube, and arrange over a spirit or other suitable lamp.
Immerse the feathers completely, and boil for fifteen

O

226 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

minutes. Then rinse these in warm water, and after
emptying out the alum solution fill the test tube again with
water ; add about one drachm of cochineal and a small
pinch of cream of tartar. Immerse the feathers in this, and
simmer gently for fifteen to thirty minutes — the longer
they are boiling, the deeper the shade. The feathers can
be examined from time to time, raising them from the
solution by means of the thread. When the desired depth
of colour is obtained, wash in clean water and dry in the
air. If a bluish shade is required, rinse the feathers in a
weak solution of ammonia and water. Claret stain : Same
mordant ; dye bath, madder and logwood. Orange : Same
mordant ; dye bath, first madder, then quercitron bark.
The stain given to mallard speckled feathers, imitating the
peculiar grey-green colour of the green drake wing, can be
obtained by boiling the feathers in a decoction of the
barbary root. Blue and green stains are seldom fast ;
altogether inferior to the natural colours of the feathers.

Steins. — In staining wood, the first thing is to get
rid of any greasy matter on the surface, such as may
arise from the hands using the oiled tools in shaping.
This can easily be done by applying a hot solution
of soda — washing or carbonate. After this, wash with
clean water and allow to dry. The wood is then in a
fit state to take any stain required. There are only
ane or two that are recommended to be used by the
angler for his rods, should he feel inclined to stain them
himself. The best of all, a rich brown colour, is very
simple, and has the advantage of preserving the wood ; it
is highly recommended. Brown stain : Take one ounce of
bi-chromate of potash or orange chrome crystals, dissolve
in boiling water — say two wine glasses, and lay aside. Then

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON 227

take one ounce of brown cutch, or the ordinary catechu of
commerce ; boil in as much water as will dissolve it ; add
about the size of a garden pea of sulphate of copper (blue
stone). Brush the wood over with this, and allow to dry
in the air, then give another coat, and again dry. The
longer this coat remains exposed, before the next process,
the darker the stain will be ; however, after a couple
of hours, a nice shade will be obtained. Now heat
the chrome mixture, and with a clean brush give the
wood a coat, and very soon a nice warm brown shade
will appear. It may have a second coat if not dark
enough. After remaining about four hours, and being
quite dry, the wood should be well washed in plain
water to get rid of the superfluous colour and permit,
it to take a good polish. Walnut stain : Water, one quart ;
washing soda, one and a-half ounces ; vandyke brown,
two and a-half ounces; bi-chromate of potash, quarter-
ounce ; boil for ten minutes, and apply either in hot
or cold state. Black stain : Boil one pound of logwood
in four quarts of water ; add a double handful of walnut
peel or oak galls ; boil up again, take out the logwood
chips, strain in a cloth, and add one pint of vinegar.
Apply this to the wood with a brush when boiling. Oak
stain : Equal parts of American potash and pearlash, two
ounces of each to a quart of water. This gives a good
permanent colour, but requires careful application, as the
American potash is a strong solvent, and will blister the
hands. It may be applied with a clean rag tied to a stick,
as it is so powerful that it would destroy a brush in a
few minutes ; keep it corked in a bottle ready for use. If
the wood takes too deep a shade, add a little water. These
four stains are the most suitable ones for rods, landing net

228 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

handles or rings ; other colours are objectionable. Gut
should be stained a bluish grey or a muddy yellow colour.
The first colour can be obtained by steeping the gut
in ink free from acid, slightly diluted with water, or by
putting it into a decoction of warm logwood half an hour,
and then immersing in a weak solution of alum and water,
a tablespoonful to half a pint of warm water. For a muddy
yellow colour, let the gut lie in a warm decoction of onion
peel until the shade is obtained, or steep in tea or coffee,
or in a decoction of green walnuts. A grassy green can be
obtained by boiling a small piece of green baize, and
steeping the gut in when warm. A very slight change in
colour is all that is necessary.

Stone Fly BOX.— This is made for carrying the live
flies, with a sliding lid at the top for dropping them in.
The best is made to strap round the waist. The flies are
taken out by raising the slide at the end. (See article on
"Stone Fly.")

Stoppers are the plugs used to insert into the female
ferrules of the rod after it is taken to pieces and before
placing in the bag.

Straps are necessary to carry the fishing basket slung
over the angler's shoulder. They are usually made of
girth web, with leather points, tongued and buckled. An
advantage is to have a waistbelt in connection with the
strap, to ease the shoulder. The "Facile" is an improve-
ment on the old plain strap, and when slung over the left
shoulder it is claimed that it affords perfect- freedom of the
arm, at the same time keeping the basket in position by
the waiststrap, no matter how vigorous the action of the
body may be; it is also easily detached. Leathei straps

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 22')

are useful for binding up rods for the convenience of
carrying-.

Striking? is the action of driving home the barb of the
sharp hook into a fish's mouth ere it can be ejected, and to
accomplish this object satisfactorily, requires both judgment
and skill. Some anglers strike too slow, some too fast, and
many not at all, trusting to the fish hooking itself firmly — as
it sometimes does. Striking is rather an objectionable term
to use as far as trout are concerned, as in their case the
motion of the wrist upwards or sideways is quite sufficient
to get a good hold ; the hooks being so sharp and the
trout's mouth not very hard, the weight of the line is very
nearly sufficient to accomplish the desired effect. Some
trout come what is called " short " at a fly, just touching
it, one might say smelling it, and turning off sharp without
seeming to take the fly in the mouth at all. With these
gentlemen it takes quick work and good eyesight, as the
instant the little boil made by the trout is seen, or the flash
of the fish, the wrist should be turned, and there is a chance
of the hook getting embedded somewhere about the jaw.
When a jag (q.v.) is felt, always respond with the striking
motion, as sometimes a hook touches a cartilage or bone
and does not penetrate, and the strike will cause it to slip
off and stick in a softer place. With salmon the strike is
different. Some anglers give a quick jerk when they see
the boil or feel the fish. The proper way is to give a
steady, strong, dead upward pull, with the line running
through the fingers, and this only at feeling the touch, which
should be very perceptible. In trout fishing, when striking,
the line should not be touched by the hand at all, as
the check on the reel gives quite sufficient resistance, and
if there is a sudden rush of the fish, which may be a strong

230 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

one, there is less danger of a break, as the reel will respond
at once. In pike fishing the strike should be a strong one,
as sometimes this fish gets the bait across his mouth, and it
has to be pulled round to get the hooks into the jaw, which
is a hard one. If the trout rod is whippy, when the hand or
wrist moves to strike, the angler will notice that although
he raises the butt with his hand, yet the point depresses for
a moment, which slacks the line in place of tightening it,
so that he must humour the motion of his stroke to prevent
this — very often the result of an involuntary downward
motion of the wrist before the upward motion takes
place, as if the angler wished to emphasize his striking by
backing, so to speak, on his ground before he made the
jump. With a stiff-topped rod this downward bending is
not so apt to occur, and, as a rule, a stiff rod will strike
quicker than a whippy one. More fish are lost, especially
trout, by slow striking than by quick.

Swims are chosen portions of any stream or river
where it is desirous to congregate fish by feeding them
with ground bait, thus giving the angler a better chance
of capturing them with his artificial bait or other lure. It
is usual to bait these swims over night, and barbel, chub,
gudgeon, and other ground fish may be caught in numbers
by judicious management. The ground bait should be
thrown in above the swim, after judging how the current
will carry it, so as to allow it to settle on the bottom of the
chosen spot, and not be carried past it by the stream.

Swivels are indispensable articles used in spinning
tackle, for attaching the various artificial and live baits to
the traces, and preventing the main line getting twisted.
Among the varieties, the most useful and common are
box, hook, spring, buckle, and watch spring. These are

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

231

made from brass, steel, and German silver, and are of
different sizes. It is well for the angler to have an
assortment of these in his stock. Be careful to see that the

BOX SWIVELS.

necks run smoothly, without any tendency to get jammed ;
a little oil applied before and after use will assist the easy
working of the swivels.

Tackle means nearly every article that an angler
requires for his sport — lines, reels, spoons, minnows,
traces, flights, hooks, wax, thread, gut, scissors, &c.
These should always be kept in a box devoted to the
purpose. A most suitable one is a deed box, such as
lawyers use, which can be had of various sizes, made
of strong block tin, with a close-fitting lid, handles
top and sides, and a good lock, It can be fitted in-
ternally with trays to lift out, and also sub-divided into
suitable partitions to hold the various articles required,
and if carefully fitted up it is wonderful what a number
can be stowed away easily in a small space. Any
tinsmith can make these trays and divisions ; they cost
very little ; so the angler starting on a fishing excursion
may have his mind easy when he knows that all his
requirements are in the box, which he can carry with
him. Let the bottoms of the trays be lined with loose

2^2 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

pieces of baize, and the casting line or gut partitions
with chamois leather. The name and address should be
either painted on the lid or engraved on a small brass
plate. The inside of the box should be japanned and the
outside painted and varnished.

Tackle Cases. — These are made very much in the
shape of a fly book, but contain a box to hold lines, floats,
and hooks, and are only used by the bottom fisher.

Tanned Twill. — A strong material, waterproofed
and made into fishing stockings and trousers. (See
"Waders.")

Teneh {Tinea), a genus of fishes of the family of the
cyprinidas. It is thick in proportion to its length, the
scales are small and slimy, is leather-mouthed, and has a
barbel at each side of the rnouth. The teeth on the pharynx
are compressed and club-shaped ; tail nearly square and

THE TENCH.

very broad. The colour of the back is of a dark dusky
yellow, sometimes inclining to a greenish gold. The com-
mon tench is found in many of the still waters of England,
and its haunt in rivers is chiefly amidst weeds and in
shady spots under trees or bushes. It passes the winter in
a torpid state. Being very tenacious of life, it may be
conveyed considerable distances without suffering injury
if kept in damp moss. It spawns in May and June as a

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 233

rule, but in some waters as late as August. The flesh of
the tench is soft and tasteless, but if kept in clear ponds
and well fed it is not to be despised for the table. The
average weight is about five pounds, but instances have
occurred where it has attained the weight of fifteen pounds
and a length of three feet. Tench are supposed to live tor
a century at least. Daniels, in "Rural Sports," makes
mention of a tench, caught at Thornville House, in York-
shire, two feet three inches long and upwards of eleven
pounds in weight, and gives an excellent illustration of
the fish.

Tench Fishing is similar to carp fishing. The
tench is very capricious in its feeding, and although every
known lure and bait may be put before it, yet it will refuse
them in toto, and not give a sign to show that such a fish
is in the pond, although it may be plentifully stocked.
The tackle should be strong but moderately fine, fur-
nished with a cork float and a No. 4 or 6 hook ; better
to have two hooks, one placed about six inches above the
terminal one. The best baits are worms, unscoured,
taken from an old tan pit. A few shot may be placed
above the upper hook and the bait allowed to sink to the
bottom, when it should be drawn quietly towards the
surface. The best time for tench angling is in the evening,
up till dark. The place or swim should be ground baited
with broken worms a day or two before angling in it.
They sometimes nibble a good deal before actually seizing
the bait. When this happens, draw the bait a few
inches away from them, and, fearful lest they will lose it
altogether, they sometimes make a dash at it and are fast.
Their mouths being tough, there is not much danger of
losing them unless the line gets entangled in a bank of

234 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

weeds. It is well to keep a tight line upon them after they
are struck, and work them into a clear place in the water.

Tobacco. — Nine anglers out of ten are addicted to the
use of the "soothing weed," and it is astonishing how
much tobacco can be made away with during a day's
fishing, especially from a boat. There are hundreds of
sorts, blends, and mixtures to be obtained, each man
having his own particular favourite brand. For those who
have not yet settled this momentous question, a good
mixture is here noted : — Two ounces of golden flake honey-
dew, one ounce of best brown cavendish, and half an ounce
of Latakia, well mixed together. This gives a cool and
pleasant-flavoured smoke, and a pipeful of it will last as
long as any other mixture. The above quantity can be
very well carried in an indiarubber pouch, and it keeps
better in this than wrhen put into jars, cases, or boxes.

Trimmers are used in angling for pike in ponds,
lakes, or reservoirs, and are made in several forms, the
principal ones being round and wedge-shaped. The round
sorts are made of cork or light wood, about seven or eight
inches in diameter, with a groove in the edge, capable of
holding about a dozen yards of strong pike line. A peg
is placed in the centre, with the end split, and a double
pike hook fastened to wire or gimp is attached to the line.
The hook is caught in the side of the live bait, which may
be gudgeon or dace, and the shank and a portion of the
gimp is inserted by the baiting needle just under the skin ;
a swivel is fastened to the gimp, and another about two
feet off. If carefully done the bait will live for some hours.
One end of the line is tied to the trimmer, and the distance
at which the bait is to swim is arranged by inserting the
main line into the split peg, so that when the pike seizes

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 235

the bait the cord slips out of this and unwinds from
the trimmer and the whole apparatus floats away, after
which it may be followed in a boat, and the line carefully
handled until the pike is landed. The wedge-shaped
trimmer is baited the same way, and is useful where weeds
abound, as from its shape it can be dragged through them
safely. Always start the trimmer on the windward side, as
it will not then get foul of the bank. A dozen trimmers
can be at work at once, should the water be of any size and
pike abundant. There is not much sport in this style of
fishing, and if fish feel pain — many assert they do not — it
is a cruel and lingering death for those used as bait.

Trolling* is really angling by spinning, and the term is
mostly used to denote the sport when followed in a boat.
All the great lake trout (sa/mo ferox) of Scotland are
mostly captured by trolling, as well as the large fish in the
meres of England and the loughs of Ireland. Pike are also
successfully angled for by this method, but in working among
weeds in a river or pond the gorge tackle is used, as the
hooks are pretty well kept out of the way and not so liable
to get entangled. Usually in trolling from a boat the
angler sits on the after thwart, which has a second one
immediately below, with a space sufficient to allow the rod
butts to lie in, with the reels clear and the rods resting over
the stern arranged fan shape. The boatman sits well up in
the bow and rows against the stream zigzag, keeping the
lines free of each other and nicely spread. When a fish
takes the bait the angler lifts the rod upon which is the
fish and plays it, while the boatman reels up the other
lines — usually there are three rods employed, sometimes
only two. If near the shore it is better for the angler to be
landed at once, and to kill his fish from there. In some

.236 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

lochs in Scotland the rods are thrust into a sheaf of straw
instead of being caught under the seat. It is usual to troll
with the lines at various lengths ; and the rod employed
should be at least fourteen to sixteen feet long, stiff, and
furnished with a reel containing one hundred and twenty
yards of line. A dark day, with wind, is considered the
best for this style of sport, especially in lakes or lochs.
The boatmen, as a rule, know all the likeliest spots to
work over, and it is better to follow their advice in all
relating to the day's sport as regards tackle, baits, cn:c.
Very good information on trolling in lakes can be obtained
from a perusal of "Stewart's Practical Angler," a most
useful and reliable book.

TPOUt, Loch Leven (Salmo I even ien sis).— (Vide
"Loch Leven Trout.")

TPOUt, The Bull (Salmo eriox), is a fish closely
allied to the salmo salar, and like it ascends rivers to spawn
and descends afterwards to the sea. It is found in a
few of the rivers in the northern part of Britain, and is
sometimes called the grey trout. It is not so symmetrical
in appearance as either the salmon or the other varieties.
The tail is inclining to a convex shape, especially in the
older fish ; the tail fin is also of this form. The scales
are smaller than those of the salmon. The colour of the
males reddish brown, and that of the females dusky grey.
They have only a few teeth inserted in the palate bone,
whereas the other varieties of trout have a good line of
teeth there. The flesh is pale, and not much appreciated
as food. The small or young of this fish are called whit-
lings, but this term is also applied to white trout, and
as both the bull and the white or sea trout ascend the
tidal rivers about the same time, they may be confounded ;

THE BRITISH ANGLER S LEXICON. 237

but the difference in their sporting style ought to be able to-
decide the matter, as the bull trout are lazy and dull and do
not rise well at the fly, while the other species are the gamest
fish that swim. They are very destructive to salmon
spawn, and are not desirable inhabitants of a sporting river.
The opinions concerning it are very conflicting, many
asserting that it is really a white or salmo trutta. How-
ever, the fish of the Coquet river may be considered an
established variety, seeing that no other migratory sal-
pionidae are found there. Full information about this fish
may be found in Houghton's fine Avork on "British Fresh
Water Fishes/' in which a characteristic engraving of the
fish is given.

Trout, The Common (Salmo /aria) abounds in
nearly all the lakes and rivers in the British Islands. It
can be found in the smallest mountain stream up to its
source, and in the drains which feed it on its downward
course. The head of the common trout is short and round,
the eye prominent, the shape of the fish when in condition
very symmetrical — the outline of the back corresponding to
that of the belly. The tail is slightly forked in the young
fish ; as it gets older the fork disappears. The teeth are
numerous, strong, and curved ; the scales small. The back
is of a dark ash hue, sometimes tinged with purple ; the
sides yellow. These colours change according to the
streams they inhabit. If the water comes from moorland,
the colours are not so bright, but incline to dusky slate.
If the water runs over clear pebbles or granite, the colours
become quite bright — the belly and sides gold, and the
back takes a lively brownish shade. They have bright red
and black spots sprinkled all over the body and gill covers.
These differences in appearance have led some naturalists

238 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

to suppose that there are different breeds which have been
confounded into one. The tint of the flesh varies also
quite as much as that of the external appearance. Some
have white flesh, some pink, some yellow, and many of
them red, and this difference again is entirely owing to the
variety of the waters they inhabit and the peculiar standard
feeding they obtain in them. Trout will increase in size
very much if they are placed in large bodies of water, where
food is plentiful. A good average size for the common
trout is one pound, and this only to be had in fair-sized
streams ; still, when well fed and inhabiting large rivers,
such as the Thames, these fish will go to the weight of
twenty pounds. The trout are very voracious feeders ;
nothing comes amiss to them, from the tiny midge which
falls upon the surface of the water to the frog or water-
rat. They devour their own species when hunger compels
them ; but there is nothing they are so fond of as a bright
red worm. They will even lose their proverbial shyness
when this is offered to them, and seem as if they could
not resist the temptation. A noted species of the common
trout, or rather one variety of it, is found in many of the
lakes in Ireland. It is called the gillaroo, a description of
which is given under its own heading. There is also a
variety called the slob or estuary trout, hardly ever got
above the tidal flow. It is mostly caught at night, with
bait, being a bad riser at a fly. This trout is in best
condition in January and February, and at this time almost
approaches in shape that of the roach. There is also the
rainbow trout and salmo fontinalis, now introduced into our
lakes and streams. Again, there is the black fin trout
{salmo nigropinnis), which is caught in Lough Melvin, and
is the commonest variety in that lake ; it is also found in

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 239

the mountain pools of Wales, and is a very lively fish, with
pink flesh and unsurpassed in flavour for the table. Dr.
Houghton speaks highly of this variety, and gives an
excellent illustration of it in his work on " Fresh Water
Fishes."

Trout, The Great Lake (Salmo ferox), differs
from the common trout, in that it never ascends rivers
except for the purpose of spawning, is also longer in the
head, has the fins differently placed, the tail square cut, and
the spots less numerous but very much larger. It is non-
migratory and essentially a deep water fish, inhabiting the
lochs in the north of Scotland, a few in the north of
England and Wales and some of the Irish lakes It attains
the weight of thirty pounds ; is as ravenous as a pike,
feeding on small fish ; makes a fierce fight for liberty when
hooked, but is rather shy and difficult to get hold of. It
spawns in October, and comes into season about the first
of March. In appearance it is decidedly ferocious-looking.

Trout, The White or Sea (Salmo trutta), is

rather thicker in proportion to its length than a salmon of
the same size, and has the hinder margin of the gill cover
less rounded. The teeth are strong and well developed,
with a curve ; those in the vomer or palate bone are pointed
alternately in opposite directions. The colour is similar to
that of the salmon ; the spots are dark, and shaped like
the letter X. The average weight may be taken as five
pounds, but they have been caught weighing twenty-six
pounds. The flesh is pink, highly flavoured, and preferred
by many to that of the salmon, as it is not so oily. It
swims in shoals, and is very voracious when leaving the sea
to ascend the rivers, at which time it is caught in numbers
by the stake nets and also affords the best of sport to the

240 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

fly fisher. It can also be angled for, and will take a fly, in
the brackish water at the mouth of the river. It is very
active, and can force its way over rocks and stones if it
has enough water to half cover it. There are one or two
sub-varieties, differing principally in colour, such as the
Galway sea trout and those of the Tweed and Solway.

TPOUt Existence. — The ova of trout are placed or
deposited by the female parent in gravelly beds of streams
in October, November, and December, and are hatched out
in February, March, and April. The young fish are
about five-eighths of an inch in length, and derive their
sustaining nourishment for a few weeks from a sac-like
appendage which is attached to them. In about six to
seven weeks this bag is absorbed, and the young fry flit
about seeking what nourishment the water in which they
swim affords. They now have the same appearance as
young salmon, being marked with transverse bars, and like
them in other respects as well. One known characteristic,
however, will determine whether the fry is salmon or trout,
and that is the second dorsal fins in trout are of a yellow
tinge, while those of the salmon are dark. At the end of the
year they attain a length of three to four inches ; if food is
plentiful, and the stream in which they exist is a favourable
one, they sometimes grow to the length of six and seven
inches. In the second year they increase a couple of
inches, and will then be six to eight ounces in weight. As
a rule, in small rivers and brooks, they do not grow much
more in length, but they increase in breadth and in thick-
ness over the shoulder ; a trout may be nine inches long
and only eight ounces, while one of the same length in a
good stream and well fed will be over one pound in weight.
Some naturalists aver that trout only spawn every second

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 241

season. However, it is well known that they invariably try
to make their way back to their original spawning ground,
just as rooks return to their last year's nests. Trout are
hardly in condition for angling before the first of March,
and then only if the weather is mild ; if not, they are retarded
in condition, sometimes as late as April. A good indication
when trout may be angled for is noted by " Old Isaac
Walton," and it is as true to-day as it was when he wrote
it — " When the hawthorn begins to show the green bud."
Until the weather gets genial and the sun gives out some
heat there is a delay in the insect life hatching, the trout
very often having to depend for food on the flies rising
from the larva state to the surface. One of the first insects
that makes its appearance in quantity is the March brown.
It rises in considerable numbers from the bottom of the river
in March and April, and as it is a big luscious fly the trout
feed on it greedily and soon become lusty and strong.
There are perhaps more trout killed over the country with
the March brown artificial fly than with any other. Some
anglers never mount a cast without having one attached, and
in mountain streams the trout will rise at this fly in September
as fast as they did in March. Then in succession as food
come various duns and spinners, the May fly, the stone fly,
and the cow dung fly, which on windy days is blown into
the river ; next the water clocks and the sedge flies make
their appearance on the water, and, later on, the oak and
house flies. The various land flies are offered to the trout
from the many bushes and grasses which overhang and
grow alongside the river, and these, with worms, molluscs,
and water beetles, make up their forage till spawning time
comes again. No fish are so susceptible to atmospheric
changes as the trout. The day may be bright and clear

P

242 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

yet no sign of a fish either rising or being caught ; in an
hour or so the clouds darken and rain descends, and
when it clears again the lish rise in numbers, splendid
baskets being made just after a thunder shower or a sudden-
downpour of rain, while previous to these all the lures an
angler could offer would be powerless. This change is
owing to magnetic influences of the atmosphere, not per-
ceptible to man, but felt by fish — at least this is the only
known theory put forward for this caprice of the trout. It
is difficult to ascertain the age to which trout live. Daniel,
in " Rural Sports," instances one living in a wrell for
twenty-eight years, but it never increased in size or weight.
Probably five years is the limit of trout existence.

TPOUt Fishing? may justly be termed the premier
sport of the angler ; for although fishing for salmon is
perhaps the more noble pastime, yet it is only the few who
nowadays are able to indulge in it, and there is certainly
more skill required to capture trout than any other fish. A
good trout fisher will always be able to hold his own when
called upon to angle for the larger sa/mo, but a first-class
salmon fisher may know very little about angling for the
smaller variety of the species. Trout can be angled for in
a variety of ways- by bait, artificial minnows, and by both
artificial and natural flies, all of which methods are ex-
plained under their different headings. Certainly the most
popular style is angling for these fish with the artificial fly,
and pleasant sport it is. To become a good trout fisher it
is almost a necessity that the angler should study the sub-
ject and view it in a hundred aspects. When he goes to
a stream to angle, he should be able at once to determine on
his line of action. If the water is full and strong, he has
only to cast away, covering each spot of water carefully, so

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 243

that none of it be missed. If, on the contrary, it is low and
clear, he must search out for himself the best eddies, runs,
or dark spots, and render himself as invisible as possible.
If the water is flooded, he may try the artificial spoon or
minnow, or the natural bait, such as a well-scoured red worm.
Trout in the early season begin to take sooner in the day
and leave off soon in the afternoon ; as days lengthen,
angling may be begun later and continued until the sun goes
down ; and in autumn, in lakes, lochs, or ponds, evening is
the best time, when it may be carried on until dark or even
during the night. Trout lie with their heads up-stream,
consequently the angler should approach them from behind,
that is if the wind is favourable and the water clear; if there
is a good supply of water, the angler may allow his flies to
pass below him, and even to cast below with a long line.
Trout are capricious feeders, and although they must cater
for their appetites at some time or other during the day,
yet it is uncertain when that period will arrive. An angler
may sit on the bank and watch for hours for even the shadow
of a dimple on the water without seeing one, when suddenly
the whole surface becomes alive with rising fish. This is
attributed by some to the wholesale hatching of flies taking
place at the one time, and which the fish, with a natural
instinct, have been waiting for. But again, it has often
been noticed that there were lots of flies sailing down the
river all day without a fish seeming to take one, and still
this unaccountable rise will take place, and is the time
when the angler can fill his basket if he is apt at the work.
These special rises occur generally in the warm summer
evenings, just as the sun is going down, and are called the
" night rises," during which period the best fish are taken.
Very often when trout are not seen rising, and will not take

244 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

the artificial fly on the surface of the water, they are feeding-
on the embryo flies rising from the bottom, which they
hunt and catch before they get to the surface. It is almost
useless trying the artificial fly when this is the case ; at any
rate, the only plan to be adopted is to fish with sunken
flies — that is to say, allow the flies to sink well down in the
water. When two or three friends join in an angling
excursion, they should arrange matters so as not to
interfere with each other's sport ; they should divide,
and agree to fish certain lengths of the river. It is a bad
plan passing each other ; better to wait behind your friend
who is fishing in front, and if half an hour intervenes
between his flogging the water and yours there will not be
much harm done. Perhaps your fly is more to the trout's
taste than his, and you may catch where he has missed. A
trout fisher, when just going on the water, should try and
find out the natural fly which is sailing down, and then
match it from his collection ; this will give him a better
chance. If he has not a facsimile, he should get one as
near it as possible, especially in colour. In rivers where
good-sized trout are known to be, an angler should return
to the water all trout under eight inches. In mountain
streams where small trout abound— and only small trout —
it may be allowable to basket those over six inches, but
all under should certainly be returned. In well-preserved
waters there is usually a scale of the size of the fish which
may be killed. As a rule, large heavy rivers contain a few
good trout, and small quick-running streams an abundance
of small trout. This is partly due to the fact that in
heavy streams the spawning places are not well adapted
for hatching out the young fry, owing to the depth, the cold-
ness of the water, and the sand or marly bottom of the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 245

river getting swept over the spawning grounds. In small
streams, especially mountain ones, the water is shallow, and
there are numerous spots of a nice gravelly sort where the
ova of the trout can be hatched out to perfection, and as the
water in these streams is generally pure there is less
danger of the young, eyed ova getting poisoned or diseased,
as is often the case when hatched in the larger rivers. In
the spring months trout should be searched for in the rough
streams, and as the summer advances they go to the deeper
portions of the river, when they may be angled for in the
pools and holes under overhanging banks, near stones or
rocks rising out of the heavier water. In the summer
evenings they leave the pools to feed on the shallows, re-
turning to the deeper portions when daylight sets in. In
autumn they begin to run up the shallows again, and if there
are any small feeding brooks or ditches they ascend them to
spawn. In the early months, when the water is heavy,
they will take the worm ; in the summer and autumn the
most successful lure is the artificial fly, but very fine sport
may be had with a bright clear worm at these later seasons
provided the angler keeps well out of sight, and angles with
very fine tackle in an artistic manner. (This is described
under the head "Worm Fishing in Clear Water.") In large
rivers, such as the Thames, the best trout are got by
spinning with the live and artificial bait. When a trout is
hooked by any means, endeavour to get an idea of its size,
as sometimes a small trout, hooked by the outside of the jaw
or the back fin, will pull so heavy and play so freely that
the angler is under the delusion that he has caught the
"big one." Now if the trout is small, it is no use wasting
time over him and spoiling the water, so the sooner he is
brought to bank the better. If the trout is large, do not

246 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

hurry ; give him plenty of time, and enjoy to the utmost the
pleasantest part of a trout fisher's sport, namely, the playing
of the fish. This is the crisis, full of doubt, hope, fear, and
exultation, and after the feelings have passed through all
these, there comes the satisfaction of content that you have
won the day, when, lying at your feet, on the grassy slope,
is the bright, handsome, active fish, whose capture with
the minute tackle you have employed is calculated to give
you the greatest meed of enjoyment and pleasure. If the
water is suitable, the man who wades has certainly an
advantage over the man who does not. In the first place,
be'ng so close to the water, in fact half in it, there is much
less chance of the fish seeing him. Their eyes, from the
peculiarity of their formation and the refraction of the
water, are better adapted for looking up than either down
or straight before them, hence they see most distinctly a
figure on the banks of the stream above them, but do not
well see the same figure either wading or kneeling down on
the low shelving sands of a river. Again the wader is able
to take advantage of any likely spot on either side of the
water from which a cast can be made. Winding streams
generally have one of their banks low and shelving.
At each quick bend, and from these low banks, the angler
has the best chance, as opposite is sure to be deep-
running water, in which the trout lie. Therefore, to get
at these " coigns of vantage," the stream may have to
be crossed a dozen times in a quarter of a mile. Some-
times trout " midge," that is, feed upon the very minute
midges or insects which flit to and fro across the water
in the evening sun. When this is the case, it is almost
useless throwing to them an artificial fly ; if you do, it
must be one as infinitesimal as the living ones which they

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 247

are devouring, and the striking must be as quick as thought,
as they seem at that time to be particularly careful not to
get hold of anything objectionable. They rise and rise,
and will not hook, and the angler flogs and changes his
flies, and sits down hopeless— smokes and meditates
upon the uncertainty of things in this world, and tries
again, until he finally goes home disgusted with fish and
fishing and everything connected with either. The dry or
floating fly, very small, is the only chance, and even it is
uncertain when this state of things occurs. When a trout is
seen rising persistently in one spot, he is worth looking
after, and special arrangements should be made to capture
him. In the first place, the fly that he is taking should be
found out, and one picked out of the fly book that will
match ; the finest cast should then be set up and this
fly put on as the tail, either with one or two droppers,
but it will do equally well if alone on the cast. The
distance to the rising fish should be measured with the eye,
and a corresponding length of line drawn off the reel and
whipped on the water away from where the fish is, so that
the proper length may be judged as accurately as possible.
When this is arrived at, give one nice, even, light cast
about one foot above the rising fish ; raise the rod slightly,
to lift any slack line behind the fly, and let the latter
sail quietly over him, when very probably he will confidingly
take it the first time of asking. If he does not, withdraw
the fly, keep quiet in the same place, and after he rises
again, perhaps a foot further up or down, try the same
cast again, when success may this time crown your efforts.
The fish may be rising in an awkward spot, under a
bush, or near a sunken tree, or beside the arches of a
bridge. All these surroundings must be considered with

248 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

care, and the judgment brought into play, how best to
throw the fly temptingly over him ; but this necessity for
the exercise of the angler's ingenuity is one of the great
charms of trout fishing. If trout were easily caught, by any
means, withoul any care or forethought or skill, the charm
would be lost. The greater the difficulty, the more credit
in overcoming it. The late Mr. Francis, in his charming
book on angling, gives such cases as these, and a perusal of
them will be of use and interest to the young angler.

Trout Flies. — Their name it legion, and exhaustive
lists can be found in any tackle maker's catalogue. English
and Scotch dressings are very similar. As a rule, spider or
hackle flies are favourites in Scotland and in the north of
England ; winged flies are mostly to be found in the south
of the latter country and over all Ireland. Many of the
English flies are now dressed with dyed quill bodies, which
are very neat, and stand wear and tear remarkably well.
Nearly every angler, after he has had a little practice in
the gentle art, begins to fashion his own flies or have them
dressed according to his particular ideas, believing, from
his observations and experience, that they will be more
successful as lures than those he has hitherto been in
the habit of using, and in many cases this may be true. He
may be apt at judging colour, and, as mentioned in previous
articles, colour is the essence of success. Whether the
body of the trout fly is composed of silk, fur, wool, or quill,
I believe if the colour is right it will be taken by the trout.
" Red Spinner," one of the most practical anglers of the
present day and a well-known writer on all relating to the
sport, has drawn attention even to the colour of the hooks
upon which the fly is dressed, and recommends careful
observation on the part of anglers as to the merits of blue

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 249

or bronze for the colour of hooks. He seems in favour of
bronze, and I may say I have been more successful with that
•colour. It is always judicious for the fly fisher when going
to any particular district hitherto unknown to him to ascer-
tain the prevailing flies used there, and a good professional
fly dresser should be able to give the proper flies if he is
told the district they are required for and the season. The
following list of flies has been carefully made out, and if
they do not catch fish it is not their fault. All or any of
them may be used for fly fishing in the United Kingdom,
but as there exists an accepted difference in the dressing
for each country three separate lists are appended, one
■each for England, Scotland, and Ireland.

ENGLISH DRESSING.

February Red — body, dark brown mohair and claret mixed ; wings, hen
pheasant ; legs, partridge neck feather. One of the earliest of river
flies. In some districts it comes on in the middle of February, and is
found till the end of March.

Blue Dux— body, light olive silk, with a slight dubbing of blue fur, or
without it ; icings, starling, stained olive ; legs, light olive or dun
hackle ; tail, two rabbit whiskers, with or without a turn of gold tinsel
at tail. The above is one of the best-known of the dun flies, and found
on nearly every trout stream in the United Kingdom. It assumes
several shades, consequently there are many modes of copying it. The
above, if correctly dressed, gives a fairly good imitation. For an early
fly it ranks as one of the favourites.

March Brown (Male)— body, hare's ear and yellow mohair mixed, rib
over with yellow silk or fine gold twist ; legs, partridge back or wren's
tail ; tail, two strands of mallard or partridge's tail feather ; wing*,
quill feather of hen pheasant's wing or partridge tail. This celebrated
fly comes on in March and continues till April, when it changes into
the great red spinner and disappears about the end of May. It also
kills well in August and September, and if made rather large is an
excellent lake fly.

March Brown (Female) — body and legs same as above, ribbed gold
twist ; icings, lightest feather of hen pheasant's wing.

250 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Yellow Dun— body, pale yellow mohair, spun upon lemon-coloured silk ;
icings, young starling ; legs, pale yellow or dun hackle ; a turn of gold
tinsel at tail is sometimes added. This is an indispensable fly, as it
resembles many light duns that appear from time to time. It is first
seen about the middle of May, and will kill well into July.

Alder Fly — body, bronze-coloured peacock's hcrl : legs, rusty-black cock's
hackle ; wings, landrail or brown hen's whig, dressed flat. From the
middle of May till the end of June this fly will kill well. F. Francis,
in his book on angling, gives it an excellent reputation as one of the
best evening flies.

Oak Fly or Downlooker— body, orange floss silk, ribbed with lead-
coloured silk ; legs, furnace hackle ; wings, woodcock or lark. The
natural fly is found on trunks of trees alongside of rivers, and always
with its head downward. It is sometimes used for daping, but does
not generally bear a high reputation as a good killing fly.

Ha uk Lug — body and legs from hare's face, with the blue roots carefully,
clipped off, spun on yellow silk, very full at the shoulder ; tail, two
fibres red cock's hackle ; wings, pale starling, or may be varied by
wings of woodcock, dubbing picked out for legs. This fly may be
ribbed with fine gold oval twist, and may also have some golden-
olive fur, mixed with the hare's fur for the shoulder. The hare lug is
the most universally used of all the present known trout flies.

Cinnamon Fly (called so from a faint odour of cinnamon arising from the
natural insect) — body, hare's ear mixed with a small portion of sable
fur, this spun upon pale orange silk ; legs, ginger hackle ; wings, land-
rail or brown owl. This fly is principally used in August. When
made large it kills well on lakes.

Orange Dun — body, bright orange silk ; legs, dark furnace hackle ;
ivings, dark starling. This fly may also be ribbed with fine gold twist.
It is one of the best for mountain burns when the water is discoloured
with peat soil ; no better fly can be put on the cast.

Sand Fly — body, hare's ear, ribbed with light brown silk ; legs, ginger
hackle ; wings, landrail ; dressed on small hook, No. 1 or No. 2.

Olive Dun — body, yellow floss silk, ribbed with cream-coloured silk ;
wings, sea swallow ; legs, pale dun hackle. This fly requires to be
dressed very neatly. Nearly all the pale dun flies are now made with
straw or quill bodies, dyed to the requisite colour, and are very
delicate in hue.

Hawthorn Fly — body, black ostrich herl, wound with dark brown silk,
full, short, and round ; legs, black hackle ; wings, light starling. An
excellent fly, and one that kills well on ponds and still waters. It may

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 2$T

sometimes be varied with advantage by giving the tail two or three
turns of gold tinsel.

Orange Grouse— body, dark orange silk; turn of gold tinsel at tail;
icings, red grouse ; legs, dark red game cock's hackle feather. This fly
will kill well in August and September.

Red Spinner — body, copper-coloured silk, ribbed with gold thread ; tail,
three strands of black-red game cock ; hackles of same for legs ; wings,
dark starling, or, better still, the warm golden feather from the
American wood duck. This is one of the well known flies, and may be
used after the disappearance of the blue dun in May and June.

Gkkentail or Grannam— body, fur from the hare's poll spun on light
brown silk : a couple of turns of bright green peacock's herl at tail to
represent eggs, as seen in the natural insect ; leg*, ginger hackle ;
icings, light-coloured hen pheasant. This fly only lasts about a fort-
night in April, and is much used by anglers in the North of England.

Green Drake— body, straw-coloured mohair, ribbed with gold twist ;
icings, a mallard or summer duck's mottled feather, dyed a pale olive
green by the bark of the barberry shrub ; leg*, honey dun hackle ; head
of this fly made by a turn or two of peacock's head feather or dark
brown silk.

The Grey Drake— body, light dun-coloured mohair or floss silk ; fail,
two or three mallard fibres ; icing*, mottled' feather of mallard, undyed
and slightly bleached ; leys, a dark dun cock's hackle. The drake flies
are generally dressed now with cork or indiarubber bodies, in the
detached body style [q.v.) ; they are essentially floating flies.

Liptle Green Drake— body, pale ginger-coloured fur from behind the
hare's ear, ribbed over with yellow silk thread ; tail, one or two whisks
from a dun hackle ; icings, mottled feather from mallard, stained as for
green drake ; legs, light dun hackle, stained yellowish. This is called
by Ronald the little yellow May dun, and the dressing as above is
recommended by the same author.

Gravel Bed Fey — body, lead-coloured floss silk ; icings, light woodcock ;
legs made from a long black hackle. This fly is only found in some
localities, but it kills well when the natural flies appear. Tie on a
No. 2 hook.

Little Iron Blue — body, mole's fur, tied with crimson or copper silk ;
legs, slate blue hackle ; wings, of a lead-coloured feather, dressed
upright. This will give a good representation of this little fly, which
appears about the middle of May and continues well into June. It
comes in shoals, generally on cold days, and, when well on, trout seem
to prefer it to all others.

252 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

EVENING Dvis—body, straw-coloured wool, very slightly wound on ; legs,
pale dun hackle ; wings, light starling, dyed a pale yellow ; made on
Nos. 0 and 1 hooks. An excellent evening fly in June and July.

Black Gnat— body, black wool or thin ostrich herl ; legs, black starling ;
wings, blackbird quill feather or darkish starling ; made on No. 0 hook,
very small. A fly well known, and may be used the whole season.

Turkey Brown — body, brown silk floss, ribbed with purple silk ; legs*
brown hackle ; wings, from partridge rump ; tail, two strands of brown
hackle ; hooks No. 2 or 3. Kills well after the disappearance of the
March browns.

•Cow Dung Fly — body, dirty yellow wool : legs, ginger hackle ; wings,
from quill feather of landrail ; Nos. 2 and 3 hooks. Mostly used on
windy days.

Yellow Sally — body, yellowish buff wool ; legs, ginger hackle : wing*,
white feather, dyed a pale yellow. This yellow fly sometimes kills
well, and where willow trees are growing it is very abundant.

Sedge Fly — body, made of ginger-coloured fur, ribbed with gold tinsel ;
legs, light red hackle, run down the body ; under wings starling, upper
wings landrail quill feather ; hook No. 2 or 3.

Silver Horns— body, black ostrich herl ; legs, black hackle ; icings, from
the quill feather of a cock blackbird ; horns, two strands of giey teal ;
hook No. 2 or 3.

Sky Blue — body, blue fur, mixed with pale yellow wool ; legs, ginger
hackle ; wings, from sea swallow ; tail, two strands of ginger hiickle ;
hooks Nos. 0 and 1.

August Dun — body, light brown floss, ribbed with yellow silk ; leg*, light
brown hackle ; icings, light brown mottled feather from brown hen ;
tail, two strands of brown hackle ; hook No. 2 or 3.

Whirling Blue Dxjs— body, blue and ginger fur mixed, ribbed with
yellow silk ; legs, light red hackle ; icings, starling quill feather : tail,
two strands of light red hackle ; Nos. 2 and 3 hooks.

Lee's Favourite — body, black silk, ribbed silver thread ; legs, black
hackle ; icings, water-hen quill feather.

Hofland's Fancy — body, brown silk ; legs, red hackle ; wings, from
woodcock quill feather, with two strands of red hackle for tail.

Broughton Point— body, purple silk ; legs, dark starling hackle, mixed
with two or three fibres of scarlet hackle ; icings, from starling quill
feather.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 253

Green well's Globy— body, olive silk, ribbed with fine gold thread ; /></*,
furnace hackle ; wings, from water-hen quill feather. This was
originally brought out by the Rev. Canon Greenwell, of Durham, to-
represent the iron blue.

Francis Fly — body, bright scarlet floss silk, ribbed with peacock herl j
legs, dun cock's hackle ; wing*, two tips of same.

The Governor — body, peacock herl, tipped at tail with orange floss
silk ; leg*t red hackle ; wings, woodcock quill feather.

The Coachman — body, peacock herl ; legs, red hackle ; wings, pure white
feather from a hen or duck.

Blue Quill Gnat — body, composed of herl, with the rough parts scraped
off with thumb and finger nails ; legs, blue dun hackle ; wings, starling
quill feather.

Red Quill Gnat — body, composed of herl, same way prepared as
described in blue quill gnat, tied with red silk ; legs, red hackle j
icings, from quill feather of starling.

Blue Upright — body, composed of quill, prepared as described. This
fly is made buzz, and hackled with a blue cock's hackle, with fibres of
same colour for tail.

Fenwick's Fancy — body, peacock's herl ; legs, ginger or red hackle ;.
wings, from hen pheasant quill feather.

Wickham's Fancy— body, gold tinsel ; legs, red hackle, run up body -y
wings, from starling quill feather.

Red Ash— body, red waxed silk ; two or three turns of copper peacock's
herl at tail ; wings, starling quill feather ; legs, red hackle.

Black Ant — body, black silk ; two or three turns of black ostrich herl at
tail ; wings, from quill feather of starling of darkest shade ; legs, black,
hackle.

Coch-y-Bondu — No list would be complete without giving the dressing
of this world-renowned fly. Body made thick, of dark copper-coloured
peacock's herl, mixed with black ostrich ; dressed as a hackle fly, the
wings and legs formed by a dark red hackle, with black in centre ; tied
on all sizes of hooks from No. 1 to 8, the larger sizes being used for lake
fishing and having an orange tail or tag added. It is used the whole
season.

Bracken Clock — body, copper-coloured peacock's herl, tied with orange
silk ; hackles, from red feather of landrail. This is one of the most
deadly of spiders, and may be used the whole season. It will take
grayling equally well.

254 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Red Palmer — body, copper-coloured peacock's herl, ribbed with gold
twist ; red cock's hackle over all.

Black Palmer — body, black ostrich herl, ribbed with silver twist ; black
cock's hackle over all. The above two palmers are old-established
favourites for trout, dace, and chub, and if dressed on a No. 0 or 1
hook are equally in favour with the grayling.

Black Spider— body, brown silk ; hackle, from green glossy feather of
cook starling.

Red Spider— body, yellow silk ; hackle, from red feather of landrail.

Dun Spider — body, yellow silk ; hackle, from golden-tipped feather of
dotterel. The above are three of the spiders recommended by the late
W. C. Stewart in his " Practical Angler " ; and the following three
patterns are the winged flies he also advocated in his admirable
work : —

1. A Woodcock Wing, with a single turn of red hackle, dressed with
yellow silk freely exposed on the body.

2. Hark Luc Body, with a corn bunting or chaffinch wing ; a woodcock
wing may be put to same body, but should be made from the small
light- coloured feather taken from the inside of the wing.

3. Woodcock Wing, with a single turn of a soft black hen's hackle or
small feather from the shoulders of the starling, dressed with dark-
coloured silk.

trout flies : spiders.

Dark Woodcock and Orange Body.

Light Woodcock and Yellow Body.

Dark Snipe and Purple Body.

Dark Snipe and Orange Body.

Light Snipe and Yellow Body.

Red Hackle and Orange Body.

Dotterel Hackle and Yellow or Orange Body.

■Golden Plover and Yellow' Body.

Partridge Hackle and Orange Body.

Dark Grouse Hackle and Orange Body.

Light Grouse Hackle and Yellow Body.

Grey Partridge Hackle and Yellow Body.

The above are twelve of the best patterns of spider flies, and are most
deadly in the waters of the north of England and south of Scotland. If

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

255

tied very lightly, with very little feather, they form a splendid range for
the clear streams of Yorkshire.

TROUT AND GRAYLING FLIES : DERBYSHIRE PATTERNS.

Yellow Legs.
Dotterel.
Primrose Dun.
Summer Dun.
Whirling Blue Dun.
Grayling Autumn Dun.
Smock.

Grey Palmer.
Orange Bumble.
Honey Dun Bumble.
Purple Bumble.
Red Tag.

Silver Twist.
Furnace Fly.
February Red.
Hare's Ear Dun.
Peacock Fly.
Blue Dun.
Spanish Needle.
Wren Tail.
Black Gnat.
Small Red Palmer.
Little Chap.
Yellow Dun.
Ash-coloured Dun.

The above is a complete list of the best range of flies for the Derbyshire
streams, either for trout or grayling.

SCOTCH DRESSING.

The following is a complete list of the best known flies and general
favourites in Scotland ; although there are numbers of English patterns
that kill equally well, while some of the Scotch patterns do good service
on the English streams : —

The Slater Fly — body, orange waxed silk, tipped with gold tinsel ;
icings, pheasant back feather ; legs, Coch-y-Bondu hackle, with three
fibres for tail. This is a rare killer in many Scotch streams ; if made
large and tied with yellow silk it is a prime loch fly.

Red March Brown — body, red fur of rabbit, ribbed with silver thread ;

icings, partridge tail ; legs, red hackle ; two fibres of red hackle for

tail.
Willow Fly— body, grey rabbit's fur, ribbed with yellow silk ; wings,

from quill feather of snipe ; legs, yellow hackle.

Profp;ssor — body, light orange silk, ribbed with fine gold tinsel ; icings,
bustard ; legs, red hackle.

Blue and Silver — body, silver tinsel ; icings, from quill feather of snipe ;
legs, black hackle.

Blue and Yellow — body, yellow floss silk ; wings, from quill feather of
snipe ; legs, red hackle.

256 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Blue and Black — body, black floss silk, ribbed with fine silver tinsel ;
icings, quill feather of snipe ; legs, black hackle.

Woodcock and Yellow — body, yellow floss silk, sometimes ribbed with
fine gold tinsel ; wings, from quill feather of woodcock ; legs, red
hackle.

Woodcock a'nd Red — same as above, only red body, ribbed with fine
silver tinsel.

WHITE Tip and YELLOW — body, yellow floss silk, ribbed with silver
tinsel ; wings, feather tipped with white from small wild duck ; legsy
red hackle.

White Tip and Black — body, black floss silk, ribbed silver tinsel ;
roings, same as above ; legs, black hackle.

Hare Lug — body and legs, made from fur of hare's ear, tied with yellow
silk, legs well picked out ; wings, woodcock ; tail, two strands of
mallard feathers, tipped with gold tinsel. This may be varied by
substituting a bloe wing in place of woodcock.

Stone Fly — body, blue rabbit's fur, tipped with silver ; wings, from quill
feather of pheasant ; legs, dun hackle.

White Moth — body, white floss silk, ribbed with silver ; icings, feather

of white goose ; legs, white hackle.
Gkeenwell's Glory — (See English dressing.)
Hofland's Fancy ,,

March Browx ,,

Greentail or Grannam ,,

Oak Fly

Alder Fly ,,

Blue Dun ,,

Whirling Dun ,,

Yellow Dun ,,

Black Gnat ,,

Governor ,,

Cow Dung Fly

Red Ant ,,

Black Ant ,,

Yellow Sally ,,

Cinnamon ,,

THK BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 257

Red Spider— (See Stewart's dressing.)
Black Spidkr ,,

DUN Sl'TDKR ,,

May Fly — (See English dressing.)

There are also a number of spider flies used in the Scotch rivers made
from feathers of grouse, partridge, golden plover, and blackbird.

IRISH DRESSING.

Iron Blue — body, darkest mole's fur, mixed with a little fiery brown
mohair, the last two turns picked out for legs ; wings, swift's quill
feather (second or third leader) ; tail, two fibres of rat's whiskers.

Oak Fly — tag, gold tinsel ; body, orange silk and two turns of hare's ear
under shoulder, ribbed with black horse hair ; leys, red cock's hackle ;
wing*, under wing from a woodcock's quill feather, a few fibres of
partridge tail over ; if tail is used, two fibres of brown mallard. The
natural fly has no tail.

Orange Grouse— tag, gold tinsel ; body, for two-thirds orange floss silk,
then towards the shoulder a mixture of red and yellow mohair and
hare's ear; legs, grouse hackle, trimmed ; icings, partridge tail or grouse.

Hawthorn — tail, gold tinsel ; body, two-thirds black horse hair, re-
mainder black ostrich herl ; l»gs, black cock's hackle, or topping of
largest green plover (two or three turns; ; wings, light starling.

Blue Dun — tag, gold tinsel ; tail, two fibres mallard or rat's whisker ;
body, water-rat fur taken from point of the ribs (tips cut off), mixed
with a little golden olive mohair ; legs, water-rail, or the tips of the
fur mixed with golden olive ; wings, bluish feather of the starling.

Hare's Ear for Spring — body, withered part of hare's ear, mixed with
golden olive mohair ; gold tinsel tag ; tail, two fibres of mallard ; legs,
red cock's hackle, short in fibre (may be varied by using wren tail) ;
wings, landrail of dull colour, not red.

Blue Blow— tag, yellow silk ; tail, mallard fibres ; body, mole's fur ;
legs, black cock's hackle ; wings, tomtit put on whole (the tips).

Cinnamon Fly— tag, gold tinsel ; tail, mallard fibres ; body, warm golden
olive mohair and fox fur ; legs, red cock's hackle ; icings, landrail
(ruddy).

March Brown— tag, gold Linsel ; tail, two fibres of mallard ; body,
hare's ear, cinnamon mohair and golden olive mixed, ribbed with yellow
silk ; legs, partridge back ; wings, partridge tail. Another dressing —
tag and tail, as the above ; body, hare's ear, claret (very little) and

Q

258 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

golden olive mixed ; legs, wren's tail ; wings, under of starling and over
of a partridge tail ; a little green mohair sometimes is good mixed with
the body (to imitate the female fly).

Cow Dung Fly— body, warmish lemon yellow, with a little green up
towards shoulder ; legs, ginger cook's hackle ; wings, landrail, tied flat ;
a few fibres of partridge tail over the rail ; a turn of tinsel at tail.

Yellow Wren— body, bright yellow silk, colour of ribbon tying cigars ;
legs, wren tail ; wings, starling.

Green Wren — body, grass green silk or mohair ; l*g$, wren tail ; icings,
starling or cock pheasant.

Hofland's Fancy— body, reddish brown silk ; fail, mallard ; leys, red
hackle ; wings, woodcock.

Wickham— body, flat gold tinsel, ribbed with gold thread ; legs, black
red game hackle ; icings, landrail or woodcock.

Greenwell's Glory — body, dark olive silk, ribbed with fine gold wire ;
leys, dark coch-y-bondu hackle ; wings, woodcock.

Black over Orange— body, orange silk; legs, peewit's topping; icings,
dark starling.

Yellow Rail — body, lemon-coloured floss silk; legs, outside of wing of
landrail (trimmed slightly) ; icings, the ruddy-coloured feather of land-
rail's pinion, dressed rather long and full ; a turn of gold tinsel at tail.

Orange Rail— body, orange silk ; legs, landrail, trimmed ; wing, land-
rail ; a turn of tinsel at tail.

Green Rail — body, grass green silk floss ; legs, landrail ; icings, ditto ; a
turn of gold tinsel at tail.

Twisting" Engine is a useful little appliance tor
twisting gut and hair into snoods, and may be had at any
respectable tackle shop.

Varnish, Coaehmaker'S, is used for landing net
handles and rods, and may be procured -from nearly all
druggists. The amateur would find it too troublesome to
make, as well as costly.

Varnish, Hard Spirit.— Sandarach, four ounces;
pale seed lac, two ounces ; gum elemi, one ounce ; alcohol,
one quart. Digest with agitation until dissolved, then add
two ounces of Venice turpentine.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 259

Varnish, Shellac, for touching up the heads of flies
or the loose ends of silk tyings, is made by dissolving pale
shellac or sealing wax in double the quantity of spirits of
wine until it is as thick as cream. Touch the articles with
the point of a camel's hair brush, which may be kept in the
bottle, inserted in the cork.

Waders, either stockings or trousers, are made from a
particular kind of indiarubber cloth, and are of various
strengths and grades of thickness. Those made from satteen
cloth are very light and comfortable. Fishing waders
should always be worn over woollen stockings or socks,
and another pair of the same drawn over the waders
before putting on the brogues or boots. This precaution is
necessary to prevent the waders getting chafed or cut
by the boots or by sand or gravel rubbing against them.
The overboots should be either leather, canvas, or india-
rubber, buckled across the front of the foot, the soles
with nails and a few holes bored in them to allow the
water to escape freely. Some prefer indiarubber soles,
fluted ; these bite very well on slippery stones, but they
have not the firmness of leather, and the angler requires
all the command possible over his feet, especially when
wading in heavy water and over a stony bottom. With
care waders will last many seasons, but to gain this end
several precautions are necessary. The angler should
not kneel on a shingly beach or rough bank with them ; nor
should he climb fences or attempt making his way through
quickset hedges or briars, as the least prick of a thorn or
scratch will destroy their waterproof qualities and render
them useless. Again, after being used they should be
turned inside out, all sand or dirt washed off them, and
hung up in the air to dry ; when the inside is dry, they

260 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

should be reversed and the outside dried. The perspiration
which accumulates inside the legs and feet, if allowed
to remain without drying off. has a tendency to decompose
the indiarubber, and they cease to be waterproof. Waders
should never be dried near a fire, and when not in use
should be hung from a nail by the straps, or slung over a
frame, and should not be folded or put in a box or drawer.
When the feet of the waders wear, they can be refooted
by sending them to the makers. If the angler is using
wading stockings, he should be careful when stooping, lest
the water should make its way over the top and render
them very uncomfortable; and again, it is dangerous getting
into holes or deep water with them, for if they get full of
water they become so weighty that the angler gets
" pounded" and unable to move. Many instances have
occurred of persons being drowned through the waders
filling and causing the angler to fall, the weight of the filled
waders preventing him rising. It is a dangerous practice
wearing wading stockings in a deep river ; safer by far, if
trousers are not available, to wade in the ordinary dress,
even at the risk of getting wet legs and feet. Waders are
now manufactured by a new process, which keeps them
soft and pliable in all weathers.

Walking-Stick Rods are made in various qualities.
Some are perfect works of art, as far as rod making is
concerned, The middle and tops go into a bored Malacca
cane, fitted with silver and other mounts.

Walton, Isaac, the father of the art and science of
angling, was born at Stafford in the month of August, 1593.
He must have spent his youth in this neighbourhood, and
no doubt acquired the taste for angling which has ever been

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 261

and ever will be associated with his name. In 1624 he
went to London, and entered into business as a draper. In
1626 he married Rachel Floud, a descendant of Archbishop
Cranmer. He had seven children by this marriage, but
they all died young, and his wife died in 1640. He married
again in 1646, the daughter of the then Bishop of Bath and
Wells. At the age of fifty he retired from business, and
devoted himself to literature and angling. His second wife
died in 1662, aud was buried at Winchester. He brought
out and published the ''Complete Angler" when he was
sixty years of age. it attained a wide popularity, and ran
through many editions. It is considered to be one of the
best styles of English pastoral writing, even up to the
present day, and no angler should be without a copy of it,
as there is a fund of information in it, written in quaint
and most beautiful language. He published several works
after this celebrated one, and ended his days at Winchester
on the fifteenth of December, 1683. In the cathedral of
that city, in a chapel in the south aisle, on a black marble
stone, is this incription to his memory : —

Uere restetb tbc boos of

MR. ISAAC WALTON,

TiMbo ogeo tbe I5tb December, 16S3.

Alas ! he's gone before ;
Gone to return no more.
Our panting hearts aspire
After their aged sire,
Whose well-spent life did last
Full ninety years and past ;
But now he hath begun
That which will ne'er be done
Crowned with eternal bliss,
We wish our souls with his.

VOTIS MOOE3TIS SIC FLERUNT LIBERI

262

THE BRITISH ANGLER S LEXICON.

Washafoa, known also as Bethabara or Sumatra
greenheart, is a wood grown in the East Indies, and used
occasionally for top pieces of trout fly rods. It is dense,
hard-grained, and elastic, takes a beautiful polish, is not so
heavy as the genuine greenheart, but has the bad habit of
breaking suddenly without any apparent cause, and as it is
difficult to get straight in the grain, the rod makers, on
account of these two faults, fight shy of it. For top pieces
it is inferior to greenheart.

Wasp GPUbs.— These are got from the wasp's nest.
Trout will occasionally take them, but they are more
esteemed by chub and dace. This bait is sometimes
toasted, to make it tougher.

WATERPROOF FISHING JACKET.

Waterproof Fishing1 Jackets.— These are made
with or without capes, of light waterproof material, and

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

263

short enough to come just over the top of the fishing
stockings. They should have hooks and eyes, to loop up
when deep wading, Very useful for keeping the angler
dry in wet weather, and portable enough to strap on the
fishing basket.

Waterproofed Lines. — (See 'Lines.')

Winches.— (See "Reels.")

Winchester Fly BOX. — An ingenious contrivance,
the invention of Mr. Bonham Carter, a Hampshire angler.
For the dry fly fisher this box is invaluable. The makers
claim the following advantages over all other boxes : —

THE WINCHESTER FLY BOX.

First, the gut on the flies is kept damp ; second, by the
interior construction the flies can be removed or replaced
in a moment ; third, it will hold eight to ten dozen flies,
and is so compact that it can be carried in an ordinary
pocket.

264 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

Worms are many and various, but there are three or
four species which can be easily obtained and will fully
satisfy all the requirements of the angler. The black-
headed worm is to be found in most garden soils, in the
scrapings of a road, or in decayed vegetable matter. It
is devoid of the knot which most worms possess, and is of
a darkish colour, but after it has been scoured properly it
becomes a good clear red. This variety can readily be
obtained of the proper size, and lasts long on the hook,
being very tough in the skin. It is a very successful bait
for all fishes, and is greedily attacked by trout, salmon,
and perch. The red-headed worm is to be found in very
rich soil, in manure heaps, and at the edges of the soil
where the moisture from a manure heap accumulates. It
is short and thick, of a strong red colour down the back,
and of a bluish shade underneath. It does not make a very
good bait, as it soon bleaches in the water and gets flabby.
The brandling worm is a great favourite with many anglers,
and is iound in old decayed hot-beds or manure heaps.
It has rings all round its body, and a knot near the middle.
Brandlings can be scoured in a few days, but do not
toughen, and consequently tear off the hook easily, so it
is essential to have a large number of them for a day's
fishing ; they do not last long, are not nice to handle,
and emit a disagreeable smell when pierced by the hook.
The dew worm can be found after dark, when rain has
fallen ; candlelight will then reveal them crawling over
the ground. These worms are also to be got in the rich
banks of a river. They require more scouring than most
of the other varieties, but are lively, good baits if obtained
the right size.

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

265

Worm Baiting*.— To bait the single hook, which
should be No. 9 or 10 round bent (Kendal scale), or perhaps
better a McKenzie bend, take the worm between the thumb
and forefinger of the left hand, gently nipping its head ;
this will cause its mouth to open. Then with the right hand
insert the point of the hook, and push the bait up with the
forefinger and thumb of the left hand until the head can be
grasped by the forefinger and thumb of right hand ; it
can then be drawn over the entire hook and so far up
the gut that about three-quarters of an inch of the tail

SINGLE HOOK, BAITFD,

STEWART TACKLE, BAITED.

hangs free. Great care must be taken not to break the
worm or expose the hook in any way. (See illustration.)
This requires a little practice, but it is soon acquired, and
well prepared worms can be impaled very quickly. If the
worm is small and not of sufficient length to cover the
hook, then use two by threading the first worm about half,
bringing the barb out about middle ring, push this up the

266 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

gut. then thread the second worm as first mentioned and
bring it down to meet the other, so that the two tails will
hang loose together. If the worm is very large, thread
about a fourth of it on to the hook, bring the barb out and
take up a loop of the worm and thread another fourth part of
it, leaving a fourth of it free. Large worms as a rule should
be discarded by the trout angler ; the smaller kind are
decidedly the best to use. Worms being very slimy and
slippery in the fingers, it will be found advisable for the
angler to have a little fine sand or dry soil in some
convenient pocket or bag, into which he can dip his
finger and thumb, thus obtaining a firmer grip, making
the baiting more satisfactory. If the angler is using the
three-hook or Stewart tackle, the baiting is somewhat
easier. The worm is taken out of the bag or box, and the
three hooks stuck into it ; it does not matter much how this
is done, so long as the hooks are holding. (See illustration.)
This plan is greatly practised in Scotland and also in
England. It is a very deadly method of using the worm,
and a debatable question is often raised as to which is the
better way, the single hook or the Stewart tackle.

Worm Fishing* is divided into two sections— heavy
or flood water fishing and clear or low water fishing. To
pursue the first style, the angler has a well-scoured worm
threaded, on a round bend hook, armed to about one and
a-half yards of gut. Leads, either of split shot or any of the
other descriptions, are fastened on the line about eight or
nine inches above the hook, the number* of shot or weight
of lead varying according to the swiftness of the water.
These being attached to a strong reel line and short stiff
rod, the angler walks slowly along the bank of the river,
casting the bait out into the stream and allowing it to

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 267

travel into the slack water near the bank. The trout are
generally near the edges of the water looking out for
food. When the line stops, lower the point of the rod for
a second or pause for the same time, then lift sharply ; if
there is a fish on throw it out, unless it is a very large one
which would require some play and time. There is very
little law given in this heavy water fishing, and the sooner
the fish is grassed the better, and the stream being strong
and muddy coloured, it is difficult for an angler to use his
net with any kind of satisfaction. If the fish has missed,
the worm will usually be found up the line, and may be
brought down to its place and another trial given ; if
broken badly, put a fresh worm on. There is no skill
required for this style of angling, nor is it recognized as
sport amongst the true lovers of the gentle art. Never-
theless, it is greatly practised, and heavy baskets of fish are
taken in this manner by the rural angler, causing a scarcity
in many a good trout stream. Clear water worm fishing
is a horse of another colour, and is quite as scientific as
fly fishing, and perhaps even more difficuLt to master. It is
much resorted to in clear streams, in the months of June
and July, when the water runs low and the sky is too
bright for successful fly fishing. The modus operandi is
as follows: — The angler is armed with a nice handy rod
of from twelve to fourteen feet long, inclining to stiffness ;
a reel line, not too fine, and a nicely tapered gut cast
about six feet long. The hook should be either a No. 9
or 10 round bend or McKenzie hook ; if the angler pre-
fers, he can use a compound tackle, such as the Stewart
or Pennell. In using the single hook, thread it with a
nice lively, clear, tough worm, covering it well and
leaving about half to three-quarters of an inch of the

268 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

tail free. It is not necessary to use any shot, but a small
No. 6 about six or seven inches above the hook helps to
regulate the speed of the worm in rough, strong waters ;
in the low, clear streams of summer the shot may be
dispensed with altogether. Now "approach the waterV
carefully, avoiding observation as much as possible, and
having drawn off line about the length of the rod, or a
little longer, cast well up into the stream Directly the
worm touches the water, the point of the rod should be
gently raised ; this allows the bait to sink. Do not further
interfere with it, but allow the worm to travel with
the stream until it is opposite the spot where the angler
is standing, wdien the same sort of cast may be repeated.
Clear water worm fishing is always practised up stream,
that is, the angler must fish and wade up the water.
Fishing down stream with the worm is bad form, and
very seldom attended with any success. The best por-
tions of a river are where the streams are broken with
stones and boulders, and not too deep ; it is in such
places that the trout lie in summer weather watching for
food, and the angler can approach them unseen, as the
water is generally rough and the stones afford a shelter.
The next best portions are the pools, if ruffled by wind,
particularly the thinner reaches at the heads of streams.
These should be most carefully fished, and from such, should
wreather and wind be favourable, the angler will largely
increase his take ; however, if the pools are dead calm, it
is better to devote attention to the streams. When the
worm is cast up the water, the stoppage of the line is the
first indication of the bait being seized, but this may some-
times happen when the worm is fouled by an obstruction ;
the angler can generally tell, for if a trout has attacked the

THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON. 269

worm there is a gentle tremor perceptible on the line.
Give a moment, lower the point of the rod, and strike down
stream ; five times out of six the fish will be hooked and
the worm will be found some inches up the line, when it
can be drawn down into position again and used as before.
If the Stewart or Pennell tackle is employed, a fresh worm
must be put on at every bite. If the angler is using the
brandling or any tender worm the Stewart tackle is the
best. The angler should, if at all possible, wade, as doing
so gives him a great advantage in crossing from one side
to the other ; besides he can keep lower down in the water
and reach the most likely spots. Success in worm fishing
in a measure greatly depends upon the preparation of
the worms, which should not be too large. If these are
properly scoured and cleaned in moss some days before
using, according to the instructions already given, the
angler will be materially aided in his sport. It is almost a
necessity for the tyro to have some practical lessons from,
a good worm fisher before he can become an expert.
An exhaustive description of worm fishing is given in
"Stewart's Practical Angler," a most valuable manual for
an amateur to possess.

Worm SeoilFingV— After being gathered, let the
worms be put into a pail or vessel of water for a few minutes,
then lifted out and laid on a dry board, when they will
begin to crawl and cast. They may then be picked off,
and put into a crock or any suitable vessel containing
some clean fresh moss, well washed, wrung dry, and free
from straws or small sticks. In this they will bury them-
selves, and soon begin to clean and toughen. The moss
should be renewed in a couple of days, and any dead or
damaged worms removed. They will keep lively in this

270 THE BRITISH ANGLER'S LEXICON.

way for five or six weeks. The angler should always
return to the store any worms he may have left over after
a day's fishing, when they will freshen up again. Keep
the store vessel in a cool place. A novel mode of getting a
supply of worms may be mentioned here, as it has been
tried with success. Choose any spot in garden or field
likely to contain them. Drive a spade into the ground,
and, using the shaft as a lever, rock backwards and for-
wards, and in a minute or so all the worms within two
yards of the spade will be seen emerging from the soil,
hastening to escape the unusual disturbance. They can
be picked up clean and bright, quite superior in appearance
to what they would be if dug out in the usual manner.
When no more worms appear, withdraw the spade and
renew operations a short distance off, and in a quarter of
an hour, if weather and ground be favourable, many dozens
may be procured, and in a comparatively easy manner.

THE END.

S. ALLCOCK & Co.,

STANDARD WORKS, REDDITCH.

Branch Houses— Toronto, Canada. Gut Factory— Mureia, Spain.

London' Office — 60, Queen Victoria Street, E.C.

WHOLESALE AGENTS:

Paris— E. Foucault, 77, Rue Rambuteau.

Vienna — Otto Noot, III. Heumnrkt, Lagergas«e, 2.

New York— 219, Fulton Street.

Melbourne — Mr. J. D. Wragg, Olderfleet Chambers, Collin Street.

SPECIALITIES AND NOVELTIES.

Piatt's Patent Fishing
Basket

Very Superior Split-
Cane Rods (our own
make)

Solid Plaited Water-
proof Line
"Swivel Tail" Baits

The Patent Ring-
Mounted Devon
The Aluminium Reel

(very light)

Patent Inimitable May
and Trout Flies

Jardine's Plugless
Float

TRADE MARK.

u Imperceptible " Spinning

Tackle
Geen's Patent Spiral Minnow

(the most perfect Spinning
Bait ever invented)

The "Champion" Spinner
Celluloid Floats
Drummond Reel
Standard Trout and Salmon
Flies.

Salmon Fly Tins

Col. Clark's Landing Handle

and Net
Spinning Salmon Flies
Patent Gimp

,, Salmon Hooks

,, Phantoms
Emery Bar Spinner.

IMPORTERS OF CANES.

Highest Awards at Fifteen INTERNATIONAL Exhibitions.

MANUFACTURERS OF

Fish Hooks, Fishing Rods, Reels, Lines,

AND

Fishing Tackle of every Description

(WHOLKSALE ONLY).

The 'Sheve Donard. '■

/Bbc(3ec & Co.,

BELFAST, IRELAND,

INVENTORS OF

The CELEBRATED ULSTER COAT,

Have introduced the above new Cape for
Fishing and Shooting.

PERFECTLY WATERPROOF AND VENTILATING.

It is a Cape with Sleeves and lias been pronounced

by competent judges to be a Perfect Garment

for the Work,

PATTERNS OF MATERIALS FORWARDED
ON APPLICATION.

McGEE & Co., keep in stock every variety of Homespuns
for Shooting, Fishing, Golfing, and all outdoor pursuits.

W. J. CUMMINS,

MANUFACTURER OF HIGH-CLASS

RODS, REELS, TACKLE, GUT CASTS, FLIES, &G.

See Illustrated Catalogue 4- Guide for full particulars,
Post Free for Three Stamps,

f 1

1!

CUMMINS' GENUINE AMERICAN

Split Cane Trout Rods,

A MARVEL IN ROD-MAKING

10, ioj, and n Feet, 3 joints, 2 tops, solid water-
proof winch fittings and ferrules nickel-plated,
treble brazed, beautifully whipped and ringed,
vulcanite balance handle, grooved wood case to
protect Rod when travelling, with bag ... 25/-

11J and 12 Feet do 29/6

These Rods are perfect in workmanship, balance,
finish, and spring, and can with confidence be recom-
mended. They are not so whippy as the ordinary
American Rods.

Numerous Testimonials from Customers.

These Rods are second to none, and can only
be had direct from W. J. CUMMINS. They are
manufactured expressly for him in America, to his
own special patterns.

BEWARE OF WORTHLESS IMITATIONS.

ADDRESS :

W. J. CUMMINS,

FISHING ROD & TACKLE
MANUFACTURER,

NORTH OF ENGLAND ROD WORKS,

BISHOP AUCKLAND,

Co. DURHAM.

I^leixzltDle G-rJoo 3FLoc3Ls,

(BRADDKLLS PATENT.)

REGISTERED

Trade Mark.

ESTABLISHED

1811.

Stour Valley Protection Association,
Canterbury,
GENTLEMEN,— The " Flexible Grip " C.reenheart Flj
Rod recently sent me is certainly possessed of the
most powerful and steady action of any rod I have
ever handled. It is particularly valuable for
May fly fishing, while for ordinary work it
iseqnally applicable. I value this Rod
beyond all I possess. I presume
yon prophesy a large sale,
which, indeed, they truly
merit. — Yours, etc

F. C. NASH,

Hen. S*

f

m

B

>d / \

m

^

®

%

W

Hundreds of these Bods are in use both at home and
on the continent, and are airing the greatest satis-
faction. All sizes for this season are fitted with
OUT NEW LN1VEBSAL If INCH FITTINGS,

Price from 20i- Upwards.
SAMPLE TESTIMONIAL.

Inventors of

"FLEXIBLE
GRIP" RODS. ]
Short
Wading Stockings.

'Semper Flexilis" Brand
of Waterproof Fishing Goods.

"PERFECT" Brogues.

"ULSTER" SILK WATERPROOF LINES.

THE "EGERIA," "SHORE," AND
QUICKSTEP" SEA FISHING BASKETS,
Etc., Etc.
ill of which are manufactured bg skilled work mem
in our own factory under personal supervision*

Salmon Flies for Every River in the Country.

Having jnst completed the ex-
tension of our Works, and fitted
up a larger engine and new and
and more extensive machinery, we
are in a position to execute all
orders with despatch, and of the
s.tme standard quality for which
our name has been noted for the
past 81 years.

General Catalogue 2d., Post Free. Annual Gut & Cast Line List, Post Free,

THE

"OWL" WHISKEY

Is well-known in the North of Ireland as
the best kind of Liquor for Anglers to fill
their Flasks with, as it possesses AGE,
FLAVOUR, QUALITY, and RIPENESS.

Sold in Cases at 20/- per Gal., delivered
free at any Railway Station.

The "DOUBLE OWL," a very old and
matured Spirit, at 25/- per Gallon.

E. & W. PIM,

27 & 29, High Street, BELFAST.
Dublin Road, BELFAST.

Pirn Street, BELFAST.
BANGOR, eo. DOWN.

to -A-Hxtghle;

LITTLE'S

PATENT

"Inimitable" May Flies.

Bew ^Uustrateb Catalog ue

Of the famous "Balmoral" Split Cane Rods, Wood Rods,

Reels, Lines, Waders, Artificial Baits, Fly Books, &c,

forwarded Post Free on receipt of Three Stamps.

The finest Catalogue published in London.

SALMON, TROUT, AND GRAYLING FLIES.

THE LARGEST STOCK IN LONDON.

&. LITTLE 8c Co.,

15y Special Appointment to T.R.I I. the Prince and Princess of Wales,
II. R II. (late) Prince Conscrt, H I.M. (late) Napoleon III.,

63, Haymarket, LOiNDON, S.W.

The Angler's Paper.

" Under the Editorship of Mr. R. B. Marston, the ' Fishing
Gazette ' has attained a high standard as an authority on
Piscatorial Subjects." — DaUy Ntwx.

THE FISHING GAZETTE

ESTABLISHED 1877.

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, 10s. 6d.f POST FREE.

Telegraphic Address— " RSV3AM, LONDON."
Telephone No. 2679.

THE BEST authority on all kinds of Angling.

THE BEST medium for Advertising Fishings to Let or
Rent.

THE BEST medium for Hotel Advertisers having good
Free Fishing, securing the patronage of Tourist
Anglers from all parts.

THE BEST medium for bringing the Announcements of
Fishery Proprietors, Land and Estate Agents, Fishing
Tackle Makers, &c, under the notice of the Angling
Public.

The Life of every Advertiser and Subscriber is Insured by

the Proprietors for £100 in ease of death when

travelling or by drowning when fishing.

ADDRESS :

THE MANAGER, THE "FISHING GAZETTE,"

St. Dunstaii's House, Fetter Lane,

LONDON.

The PATENT VENTILATED and
SPINDLELESS REEL.

PRINCIPAL FEATURES.

" Increased facility for winding in the line."

"Ihe admission of Air underneath the line

when wound on the reel, preventing

Rotting."

" Reduction of weight by removal of Spindle

and perforations."

BEST STEEL, WORKS.

2 2\ t.\ 25 3 in.

10/6 12/- 13/6 15/6 17/- each

3* 32- 3i 4 in.

18/6 20/6 22/- 24/- each

t\ 4$ 4$ 5 in.

25/6 27/- 29/- 30/6 each
CHEAPER QUALITY, No. 176a.
2 ?\ i\ a$ 3 in-

7/9 8/6 9/3 IO/3 I2/" each

3s 3-J 3i " 4 in-

13/6 15/6 17/ 18/6 each
4i 4$ 4:} S in.

20/- 22/- 24/- 25/6 each
Made in Ebnnite at same prices.

Can be obtained through all respectable dealers

Sole Maker : REUBEN HEATON,

SALMON & TROUT REEL MAKERS,

(wholesale only.) 161 to 165, HOSPITAL STREET, BIRMINGHAM

HIGH-CLASS SALMON FLIES AND CASTS.

W. J. CUMMINS' range of Salmon Flies is the fines
and most complete in the United Kingdom, and fo
quality of dressing, hooks, and price will bear favourabh
comparison with any house in the trade.

Salmon Anglers should have a copy of his New

Illustrated Catalogue and Guide, which is (or

warded post free to any address for three stamps.

W. J. CUMMINS being a practical Salmon Fisher
gentlemen will find it to their advantage to consult h\xv
and see his Flies, Casts, &c.

Salmon Casts made from the Stoutest Imperial Salmon Gat.

North of England Rod Works, BISHOP AUCKLAND.

ESTABLISHED 1860.

RICHARD WHEATLEY & SON,

30, Hockley Street, and 93, Spencer Street,

:Qi]Fti\a:i3xrGm:^k.i^r,

MANUFACTURERS OF

jf l\> Boohs, purses, anb jfanc\>
Heather (Boobs, etc

Trout and Salmon
Ply Books.

Trolling and Bottom
Fishing Cases.

Winch Cases & Stock Fly
Cases for Shopkeepers.

From 100 to 150 Varieties and
Sizes to select from.

An

Extraordinary

Assortment

of Every

Description

always in

Stock.

WHEAT-LEY'S PATENT.

WHOLESALE ONLY.

W. J. CUMMINS'

Turkey Quill Minnow.

THE MOST DEADLY MINNOW YET INVENTED.

THOUSANDS OF TESTIMONIALS.

i£ in.

No. i

1/6

i£ in.

2\ in.

No. 2

No. 3

1/6

1/9

POSTAGE,

2d.

EX L'M

2i in.
No. 4

2/6

Address : W. J. CUMMINS,

North of England Rod Works,
co dukham. BISHOP AUCKLAND.

THE CHEAPEST HOUSE IN THE TRADE

G. LITTLE & CO,?

63, Haymarket, LONDON, S.W.

Retail Profits saved and quality of the highest order.

CALL AND INSPECT OUR STOCK.

P

YB I06C